Click here to HP LaserJet 4730xs printer user Manual

Click here to HP LaserJet 4730xs printer user Manual
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
User Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Series
User Guide
Copyright and License
Trademark Credits
© 2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe® is a trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Corel® and CorelDRAW™ are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Corel
Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited.
The information contained in this document
is subject to change without notice.
Energy Star® and the Energy Star logo® are
U.S. registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Part number Q7517-90981
Edition 1, 11/2005
Microsoft® is a U.S. registered trademark of
the Microsoft Corporation.
Netscape Navigator is a U.S. trademark of
Netscape Communications.
PANTONE® Colors generated may not
match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Publications for
accurate color. PANTONE® and other
Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of
Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2000.
PostScript® is a trademark of Adobe
Systems.
TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Windows®, MS Windows®, and Windows
NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
HP customer care
Online services
For 24-hour access to information by using a modem or Internet connection
World Wide Web: Updated HP printer software, product and support information, and printer drivers in
several languages can be obtained from http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. (The site is in English.)
Online troubleshooting tools
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop
computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and resolve computing and
printing problems. The ISPE tools are available at http://instantsupport.hp.com.
Telephone support
Hewlett-Packard Company provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call,
you will be connected to a responsive team that is waiting to help you. For the telephone number for
your country/region, see the flyer that came in the box with the product, or visit http://www.hp.com/
support. Before calling HP, have the following information ready: the product name and serial number,
the date of purchase, and a description of the problem.
You can also find support on the Internet at http://www.hp.com. Click the support & drivers block.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/clj4730mfp_software. (The site is in English, but printer drivers can be
downloaded in several languages.)
For information over the telephone, see the flyer that came in the box with the MFP.
HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies
Order supplies from the following Web sites:
United States: http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies
Canada: http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies
Europe: http://www.hp.com/go/supplies
Asia-Pacific: http://www.hp.com/paper/
Order accessories from http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. For more information, see Ordering
parts, accessories, and supplies.
To order supplies or accessories over the telephone, call the following numbers:
United States businesses: 800-282-6672
United States small and medium businesses: 800-888-9909
United States home and home offices: 800-752-0900
Canada: 800-387-3154
To find the phone numbers for other countries/regions, see the flyer that came in the box with the MFP.
ENWW
iii
HP service information
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers in the United States or Canada, call 800-243-9816 (United States) or
800-387-3867 (Canada). Or, go to http://www.hp.com/go/cposupportguide.
For service for your HP product in other countries/regions, call the customer support number for your
country/region. See the flyer that came in the box with the MFP.
HP service agreements
Call: 800-HPINVENT [800-474-6836 (U.S.)] or 800-268-1221 (Canada).
Out-of-Warranty Service: 800-633-3600.
Extended Service: Call: 800-HPINVENT [800-474-6836 (U.S.)] or 800-268-1221 (Canada). Or, go to
the HP Care Pack Services Web site at http://www.hpexpress-services.com.
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/macosx for Mac OS X support information and HP subscription service for
driver updates.
Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user.
iv
HP customer care
ENWW
Table of contents
1 MFP basics
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Series configurations ...............................................................................2
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp (Q7517A-base model) .............................................................2
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp (Q7518A) ..............................................................................3
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp (Q7519A) ............................................................................3
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp (Q7520A) ...........................................................................4
Features and benefits of the multifunction peripheral (MFP) ................................................................5
Features list ..........................................................................................................................5
MFP parts and accessories ...................................................................................................................9
Identifying parts of the MFP ..................................................................................................9
Accessories and supplies ...................................................................................................10
Interface ports .....................................................................................................................11
Moving the MFP ..................................................................................................................12
Software ..............................................................................................................................................13
Operating systems and MFP components ..........................................................................13
Software features ................................................................................................................14
Driver Autoconfiguration .....................................................................................14
Update Now .......................................................................................................14
HP Driver Preconfiguration ................................................................................14
Installing the printing system software ................................................................................14
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections ..................14
Installing Windows printing system software for networks .................................15
To set up a Windows computer to use the network MFP using Windowssharing ...............................................................................................................16
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been
connected ...........................................................................................................16
Uninstalling the MFP software ............................................................................................17
To remove software from Windows operating systems .....................................17
Software for networks .........................................................................................................17
Summary of HP networking solutions ................................................................17
HP Web Jetadmin ..............................................................................................17
UNIX ...................................................................................................................18
Utilities ................................................................................................................................18
MFP utilities ........................................................................................................18
HP Easy Printer Care Software ..........................................................................18
Embedded Web server ......................................................................................19
Features ............................................................................................19
Other components and utilities ...........................................................................20
Software for Macintosh computers ......................................................................................................21
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks ................................................21
ENWW
v
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB) ......................22
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems ....................................................23
Printer drivers ......................................................................................................................................24
Supported printer drivers ....................................................................................................24
Additional drivers ................................................................................................................24
Select the correct printer driver ...........................................................................................25
Printer-driver Help (Windows) .............................................................................................25
Gaining access to the printer drivers ..................................................................................25
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers ..............................................................................................27
Supported printer drivers ....................................................................................................27
Gaining access to the printer drivers ..................................................................................27
Install checklist ....................................................................................................................................29
2 Using the control panel
Control-panel layout ............................................................................................................................32
Control-panel features .........................................................................................................................33
Home-screen navigation .....................................................................................................................34
Help system .........................................................................................................................................35
What is This? Help ..............................................................................................................35
Show Me How Help ............................................................................................................35
Menu map ...........................................................................................................................................36
Retrieve job menu ...............................................................................................................................37
Information menu ................................................................................................................................38
Fax menu ............................................................................................................................................39
Paper handling menu ..........................................................................................................................40
Configure device menu .......................................................................................................................43
Originals submenu ..............................................................................................................43
Copying submenu ...............................................................................................................44
Enhancement submenu ......................................................................................................45
Sending submenu ...............................................................................................................45
Printing submenu ................................................................................................................46
PCL submenu .....................................................................................................................49
Print quality submenu .........................................................................................................50
System setup submenu ......................................................................................................51
Copy/send settings .............................................................................................................55
MBM-3 Configuration submenu ..........................................................................................56
Stapler/stacker submenu ....................................................................................................57
I/O submenu .......................................................................................................................57
Embedded Jetdirect submenu ............................................................................................58
Resets submenu .................................................................................................................61
Diagnostics menu ................................................................................................................................63
Service menu ......................................................................................................................................67
3 I/O Configuration
Network configuration ..........................................................................................................................70
Configuring TCP/IP parameters ..........................................................................................70
To manually configure TCP/IP parameters from the MFP control panel ............70
Setting an IP address .........................................................................................70
Setting the subnet mask .....................................................................................71
Setting the default gateway ................................................................................71
vi
ENWW
Disabling network protocols (optional) ...............................................................72
To disable DLC/LLC ...........................................................................................72
Parallel configuration ...........................................................................................................................73
USB configuration ...............................................................................................................................74
Auxiliary connection configuration .......................................................................................................75
HP Jetdirect print servers ....................................................................................................................76
NetWare networks ..............................................................................................................76
Windows networks ..............................................................................................................76
AppleTalk networks ............................................................................................................76
UNIX/Linux networks ..........................................................................................................76
Wireless printing ..................................................................................................................................77
IEEE 802.11 standard .........................................................................................................77
Bluetooth .............................................................................................................................77
4 Printing tasks
Controlling print jobs ............................................................................................................................80
Source ................................................................................................................................80
Type and Size .....................................................................................................................80
Print setting priorities ..........................................................................................................80
Selecting print media ...........................................................................................................................82
Media to avoid ....................................................................................................................82
Paper that can damage the MFP ........................................................................................82
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode) .............................................................................84
Tray 1 sensing ....................................................................................................................84
Tray 2–N sensing ................................................................................................................85
Configuring input trays ........................................................................................................................86
Configuring trays when the MFP gives a prompt ................................................................86
To configure a tray when loading paper .............................................................................86
To configure a tray to match print job settings ....................................................................86
Configuring trays using the Paper Handling menu .............................................................87
Configuring Tray 2, 3, or 4 for a custom paper size ............................................................87
Printing from Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) .............................................................................89
Loading Tray 1 ...................................................................................................89
Printing envelopes from Tray 1 ...........................................................................................90
To load envelopes into Tray 1 ............................................................................90
Printing envelopes ..............................................................................................91
Printing from Tray 2, 3, or 4 ................................................................................................92
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, or 4 ............................................92
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4 .....................................94
Loading custom-sized media into Tray 2 ............................................................................97
Printing on special media ..................................................................................................................100
Transparencies .................................................................................................................100
Glossy paper .....................................................................................................................100
Colored paper ...................................................................................................................101
Envelopes .........................................................................................................................101
Labels ...............................................................................................................................101
Heavy paper .....................................................................................................................102
HP LaserJet Tough paper .................................................................................................102
Preprinted forms and letterhead .......................................................................................103
Recycled paper .................................................................................................................103
ENWW
vii
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing ...............................................................................................104
Control panel settings for automatic two-sided printing ....................................................105
To enable or disable two-sided printing from the MFP control panel ...............105
Options for binding two-sided printing jobs .......................................................................106
Manual two-sided printing .................................................................................................106
Printing booklets ...............................................................................................................106
Stapling documents ...........................................................................................................................107
To select the stapler in an application (Windows) ............................................................107
To select the stapler at the control panel ..........................................................................107
Loading staples .................................................................................................................107
To load staples .................................................................................................108
Special printing situations ..................................................................................................................110
Printing a different first page .............................................................................................110
Printing a blank back cover ...............................................................................................110
Printing on custom-size media ..........................................................................................110
Stopping a print request ....................................................................................................111
To stop the current print job from the MFP control panel .................................111
To stop the current print job from a software application .................................111
Selecting the output bin .....................................................................................................................112
3-bin mailbox output bins ..................................................................................................112
Selecting an output location ..............................................................................................113
To select an output location at the control panel ..............................................113
Job storage features ..........................................................................................................................114
Proofing and holding a job ................................................................................................114
Printing stored jobs ..........................................................................................114
Deleting stored jobs .........................................................................................114
Quick-copying a job ..........................................................................................................115
Private jobs .......................................................................................................................115
Printing a private job ........................................................................................115
Deleting a private job .......................................................................................116
Storing a print job ..............................................................................................................116
Mopier mode .....................................................................................................................116
Managing memory .............................................................................................................................117
Using features in the printer driver ....................................................................................................118
Creating and using quick sets ...........................................................................................118
Creating and using watermarks ........................................................................................119
Resizing documents .........................................................................................................119
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver ..........................................................120
Using different paper/covers .............................................................................................120
Printing a blank first page .................................................................................................120
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper .................................................................120
Printing on both sides of the paper ...................................................................................121
To print on both sides by using the duplex-printing accessory ........................121
To print on both sides manually .......................................................................122
Layout options for printing on both sides .........................................................122
Setting the stapling options ...............................................................................................123
Setting the color options ...................................................................................................123
Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box .............................................................124
Using the Services tab ......................................................................................................124
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver ...................................................................................126
viii
ENWW
Creating and using presets in Mac OS X ..........................................................................126
Printing a cover page ........................................................................................................126
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper .................................................................127
Printing on both sides of the paper ...................................................................................127
Setting the color options ...................................................................................................128
5 Copying
Copy-screen navigation .....................................................................................................................132
Cancel button ....................................................................................................................132
OK button ..........................................................................................................................132
Basic copying instructions .................................................................................................................133
Copying by using the default settings ...............................................................................133
To copy by using the default settings ...............................................................133
Copying by using user-defined settings ............................................................................133
To make copies by using settings other than the default settings ....................133
Copying by using the scanner glass .................................................................................135
Copying by using the ADF ................................................................................................135
Using Job Mode ................................................................................................................135
Modifying copy settings for the current job ........................................................................................136
Adjusting the copy brightness ...........................................................................................136
Reducing or enlarging copies ...........................................................................................136
Background removal .........................................................................................................136
Sharpness .........................................................................................................................136
Copying multiple sized originals ........................................................................................................137
Creating a stored copy job ................................................................................................................138
6 Scanning and sending to e-mail
What is SMTP? .................................................................................................................................140
What is LDAP? ..................................................................................................................................141
e-mail configuration ...........................................................................................................................142
Automatic e-mail configuration .........................................................................................142
Manual e-mail configuration ..............................................................................................142
To find gateways by using an e-mail program ..................................................................143
e-mail screen navigation ...................................................................................................................144
Help button .......................................................................................................................144
From: field .........................................................................................................................144
To:, CC:, and BCC: fields .................................................................................................144
Clear All button .................................................................................................................145
e-mail basics .....................................................................................................................................146
Loading documents ..........................................................................................................146
Sending documents ..........................................................................................................146
To send documents ..........................................................................................146
Using the auto-complete function .....................................................................147
Using the address book .....................................................................................................................148
Creating a recipient list .....................................................................................................148
Using the local address book ............................................................................................148
To add e-mail addresses to the local address book .........................................149
To delete e-mail addresses from the local address book .................................149
Additional e-mail features ..................................................................................................................150
Secondary e-mail ..............................................................................................................150
ENWW
ix
Send to folder ...................................................................................................................150
Send to workflow ..............................................................................................................150
7 Faxing
Analog faxing .....................................................................................................................................152
Installing the fax accessory ...............................................................................................152
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line ..................................................................156
Configuring and using the fax features .............................................................................157
Digital faxing ......................................................................................................................................158
8 Color
Using color ........................................................................................................................................160
HP ImageREt 3600 ...........................................................................................................160
Color lockout .....................................................................................................................160
Paper selection .................................................................................................................161
Color options .....................................................................................................................161
sRGB ................................................................................................................................161
Printing in four colors — CMYK ........................................................................................162
CMYK ink set emulation (PostScript only) ........................................................................162
Color matching ..................................................................................................................................163
PANTONE® color matching .............................................................................................163
Sample book color matching ............................................................................................163
Printing color samples ......................................................................................................164
Managing printer color options on Windows computers ....................................................................165
Print in grayscale ..............................................................................................................165
RGB Color (Color Themes) ..............................................................................................165
Automatic or manual color adjustment .............................................................................165
Manual color options ........................................................................................166
Restricting color printing ....................................................................................................................168
Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers ..................................................................169
Print Color as Gray ...........................................................................................................169
Advanced color options for text, graphics, and photographs ............................................169
Halftone options ...............................................................................................169
Neutral Grays ...................................................................................................169
RGB Color ........................................................................................................170
Edge Control ....................................................................................................170
9 Optional output devices
Output accessory bridge ...................................................................................................................172
3-bin mailbox .....................................................................................................................................173
Mailbox mode ...................................................................................................................173
Stacker mode ....................................................................................................................173
Function-separator mode ..................................................................................................173
Configuring the printer driver to recognize the 3-bin mailbox/stapler/stacker ...................173
Windows ...........................................................................................................173
Macintosh .........................................................................................................174
To select the operating mode at the control panel ...........................................174
To configure a destination bin at the control panel (Mailbox and Functionseparator modes) .............................................................................................174
x
ENWW
To select the operating mode in the printer driver (Windows 2000 and
Windows XP) ....................................................................................................174
Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 ............................................175
Mac OS X .........................................................................................................175
Stapler/stacker accessory .................................................................................................................176
To configure the printer driver to recognize the optional stapler/stacker ..........................176
Windows ...........................................................................................................................176
Macintosh .........................................................................................................................177
To select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs .................................................177
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Windows) ................................177
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Mac) .......................................177
To set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs ....................................................178
To set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job .............................................178
To configure the MFP to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty .................178
Troubleshooting the output accessories ............................................................................................179
10 Security features
Securing the embedded Web server .................................................................................................182
To secure the embedded Web server ..............................................................................182
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) ........................................................................................................183
Requirements ...................................................................................................................183
Using the FIH ....................................................................................................................183
To enable the FIH portal ..................................................................................183
To disable the FIH portal ..................................................................................183
Secure Disk Erase .............................................................................................................................185
Data affected ....................................................................................................................185
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase ..............................................................................185
Additional Information .......................................................................................................185
Job-storage features .........................................................................................................................186
DSS authentication ............................................................................................................................187
Locking the control-panel menus ......................................................................................................188
Locking the formatter cage ................................................................................................................189
11 Managing and maintaining the MFP
Using the embedded Web server ......................................................................................................192
Opening the embedded Web server .................................................................................192
Information tab ..................................................................................................................193
Settings tab .......................................................................................................................193
Digital Sending tab ............................................................................................................194
Networking tab ..................................................................................................................194
Other links .........................................................................................................................194
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software .........................................................................................196
Supported operating systems ...........................................................................................196
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software ......................................................................196
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections ..........................................................................196
Using HP Web Jetadmin software .....................................................................................................198
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh .........................................................................................199
Opening the HP Printer Utility ...........................................................................................199
Printing a cleaning page ...................................................................................................199
Printing a configuration page ............................................................................................199
ENWW
xi
Viewing supplies status ....................................................................................................200
Ordering supplies online and using other support features ..............................................200
Uploading a file to the printer ............................................................................................200
Uploading fonts to the printer ............................................................................................201
Updating the firmware .......................................................................................................201
Activating the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode ..........................................................201
Activating the Economode printing mode .........................................................................201
Changing the toner density ...............................................................................................202
Changing the resolution settings ......................................................................................202
Locking or unlocking printer storage devices ....................................................................202
Saving or printing stored jobs ...........................................................................................202
Configuring trays ...............................................................................................................203
Changing network settings ...............................................................................................203
Opening the embedded Web server .................................................................................203
Setting up e-mail alerts .....................................................................................................204
Configuring and verifying an IP address ...........................................................................................205
TCP/IP assignment ...........................................................................................................205
Automatic discovery .........................................................................................205
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) .................................................205
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration ....................................................................................205
Changing an IP address ...................................................................................................205
To change an IP address by using HP Web Jetadmin .....................................205
To change an IP address by using the embedded Web server .......................206
To change an IP address using the control panel ............................................206
Setting the real-time clock .................................................................................................................208
Setting the date and time ..................................................................................................208
To set the date format ......................................................................................208
To set the date .................................................................................................208
To set the time format ......................................................................................208
To set the time .................................................................................................209
Setting the wake time .......................................................................................................209
To set the wake time ........................................................................................209
Setting the sleep delay .....................................................................................................210
To set the sleep delay ......................................................................................210
Configuring alerts ..............................................................................................................................211
Checking the MFP configuration .......................................................................................................212
To print an information page .............................................................................................212
Menu map .........................................................................................................................212
Configuration page ...........................................................................................................212
HP Jetdirect page .............................................................................................................213
Supplies status page ........................................................................................................214
Usage page ......................................................................................................................215
PCL or PS font list ............................................................................................................216
Upgrading the firmware .....................................................................................................................217
Determining the current level of firmware .........................................................................217
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site .....................................................217
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP .......................................................................217
Using FTP to upload the firmware through a browser ......................................217
To use a browser for firmware update .............................................217
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection .........................218
xii
ENWW
To upgrade the firmware on a network connection by using
FTP ..................................................................................................218
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware ...........................................219
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware .......................................220
Using the HP Jetdirect firmware .......................................................................................220
Managing print cartridges ..................................................................................................................221
HP print cartridges ............................................................................................................221
Non-HP print cartridges ....................................................................................................221
Print cartridge authentication ............................................................................................221
HP fraud hotline ................................................................................................................221
Print cartridge storage ......................................................................................................222
Print cartridge life expectancy ...........................................................................................222
Checking the print cartridge life ........................................................................................222
Using the MFP control panel ............................................................................222
Using the embedded Web server .....................................................................222
Using HP Easy Printer Care Software .............................................................222
Using HP Web Jetadmin ..................................................................................222
Changing print cartridges ..................................................................................................223
To replace the print cartridge ...........................................................................223
Replacing supplies ............................................................................................................................227
Locating supplies ..............................................................................................................227
Supply replacement guidelines .........................................................................................227
Making room around the MFP for replacing supplies .......................................................228
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies ...............................................................228
Performing preventive maintenance ..................................................................................................229
ADF maintenance kit ........................................................................................................229
Cleaning the MFP ..............................................................................................................................230
Cleaning the outside of the MFP ......................................................................................230
Cleaning the touchscreen .................................................................................................230
To clean the scanner glass ...............................................................................................230
Cleaning the ADF delivery system ....................................................................................231
To clean the ADF delivery system ...................................................................231
To clean the ADF rollers ..................................................................................232
Cleaning the mylar strip ....................................................................................................235
To clean the mylar strip ....................................................................................235
Calibrating the scanner .....................................................................................................................237
To print the calibration target ............................................................................................237
12 Solving problems
Solving general problems ..................................................................................................................240
Troubleshooting checklist .................................................................................................240
Determining MFP problems ...............................................................................................................242
Troubleshooting information pages ...................................................................................................243
Configuration page ...........................................................................................................243
Paper path test page ........................................................................................................243
Registration page ..............................................................................................................243
Event log ...........................................................................................................................244
Control panel message types ............................................................................................................245
Status messages ..............................................................................................................245
Warning messages ...........................................................................................................245
ENWW
xiii
Error messages ................................................................................................................245
Critical error messages .....................................................................................................245
Control panel messages ....................................................................................................................246
Message listing .................................................................................................................246
Paper jams ........................................................................................................................................276
Paper jam recovery ...........................................................................................................277
To disable paper jam recovery .........................................................................277
Clearing jams ....................................................................................................................................278
Clearing jams in the right covers ......................................................................................278
Jam in Tray 1 ....................................................................................................................283
Jam in Tray 2, 3, or 4 ........................................................................................................283
Jam in the stapler/stacker .................................................................................................285
Staple jams .......................................................................................................................286
Jam in the 3-bin mailbox ...................................................................................................287
Other jams in the output accessory bridge .......................................................................290
Jam in the ADF .................................................................................................................291
Media-handling problems ..................................................................................................................293
Printer feeds multiple sheets ............................................................................................293
Printer feeds incorrect page size ......................................................................................293
Printer pulls from incorrect tray .........................................................................................294
Media does not feed automatically ...................................................................................294
Media does not feed from Tray 2, 3, or 4 ..........................................................................294
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed ...................................................................295
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP ........................................................................295
Output is curled or wrinkled ..............................................................................................296
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly ...................................................................296
Understanding MFP messages .........................................................................................................297
Using the MFP help system ..............................................................................................297
If a message persists ........................................................................................................297
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker .......................................298
Accessory lights ................................................................................................................298
Replacing accessories or accessory components ............................................................299
Understanding lights on the formatter ...............................................................................................300
HP Jetdirect LEDs ............................................................................................................300
Heartbeat LED ..................................................................................................................300
Fax LED ............................................................................................................................301
Color printing problems .....................................................................................................................302
Printout color error ............................................................................................................302
Incorrect shade .................................................................................................................302
Missing color .....................................................................................................................302
Cartridge error ..................................................................................................................303
Color match error ..............................................................................................................303
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems ............................................................................304
Print quality problems associated with media ...................................................................304
Overhead transparency defects ........................................................................................304
Print quality problems associated with the environment ...................................................305
Print quality problems associated with jams .....................................................................305
Print quality troubleshooting pages ...................................................................................305
Print quality troubleshooting tool .......................................................................................305
Image defect examples .....................................................................................................305
xiv
ENWW
Cleaning the scanner glass ..............................................................................................311
Calibrating the MFP ..........................................................................................................312
Repetitive defect ruler .......................................................................................................313
Solving e-mail problems ....................................................................................................................314
To validate the SMTP gateway address ...........................................................................314
To validate the LDAP gateway address ............................................................................314
Solving network connectivity problems .............................................................................................315
Troubleshooting network printing problems ......................................................................315
Verifying communication over the network .......................................................................315
To verify communication over the network .......................................................316
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems .................................................................................317
Solving problems with Mac OS v9.x .................................................................................317
Solving problems with Mac OS X .....................................................................................319
Appendix A Working with memory and print server cards
Printer memory and fonts ..................................................................................................................324
Installing memory and fonts ..............................................................................................................325
To install DDR memory DIMMs ........................................................................................325
To install a flash memory card ..........................................................................................329
Enabling memory ..............................................................................................................333
To enable memory for Windows 98 and Me ....................................................333
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP .................................................334
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card ........................................................................................335
To install an HP Jetdirect print server card .......................................................................335
Installing EIO cards ...........................................................................................................................338
To install EIO cards ..........................................................................................................338
Appendix B Supplies and accessories
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies ........................................................................................342
Ordering directly from HP .................................................................................................342
Ordering through service or support providers .................................................................342
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to
a network) .........................................................................................................................342
To order directly through the embedded Web server .......................................342
Part numbers .....................................................................................................................................343
Accessories ......................................................................................................................343
Print cartridges ..................................................................................................................343
Maintenance kits ...............................................................................................................343
Customer replaceable units ..............................................................................................344
Memory .............................................................................................................................344
Cables and interfaces .......................................................................................................344
Print media ........................................................................................................................344
Appendix C Service and support
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement .....................................................................................348
Print cartridge limited warranty statement .........................................................................................349
Fuser and transfer unit limited warranty statement ...........................................................................350
Availability of support and service .....................................................................................................351
HP maintenance agreements ............................................................................................................352
ENWW
xv
On-site service agreements ..............................................................................................352
Priority onsite service ........................................................................................................352
Next-day onsite service ....................................................................................................352
Weekly (volume) on-site service .......................................................................................352
Appendix D MFP specifications
Physical specifications ......................................................................................................................354
Electrical specifications .....................................................................................................................355
Acoustic specifications ......................................................................................................................356
Environmental specifications .............................................................................................................357
Appendix E Media specifications
Print media specifications ..................................................................................................................360
Printing and paper storage environment ...........................................................................360
Envelopes .........................................................................................................................361
Envelopes with double side seams ..................................................................361
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps ...........................................................362
Envelope margins ............................................................................................362
Envelope storage .............................................................................................362
Labels ...............................................................................................................................362
Label construction ............................................................................................362
Transparencies .................................................................................................................362
Print media weights and sizes ...........................................................................................................364
Supported media weights and sizes .................................................................................364
Appendix F Regulatory information
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................370
FCC regulations ................................................................................................................................371
Compliance with FCC regulations ....................................................................................371
Telecom .............................................................................................................................................372
Fax communications .........................................................................................................372
Environmental Product Stewardship program ...................................................................................373
Protecting the environment ...............................................................................................373
Ozone production .............................................................................................................373
Power consumption ..........................................................................................................373
HP LaserJet printing supplies ...........................................................................................373
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European
Union ................................................................................................................................375
Material safety data sheet .................................................................................................376
For more information ........................................................................................................376
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp) ...................................................................377
Country-/region-specific safety statements .......................................................................................378
Laser safety statement .....................................................................................................378
Canadian DOC statement .................................................................................................378
Japanese VCCI statement ................................................................................................378
Japanese cordset statement .............................................................................................378
Korean EMI statement ......................................................................................................379
Taiwan safety statement ...................................................................................................379
Finnish laser statement .....................................................................................................380
xvi
ENWW
Australia ............................................................................................................................380
Index.................................................................................................................................................................381
ENWW
xvii
xviii
ENWW
1
MFP basics
Congratulations on your purchase of the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp. If you have not done so, see the
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Start Guide that is provided with the multifunction peripheral (MFP) for
setup instructions.
After the MFP is set up and ready to use, take a few moments to get to know the MFP. This chapter
introduces the following topics:
ENWW
●
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Series configurations
●
Features and benefits of the multifunction peripheral (MFP)
●
MFP parts and accessories
●
Software
●
Software for Macintosh computers
●
Printer drivers
●
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
●
Install checklist
1
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Series configurations
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series is available in the following configurations.
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp (Q7517A-base model)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp comes standard with the following items:
2
●
A 100-sheet multi-purpose input tray (tray 1)
●
3-500 sheet input trays
●
An automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages
●
An HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network
●
256 megabytes (MB) synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM)
●
Duplexer
●
Hard-drive
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp (Q7518A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes an analog
fax accessory.
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp (Q7519A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes the
following items:
ENWW
●
An analog fax accessory
●
An output accessory bridge
●
A stapler/stacker accessory
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Series configurations
3
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp (Q7520A)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp has the same features as the base model and also includes the
following items:
4
●
Output accessory bridge
●
An analog fax accessory
●
A 3-bin mailbox accessory
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Features and benefits of the multifunction peripheral (MFP)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series is designed to be shared by a workgroup. Use the MFP to copy
and print color and black-and-white documents or to digitally send color or black-and-white documents.
The MFP is a standalone copier that does not require connection to a computer. With the optional
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 (included with some models), the MFP can also send and
receive faxes.
Features list
Functions
●
Two-sided copying (duplexing)
●
Image modification
●
Color digital sending
●
Two-sided document finishing
●
Network printing
Speed and throughput
●
31 pages per minute (ppm) when copying and printing on letter-size paper; 30 ppm when copying
and printing on A4-size paper
●
25% to 400% scalability when using the scanner glass
●
25% to 200% scalability when using the automatic document feeder (ADF)
●
Less than 10 seconds to print the first page
●
Transmit Once, Raster Image Processing (RIP) ONCE technology
●
Duty cycle of up to 85,000 pages per month
●
533 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor
Resolution
●
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
●
The product features HP FastRes and HP Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) for 1200 by
1200 effective dpi at full engine speed.
Memory
ENWW
●
256 megabytes (MB) of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 512 MB by using industry
standard 100-pin double data rate dual inline memory modules (DDR DIMMs)
●
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) that automatically compresses data to use RAM more
efficiently
Features and benefits of the multifunction peripheral (MFP)
5
User interface
●
Graphic display on the control panel
●
An embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (for network-connected
products)
●
HP Easy Printer Care software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool)
●
Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities using HP Easy Printer Care software
Languages and fonts
●
HP Printer Command Language (PCL) 6
●
HP PCL 5e for compatibility
●
Printer Management Language
●
PDF
●
XHTML
●
80 scalable TrueType typefaces
●
HP PostScript® 3 emulation (PS)
Copying and sending
●
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats
●
A job-interrupt feature (at copy boundaries)
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Operator attendance animations (for example, jam recovery)
●
E-mail compatibility
●
A sleep feature that saves energy
●
Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning
Print cartridge (4 cartridges)
6
●
Prints up to 12,000 pages at 5% coverage
●
No-shake cartridge design
●
Authentic HP print cartridge detection
●
Automatic toner strip remover
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Paper-handling
●
●
Input
●
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels, and
envelopes. Holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 20 envelopes.
●
Tray 2, 3, and 4: 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect standard paper sizes up
to legal and allow printing on custom-size paper.
●
Automatic document feeder (ADF): Holds up to 50 sheets of paper.
●
Duplex printing and copying: Provides two-sided printing and copying (printing on both
sides of the paper).
●
ADF duplex scanning: The ADF has an automatic duplexer for scanning two-sided
documents.
Output
●
Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located on the left side of the MFP. This bin
can hold up to 500 sheets of paper.
●
ADF output bin: The ADF output bin is underneath the ADF input tray. The bin holds up to
50 sheets of paper, and the MFP automatically stops when this bin is full.
●
Optional stapler/stacker: The stapler/stacker staples up to a 30 sheet document and stacks
up to 500 sheets.
●
Optional 3-bin mailbox: One bin stacks up to 500 sheets, and two bins stack up to
100 sheets each for a total capacity of 700 sheets.
Connectivity
●
IEEE 1284C-compliant parallel connection
●
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) connection (AUX) for connecting other devices
●
Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server
●
Optional analog fax card
●
Optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS)
●
Optional enhanced input/output (EIO) cards
●
USB 2.0
●
ACC port (accessory port with USB host capabilities)
●
Accessory port (for connecting third-party devices)
Environmental features
●
The Sleep setting saves energy (meets ENERGY STAR® guidelines, Version 1.0).
NOTE See Protecting the environment for more information.
ENWW
Features and benefits of the multifunction peripheral (MFP)
7
Security features
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Security lock
●
Job retention
●
DSS authentication
Minimum system requirements
To use the e-mail functionality, the MFP must be connected to an IP-based network that has a
simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) server. This server can either be on the local area network
or at an outside Internet service provider (ISP). HP recommends that the MFP be located on the
same local area network (LAN) as the SMTP server. If you are using an ISP, you must connect to
the ISP by using a digital subscriber line (DSL) connection. If you are obtaining e-mail services
from an ISP, ask the ISP to provide the correct SMTP address. Dial-up connections are not
supported. If you do not have an SMTP server on your network, third-party software is available
that allows you to create an SMTP server. However, purchase and support of this software is your
responsibility.
8
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
MFP parts and accessories
Identifying parts of the MFP
Before using the MFP, familiarize yourself with the parts of the MFP.
ENWW
1
ADF top cover
2
Automatic document feeder (ADF) input tray for copy/scan/fax originals
3
Control-panel status lights
4
Control-panel display with touch-screen functionality
5
Control-panel keypad
6
Right-side covers (provides access to the print cartridges and other consumables)
7
Tray 2, 3, and 4
8
Paper-level indicators
9
On/Off switch
10
Output bin
11
Scanner lock
MFP parts and accessories
9
1
Output bin
2
Interface ports
3
On/off switch
4
Power connection
Accessories and supplies
You can increase the capabilities of the MFP by adding optional accessories. For information about
ordering accessories and supplies, see Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies.
NOTE Use the accessories and supplies that have been specifically designed for the MFP in
order to ensure optimum performance.
10
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
1
Stapler/stacker (Q7521A). This accessory includes an output accessory bridge.
2
Staple cartridge (C8091A)
3
Print cartridge (4 print cartridges) (Q6460A, Q6461A, Q6462A, and Q6463A)
4
3-bin mailbox (Q7523A) This accessory includes an output accessory bridge.
5
Memory DIMMS and flash memory cards
6
HP Jetdirect print server (EIO card)
7
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 (Q3701A)
Interface ports
The MFP has five ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the left, rear corner
of the MFP.
ENWW
MFP parts and accessories
11
1
Foreign interface harness (FIH)
2
USB 2.0
3
ACC (accessory port uses host USB protocol)
4
Fax connection (for connecting to an optional analog fax accessory)
5
Parallel port
6
EIO interface expansion slot
7
Access port for Kensington lock
8
Network connection (embedded HP Jetdirect print server)
9
AUX port
Moving the MFP
Before moving the MFP, be sure to lock the scanner. The scanner lock is underneath the scanner lid,
to the left of the scanner glass.
12
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Software
The MFP comes with helpful software, including printer drivers and optional software. For easy MFP
setup and access to the full range of MFP features, HP recommends that you install the software that
is provided.
Check the installation notes and Readme files on the MFP CD-ROM for additional software and
languages. HP software is not available in all languages.
Operating systems and MFP components
The MFP CD-ROM contains the software components and drivers for users and network administrators.
The printer drivers that are provided on the CD-ROM must be installed in order to take full advantage
of MFP features. The other programs are recommended, but are not required for operation. Check the
installation notes and Readme files on the MFP CD-ROM for more information.
The CD-ROM includes software that is designed for users and network administrators who are operating
in the following environments:
●
Microsoft® Windows® 98 and Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
●
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
●
Apple Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
The most recent printer drivers for all supported operating systems are available at http://www.hp.com/
go/clj4730mfp_software. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the support flyer that came in
the MFP box for information about obtaining the most recent software.
The following table lists the available software for the MFP.
Software
Windows 98/
Me
Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003
Windows Installer
x
x
PCL 53
x
x
PCL 6
x
x
PostScript emulation3
x
x
HP Web Jetadmin1
Mac OS
UNIX®
x
x
x
Macintosh PostScript Printer
Description (PPD) files
x
IBM drivers1
1
2
3
OS/2
x
Macintosh Installer
Model scripts2
Linux2
x
x
Available only on the World Wide Web.
The Linux driver is available at http://hpinkjet.sourceforge.net. The Linux PPD file for all LaserJets is available at
http://linuxprinting.org.
Install by using the Custom Install.
NOTE You can also purchase the optional HP Digital Sending Software, which provides digital
fax capability. For more information go to http://www.hp.com/go/digitalsending.
ENWW
Software
13
Software features
Automatic Configuration, Update Now, and Preconfiguration features are available with the MFP.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and
Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of
installation. Some accessories that Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional
paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). If the environment supports bidirectional
communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default
for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation.
Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series since installation, the
driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional
communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000
or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that allows HP software to be
customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device
defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more
information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, available at http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp.
Installing the printing system software
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.
The MFP comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing system
software on the CD-ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the MFP features.
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system software from the
Internet at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
NOTE Sample model scripts for UNIX® (HP-UX®, Sun Solaris) are available at
http://www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts. Sample model scripts for Linux networks are available
at http://linuxprinting.org.
You can download the latest software free of charge at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before
connecting the parallel or USB cable. If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the software
installation, see Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected.
14
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection. However, you cannot connect
parallel and USB cables at the same time. Use an IEEE 1284-compatible cable or a standard 2-meter
USB cable.
To install the printing system software
1.
Close all software programs that are open or running.
2.
Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
●
On the Start menu, click Run.
●
Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
●
Click OK.
3.
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4.
Click Finish when the installation has completed.
5.
You might need to restart the computer.
6.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on
the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp for help or more information.
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the MFP CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For network
installation on other operating systems, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
The HP Jetdirect embedded print server in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp includes a 10/100 Base-TX
network port. If you need an HP Jetdirect print server with another type of network port, see Ordering
parts, accessories, and supplies, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
The installer does not support MFP installation or MFP object creation on Novell servers. It supports
only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a MFP. To install your MFP
and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin) or a Novell utility
(such as NWAdmin).
To install the printing system software
ENWW
1.
If you are installing the software on Windows 2000 or Windows XP, make sure that you have
administrator privileges.
2.
Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured correctly for the network by printing a
configuration page (see Configuration page). On the second page, locate the MFP IP address. You
might need this address to complete network installation.
3.
Close all software programs that are open or running.
4.
Insert the MFP CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Software
15
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
●
On the Start menu, click Run.
●
Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
●
Click OK.
5.
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6.
Click Finish when installation has completed.
7.
You might need to restart the computer.
8.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files
on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp for help or more information.
To set up a Windows computer to use the network MFP using Windows-sharing
If the computer will print directly to the MFP, you can share the MFP on the network so that other network
users can print to it.
See your Windows documentation to enable Windows-sharing. After the MFP is shared, install the MFP
software on all computers that share the MFP.
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected
If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware
Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer.
To install the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me
1.
In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp for help or more information.
To install the software for Windows 2000 or Windows XP
16
1.
In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search.
2.
On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, clear all other check
boxes, and then click Next.
3.
Type the letter for the root directory. For example, X:\ (where "X:\" is the letter of the root directory
on the CD-ROM drive).
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
4.
Click Next.
5.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6.
Click Finish when installation has completed.
7.
Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8.
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files
on the MFP CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the MFP box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp for help or more information.
Uninstalling the MFP software
This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software.
To remove software from Windows operating systems
Use the Uninstaller in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp/Tools program group to select and remove any
or all of the Windows HP printing system components.
1.
Click Start and then click Programs.
2.
Point to HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp.
3.
Click Uninstaller.
4.
Click Yes.
5.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation.
Software for networks
Summary of HP networking solutions
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with
the MFP.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin allows you to manage HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet using a
browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a
single network administration server. It can be installed and run on these systems:
●
Fedora Core and SuSE Linux
●
Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced Server
●
Windows Server 2003
●
Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1
When installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin can be accessed by any client through a supported
web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0.
ENWW
Software
17
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
●
Task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers significant
time.
●
Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or used.
●
Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other MFP problems now route to
different people.
●
Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser.
●
Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering each printer
into a database.
●
Simple integration into enterprise management packages.
●
Ability to quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and
model name.
●
Ability to easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy navigation.
●
Ability to manage and configure multiple printers at once.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and to see the latest list of supported host systems,
visit HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin.
UNIX
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-UX and Solaris
networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/support/
net_printing.
Utilities
MFP utilities
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series MFP is equipped with several utilities, which make it easy to
monitor and manage the MFP on a network.
HP Easy Printer Care Software
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is a software program that you can use for the following tasks:
●
Viewing color usage information
●
Checking the printer status
●
Checking the supplies status
●
Setting up alerts
●
Viewing printer documentation
●
Gaining access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools
You can view the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer
or when it is connected to a network. Perform a complete software installation in order to use the HP
Easy Printer Care Software. For more information, see http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.
18
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Embedded Web server
This MFP is equipped with an embedded Web server, which allows access to information about MFP
and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web programs may run, much
in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment for programs to
run on your computer. The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser, such
as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
When a Web server is "embedded", that means it resides on a hardware device (such as a printer) or
in firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the MFP that anyone can
access with a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser. There is no special software
to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the Embedded
Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the MFP.
Features
The HP embedded Web server allows you to view MFP and network card status and manage printing
functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can do the following:
●
View MFP status information.
●
Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
●
View and change tray configurations.
●
View and change the MFP control panel menu configuration.
●
View and print internal pages.
●
Receive notification of MFP and supplies events.
●
Add or customize links to other Web sites.
●
Select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages.
●
View and change network configuration.
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see Using
the embedded Web server.
ENWW
Software
19
Other components and utilities
Several software applications are available for Windows and Mac OS users, as well as for network
administrators.
20
Windows
Mac OS
Network administrator
●
Software installer — automates the
printing system installation
●
●
●
Online Web registration
PostScript Printer Description files
(PPDs) — for use with the Apple
PostScript drivers that comes with
the Mac OS
●
HP Web Jetadmin — a browserbased system management tool.
See http://www.hp.com/go/
webjetadmin for the latest HP Web
Jetadmin software
HP LaserJet Utility (available from
the Internet) — a printer
management utility for Mac OS
users
●
HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for
UNIX — available for download
from http://www.hp.com/support/
net_printing
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
If both the printer and the Macintosh computer are connected to a network, use the printer embedded
Web server (EWS) to configure the printer. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system software
supports Mac OS v9.1 and later and Mac OS X v10.2 and later.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to printer
features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the compact disc
(CD) that came with the printer. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the
computer.
●
HP Printer Utility
The HP Printer Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver. Use
the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer:
●
Name the printer.
●
Assign the printer to a zone on the network.
●
Assign an internet protocol (IP) address to the printer.
●
Download files and fonts.
●
Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing.
You can use the HP Printer Utility when your printer uses a universal serial bus (USB) or is
connected to a TCP/IP-based network.
NOTE
The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X v10.2 or later.
For more information about using the HP Printer Utility, see Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh.
To install printer drivers for Mac OS v9.1 and later
ENWW
1.
Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2.
Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not
run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop.
3.
Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5.
On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Desktop Printer
Utility.
Software for Macintosh computers
21
6.
Double-click Printer (AppleTalk).
7.
Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.
8.
Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
NOTE The icon on the desktop looks generic. All of the print panels appear in the print dialog
box with each software program.
To install printer drivers for Mac OS X v10.2 and later
1.
Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2.
Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD
icon on the desktop.
3.
Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5.
On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center or
Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE If you are using Mac OS X v10.4, then the Printer Setup Utility has replaced
the Print Center.
6.
Click Add Printer.
7.
Select Rendezvous as the connection type.
8.
Select your printer from the list.
9.
Click Add Printer.
10. Close the Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections
(USB)
NOTE Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections.
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS v9.1 and later and
Mac OS X v10.2 and later.
The Apple PostScript driver must be installed in order to use the PPD files. Use the Apple PostScript
driver that came with your Macintosh computer.
22
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
To install the printing system software
1.
Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the computer. Use
a standard 2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable.
2.
Insert the printer CD into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.
The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD
icon on the desktop.
3.
Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder.
4.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5.
For Mac OS v9.1 and later:
a.
On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center.
b.
Double-click Printer (USB), and then click OK.
c.
Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.
d.
Select the printer, and then click OK.
e.
Next to Postscript Printer Description (PPD) File, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
f.
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
For Mac OS X v10.2 and later: USB queues are created automatically when the printer is attached
to the computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before
the USB cable is connected. To change the queue PPD, open the Print Center or Printer Setup
Utility, select the correct printer queue, and then click Show Info to open the Printer Info dialog
box. In the pop-up menu, select Printer Model, and then, in the pop-up menu in which Generic is
selected, select the correct PPD for the printer.
6.
Print a test page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly
installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking
readme files on the printer CD or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4700 for help or more information.
NOTE The icon on the Mac OS v9.x desktop looks generic. All of the print panels appear in the
Print dialog box with each software program.
To remove software from Macintosh operating systems
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.
ENWW
Software for Macintosh computers
23
Printer drivers
The product comes with software that allows the computer to communicate with the product (by using
a printer language). This software is called a printer driver. Printer drivers provide access to product
features, such as printing on custom-sized paper, resizing documents, and inserting watermarks.
Supported printer drivers
The following printer drivers are provided for the product. If the printer driver that you want is not on the
product CD-ROM or is not available on http://www.hp.com, contact the manufacturer or distributor of
the program that you are using, and request a driver for the product.
NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com. Depending on the
configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the product software
automatically checks the computer for Internet access in order to obtain the latest drivers.
Operating system1
PCL 6 printer
driver
PCL 5 printer
driver
PS printer driver
Microsoft Windows 98
X
X
X
Windows Millennium (Me)
X
X
X
Windows 2000
X
X
X
Windows XP
X
X
X
Windows Server 2003
X
X
X
PPD2 printer
driver
Mac OS 9.1 or later
X
X
Mac OS 10.2 or later
X
X
1
2
Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the context-sensitive help in the printer driver
for available features.
PostScript (PS) Printer Description files (PPDs)
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet.
●
OS/2 PCL printer driver
●
OS/2 PS printer driver.
●
UNIX model scripts.
●
Linux drivers.
●
HP OpenVMS drivers.
NOTE The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM.
You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX® and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by
requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support see www.hp.com/
go/linux. For UNIX support see www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software.
24
Chapter 1
MFP basics
ENWW
Select the correct printer driver
Select a printer driver based on the operating system that you are using and the way that you use the
product. See the printer-driver Help for the features that are available. For information about gaining
access to the printer-driver Help, see Printer-driver Help.
●
The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to your printer
features.
●
The PCL 5 printer driver is recommended for general office monochrome and color printing.
●
Use the PostScript (PS) driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-based programs such
as Adobe PhotoShop® and CorelDRAW®, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS
flash font support.
NOTE
The product automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer-driver Help (Windows)
Printer-driver Help is separate from program Help. The printer-driver help provides explanations for the
buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver. It also includes instructions for
performing common printing tasks, such as printing on both sides, printing multiple pages on one sheet,
and printing the first page or covers on different paper.
Activate the printer-driver Help screens in one of the following ways:
●
Click the Help button.
●
Press the F1 key on the computer keyboard.
●
Click the question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver.
●
Right-click on any item in the driver, and then click What's This?.
Gaining access to the printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer:
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default To change the configuration
settings (for example, turn on settings (for example, add a
Print on Both Sides by default) tray or enable/disable Manual
Duplexing)
Windows 98 and
Windows Milennium
(Me)
1.
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers.
2.
2.
Select the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp, and
then click Properties.
Right-click the HP Color
2.
LaserJet 4730mfp icon, and
then select Properties
(Windows 98 and Me) or
3.
Document Defaults
(Windows NT 4.0).
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most common.
ENWW
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers.
Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon, and
then select Properties.
Click the Configure tab.
Printer drivers
25
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default To change the configuration
settings (for example, turn on settings (for example, add a
Print on Both Sides by default) tray or enable/disable Manual
Duplexing)
Windows 2000, XP,
and Server 2003
1.
On the File menu in the
software program, click
Print.
1.
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
2.
Select the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp, and
then click Properties or
Preferences.
2.
Right-click the HP Color
2.
LaserJet 4730mfp icon, and
then select Printing
Preferences.
3.
1.
The steps can vary; this
procedure is most common.
Mac OS 9.1 or later
Mac OS 10.2
Mac OS 10.3
Chapter 1
Right-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon, and
then select Properties.
Click the Device Settings
tab.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
Click the desktop printer
icon.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
As you change settings on
the pop-up menu, click
Save Settings.
2.
From the Printing menu,
click Change Setup.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
In the Finder, on the Go
menu, click Applications.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Open Utilities, and then
open Print Center.
3.
Click on the print queue.
3.
On the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
4.
On the Printers menu, click
Show Info.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
5.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
1.
Open Printer Setup Utility
by selecting the hard drive,
clicking Applications,
clicking Utilities, then
double-clicking Printer
Setup Utility.
2.
Click on the print queue.
3.
On the Printers menu, click
Show Info.
4.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus.
3.
On the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
26
Click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers or
Printers and Faxes.
MFP basics
NOTE Configuration
settings might not be
available in Classic
mode.
ENWW
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
The printer comes with printer-driver software that uses a printer language to communicate with the
printer. Printer drivers provide access to printer features, such as printing on custom-sized paper,
resizing documents, and inserting watermarks.
Supported printer drivers
A Macintosh printer driver and the necessary PPD files are included with the printer. If the printer driver
that you want is not on the printer CD, check the installation notes and the late-breaking readme files
to see if the printer driver is supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of
the software program that you are using, and request a driver for the printer.
NOTE
The most recent drivers are available at www.hp.com.
Gaining access to the printer drivers
Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer.
ENWW
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default To change the configuration
settings (for example, turn on settings (for example, add a
Print on Both Sides by default) physical option such as a tray,
or turn on or off a driver
feature such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS v9.1 or later
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
Click the desktop printer
icon.
2.
Change any settings that
you want to on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
As you change settings on
the pop-up menu, click
Save Settings.
2.
From the Printing menu,
click Change Setup.
Printer drivers for Macintosh computers
27
Operating System
To change the settings for all
print jobs until the software
program is closed
To change the print job default To change the configuration
settings (for example, turn on settings (for example, add a
Print on Both Sides by default) physical option such as a tray,
or turn on or off a driver
feature such as Allow Manual
Duplexing)
Mac OS X v10.2
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
In the Finder, on the Go
menu, click Applications.
2.
Change any settings that
you want to on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus, and then,
on the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
2.
Open Utilities, and then
open Print Center.
3.
Click on the print queue.
4.
On the Printers menu, click
Show Info.
5.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
Mac OS X v10.3
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
1.
On the File menu, click
Print.
2.
Change any settings that
you want to on the various
pop-up menus.
2.
Change the settings that
you want on the various
pop-up menus, and then,
on the Presets pop-up
menu, click Save as and
type a name for the preset.
These settings are saved in the
Presets menu. To use the new
settings, you must select the
saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.
28
Chapter 1
MFP basics
NOTE Configuration
settings might not be
available in Classic
mode.
1.
Open Printer Setup Utility
by selecting the hard drive,
clicking Applications,
clicking Utilities, and then
double-clicking Printer
Setup Utility.
2.
Click on the print queue.
3.
On the Printers menu, click
Show Info.
4.
Click the Installable
Options menu.
ENWW
Install checklist
The following table is an installation checklist for the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series.
Table 1-1 HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
ENWW
Item
Details
Verify that the MFP is connected to an adequate
power source.
A minimum of 10A (110V) or 5A (220V) circuit
required. Do not use a power strip. Any devices
attached to the same power source can lead to
intermittent problems.
Verify that MFP resides in an adequate space.
Adequate space so that the MFP may be
accessed from all sides. Tight space makes the
system difficult to access for jam clearing and
service.
Verify that surface has adequate, level support.
Ensure the MFP is on a level and stable surface.
Ensure wheel locks are engaged.
Verify that all orange tape and packaging
materials have been removed.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series, Getting Started Guide.
Verify that the toner cartridges and paper have
been installed in the MFP.
Use known good quality paper.
Clean the scanner glass before unlocking the
scanner. Wipe the glass gently with a clean,
slightly damp lint-free cloth.
For more information, see To clean the scanner
glass. Also see the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series, Getting Started Guide.
Verify the scanner shipping lock has been moved
to the unlocked position.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series, Getting Started Guide.
Verify the correct language and date/time are set.
See details in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series, Getting Started Guide.
Configure the e-mail gateways.
Press Menu, scroll to and touch CONFIGURE
DEVICE, SENDING, E-MAIL, and FIND SEND
GATEWAYS. If auto-discovery does not find the
e-mail gateways, obtain the addresses from your
network administrator and manually configure
these on the MFP.
If the fax accessory is installed, ensure it is
properly configured.
Press Menu, scroll to and touch FAX, and then
FAX SETUP SETTINGS. Fill in the date/time,
location and fax header information. See details
in the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300
User Guide.
Print the configuration pages.
Press Menu, press INFORMATION, and then
press PRINT CONFIGURATION.
On the configuration page printouts, verify the
following:
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp Information &
Training CD provides detailed information on
how to read the configuration page.
●
LDAP gateway address displays.
●
SMTP gateway address displays.
●
All optional devices display (for example,
the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox).
Install checklist
29
Table 1-1 HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp (continued)
Item
30
Chapter 1
MFP basics
Details
●
If the fax accessory is installed, the modem
status reads Operational/Enabled.
●
On the Embedded JetDirect Page, verify
that the status reads I/O Card Ready and
that you have a valid IP address.
Verify you can copy from the copier glass of the
MFP.
Place configuration page face down on copier
glass and press Start.
Verify you can copy from the Automatic
Document Feeder (ADF).
Place configuration page face up in ADF and
press Start.
Verify you can send a fax from the MFP.
Place document face up in the ADF and use the
key pad to send to a known functioning fax
number.
Verify you can send an e-mail.
Place document face up in the ADF, use keypad
to enter e-mail address (LDAP must be
configured for this to function).
Verify you can print to the MFP.
After loading the printing system software on a
networked computer, print a test page from the
driver.
Verify the date and time are set.
The MFP will not print until the date and time have
been set. See Setting the real-time clock for more
information.
Verify that all users have access to the User
Training.
http://www.hp.com/go/usemymfp
ENWW
2
ENWW
Using the control panel
31
Control-panel layout
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and
three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.
32
1
Touchscreen graphical display
2
Numeric keypad
3
Sleep button
4
Menu button
5
Status button
6
Stop button
7
Reset button
8
Start button
9
Attention light
10
Data light
11
Ready light
12
Display contrast adjustment
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Control-panel features
Features/buttons
Function
Provides access to What is This?, Show Me How, and HELP
FOR STATUS Help. This function is embedded in the
touchscreen menus.
ENWW
Reset
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default
values.
Stop
Cancels the active job.
Start
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that
has been interrupted.
Numeric keypad
Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies
required and other numeric values.
Sleep
If the MFP is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically
enters a sleep mode. To place the MFP into sleep mode or to
reactivate the MFP, press the Sleep button.
Status
Opens the SUPPLIES STATUS menu. From this menu, you
can retrieve the status of the print cartridges, the fuser, and the
transfer unit.
Menu
Opens the MFP menus.
Control-panel features
33
Home-screen navigation
Use the following control-panel elements in the graphical display to gain access to MFP features.
1
Touch this to use the copy screen. For more information, see Copy-screen navigation.
2
Touch this to use the e-mail screen. For more information, see e-mail screen navigation.
3
Touch this to use the fax screen. For more information, see Faxing and see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300
User Guide.
4
Rotate this dial to increase or decrease screen brightness.
5
The Ready light indicates that the MFP is ready.
6
The Data light indicates that the MFP is receiving data.
7
The Attention light indicates that the MFP has a problem and requires user intervention.
NOTE If installing the optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS), additional fields appear on
the control-panel display. Scroll down to see all the fields.
34
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Help system
At any time, you can gain access to the help system on the touchscreen of the graphical display by
touching .
What is This? Help
The MFP provides information about any topic on the touchscreen of the graphical display.
On the top level screen, touch (Help button), and then touch What is This?. After touching an item, a
pop-up dialog box opens and displays information about the item you touched. After reading the
information, touch any other area on the screen to remove the What is This? pop-up dialog box.
On other levels of the touchscreen, you can gain access to the Help system by touching
which is located in the upper-left corner of each screen.
(Help button),
Show Me How Help
The Show Me How Help contains information about how to use the MFP features.
(Help button).
1.
On the graphical touchscreen display on the control panel, touch
2.
Touch Show Me How. Choose a topic from the What is This? screen by touching an item. You
can use the scroll bar to display more topics. After touching an item, an instruction sheet will print.
3.
Touch OK to go back to the main window.
Show Me How also appears in a What is This? pop-up dialog box if the item that you select is a function
that includes instructions. For example, if you touch What is This? Help, and then touch mopies, you
see a Show Me How button in the pop-up dialog box. Touch the Show Me How button for information
about how to enhance your copies.
ENWW
Help system
35
Menu map
To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available in the control panel, print a controlpanel menu map:
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Touch PRINT MENU MAP.
Many of these values can be overridden from the driver or program. You might want to store the menu
map near the MFP for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the MFP. For a
complete list of control-panel items and possible values, see the sections for each menu in this chapter.
36
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Retrieve job menu
The Retrieve job menu contains options for retrieving proof and hold jobs, private jobs, quick copy job,
and stored jobs, The following table displays the options available in the Retrieve job menu.
Item
Values
Explanation
USER
JOB
Allows you to select the job to be
retrieved. After selecting the job, the
PRINT and DELETE options display.
Select PRINT to enter the number of
copies. Select DELETE to delete the job.
If you are retrieving a secured job, both
the PRINT and DELETE options contain
a dialog box where you must enter the
PIN number.
NOTE If no private, stored, quick copy, or proof-and-hold jobs are stored on the MFP hard disk
or in RAM memory, the message NO STORED JOBS appears when the menu is selected.
1.
A list of user names appears on the control-panel display.
2.
Press Menu.
3.
Touch RETRIEVE JOB.
4.
Touch a user name, and then a list of stored jobs for that user appears.
5.
Touch a job name, and then print or delete the job. If a job requires a PIN to print, (lock symbol)
appears next to the PRINT command and a PIN must be provided. If a job requires a PIN to delete,
(lock symbol) appears next to the DELETE command and a PIN must be provided.
6.
ENWW
If you touch PRINT, the MFP prompts for the number of copies to print (1 to 32,000).
Retrieve job menu
37
Information menu
To print an information page, scroll to and touch the information page(s) that you want.
Item
Explanation
PRINT MENU MAP
Generates a menu map that shows layout and current settings
of the control menu items.
The MFP will return to the Ready state when the page is
completed.
PRINT CONFIGURATION
Generates a page detailing the current configuration of the
MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE
Generates a page that shows the number of pages remaining
for each supply in the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
SUPPLIES STATUS
This page does not print. It displays status only.
PRINT USAGE PAGE
Generates a page that contains information that could be used
for cost accounting.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT DEMO
Generates a demonstration page.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT RGB SAMPLES
Generates a page that displays RGB colors.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES
Generates a page that displays CMYK colors.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
Generates a directory page containing information for all
installed mass storage devices.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
Generates a typeface list of all PCL fonts available on the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
PRINT PS FONT LIST
Generates a typeface list of all PS fonts available on the MFP.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state when the page
is completed.
38
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Fax menu
This menu will appear only if the HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300 is installed. For information
about the Fax menu, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. A printed copy of
this guide is provided with the HP LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP LaserJet
4730xm mfp.
ENWW
Fax menu
39
Paper handling menu
When paper-handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print by
selecting the type and size of paper from the driver or software application. For more information,
see Selecting print media.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) are available from a software program, or
from the printer driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Printer-driver and software-program
settings override control-panel settings.
NOTE Items that have an asterisk (*) are the default values.
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 1 SIZE
ANY SIZE*
Allows you to set the media size for
tray 1.
LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
STATEMENT
8.5X13
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
DPOSTCARD(JIS)
DPOSTCARD (JIS)
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
TRAY 1 TYPE
ANY TYPE*
Allows you to specify the type of media
in tray 1.
PLAIN
PREPRINTED
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
40
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
LIGHT <75 G/M2
INTERMEDIATE90-104
HEAVY 105-119 G/M2
EXTRA HEAVY120-163
CARDSTOCK >163
ROUGH 90-105 G/M2
GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2
HEAVY GLOSSY120-160
EXTRA HEAVY GLOSSY
TOUGH PAPER
ENVELOPE
TRAY <N> SIZE
LETTER*
LEGAL
Allows you to set the media size for
tray 2, tray 3, and tray 4. Substitute the
tray number for <N>.
EXECUTIVE
8.5X13
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
16K
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
TRAY <N> TYPE
PLAIN*
PREPRINTED
Allows you to specify the type of media
in each tray. Substitute the tray number
for <N>.
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
ENWW
Paper handling menu
41
Item
Values
Explanation
RECYCLED
COLOR
LIGHT <75 G/M2
INTERMEDIATE90-104
HEAVY 105-119 G/M2
ROUGH 90-105 G/M2
GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2
TOUGH PAPER
42
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Configure device menu
This menu contains all of the administrative functions.
NOTE
Items that have an asterisk (*) are the default values.
Originals submenu
Although you can gain access to each item using the touchscreen graphical display, you can also select
copying and sending items through the MFP menus. To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE
DEVICE, and then touch ORIGINALS.
Item
Values
Explanation
PAPER SIZE
EXECUTIVE
Sets the paper size of the original
document.
LETTER*
LEGAL
A5
A4
B5(JIS)
8.5X13
STATEMENT
MIXED LTR/LGL
NUMBER OF SIDES
1*
Indicates whether one side or both sides
of the original document are scanned.
2
The MFP prompts you to turn the page
over if 2 is selected and the original is
placed on the flatbed.
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT*
LANDSCAPE
CONTENT
TEXT
Indicates whether the orientation of the
original is portrait (short-edge top) or
landscape (long-edge top).
Describes the type of image on the
original.
PHOTO
GLOSSY PHOTO
MIXED*
Select PHOTO if the original consists of
graphic images, or TEXT if the image
consists of text only.
Select GLOSSY PHOTO for continuous
tone originals.
Select MIXED if the original contains
graphics and text. Describe the Text/
Photo Mix with a value from 0 to 8,
where 0 represents mostly text, and 8
represents mostly graphics.
ENWW
Configure device menu
43
Item
Values
Explanation
NOTE You can override any of
these settings for a particular job
by using the Copy screen.
DENSITY
0 to 8
Default=4
Specifies the contrast and brightness of
the image. You can choose from nine
increments.
0=darkest
8=lightest
Copying submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch COPYING.
Item
Values
Explanation
COLOR MODE
COLOR COPIES
Indicates whether copies should be printed in color
or black-and-white.
BLACK COPIES
NUMBER OF SIDES
1*
Indicates whether images should be printed on one
side or both sides of the copy.
2
COLLATE
OFF
Indicates whether copies should be collated or not
collated.
ON*
PAPER DESTINATION
OUTPUT BIN 1*
Select the output bin on the optional 3-bin mailbox.
OUTPUT BIN 2*
Output Bin 1 is the default bin for copying.
OUTPUT BIN 3*
Output Bin 2 is the default bin for faxing.
Output Bin 3 is the default bin for printing.
NOTE This item appears only if an
optional 3-bin mailbox is installed.
COPIES
1–999
Indicates the number of copies made when you
press Start without selecting the number of copies
by using the numeric keypad.
STAPLE
NONE*
To enable stapling, select 1-EDGE.
1-EDGE
FIRST COPY SPEED
NO EARLY WARM UP*
EARLY WARM UP
NOTE This item is available only if the
stapler/stacker is installed.
Select NO EARLY WARM UP to disable the Fast
First Copy feature. Using the Fast First Copy
feature can cause excessive wear on the MFP.
This is the default setting.
Select EARLY WARM UP to enable the Fast First
Copy feature, which decreases the time that the
44
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
MFP requires to make a copy when it has been idle
for awhile.
Enhancement submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch ENHANCEMENT.
Item
Values
Explanation
SHARPNESS
0 to 4
Specifies the sharpness setting.
0=minimum sharpness
4=maximum sharpness
DEFAULT=2
BACKGROUND REMOVAL
0 to 8
Controls the amount of background
material from the original that is
eliminated on the copy. Background
removal is useful when you copy both
sides and do not want the material on the
first side to be visible on the second side
of the copy.
0=minimum background removal (more
background is visible)
8=maximum background removal (less
background is visible)
DEFAULT=2
Sending submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch SENDING.
Item
Values
Options
Explanation
E-MAIL
SCAN PREFERENCE
BLACK AND WHITE
Determines whether the
document is scanned in color
or black and white.
COLOR*
FILE TYPE
PDF*
Specifies the file format of the
e-mail attachment.
M-TIFF
TIFF
JPEG
FILE SIZE
SMALL
STANDARD*
Specifies the compression of
a file, which determines the
file size.
LARGE
RESOLUTION
ENWW
75 dpi
Specifies the resolution of a
document or image; a lower
Configure device menu
45
Item
Values
Options
Explanation
150 dpi*
DPI setting results in a smaller
file size, but image quality
might be affected.
200 dpi
300 dpi
ADDRESS VALIDATION
OFF
ON*
Enables the MFP to check email syntax. Valid e-mail
addresses require the "@"
sign and a ".".
FIND SEND GATEWAYS
The MFP searches the
network for SMTP and LDAP
gateways that the MFP can
use to send e-mail.
SMTP GATEWAY
The IP address of the SMTP
server used to send e-mail.
LDAP GATEWAY
The IP address of the LDAP
gateway that the MFP uses to
look up e-mail information.
TEST SEND GATEWAYS
Tests the configured
gateways to see if they are
functional.
REPLICATE MFP
Copies the send settings from
one MFP to another.
NOTE This feature
might not work with
older MFPs.
Printing submenu
Some items in the Printing submenu are available in a software program, or in the printer driver (if the
correct printer driver is installed). Driver and program settings override control-panel settings.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch PRINTING.
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES
1 to 32,000
Set the default number of copies by
selecting any number from 1 to 32,000.
Use the numeric keypad to select the
number of copies.
NOTE It is recommended
that you set the number of
copies in the printer driver or
in the software program.
(Printer driver settings and
software program settings
override control-panel
settings.)
46
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
LETTER*
Set the default image size for paper
and envelopes. (The item name will
change from paper to ENVELOPE as
you scroll through the available sizes.)
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
STATEMENT
8.5X13
A4
A5
B5(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE
UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
PAPER DESTINATION
OUTPUT BIN 1*
Allows you to set a custom paper size
for any of the installed trays. Substitute
the tray number for <N>. Select the X
and Y dimensions of the custom paper
size. The X dimensions are
76-216 mm (3-8.5 inches). The Y
Dimensions are 127-356 mm
(5-14 inches).
Select the output bin on the optional 3bin mailbox.
OUTPUT BIN 2
OUTPUT BIN 3
DUPLEX
OFF
ON*
DUPLEX BINDING
NOTE This item appears
only if an optional 3-bin
mailbox is installed, and if it is
not configured for stacker
mode.
Set the value to ON to print on both
sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one
side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.
DUPLEX BINDING allows you to
select LONG EDGE or SHORT
EDGE*. This item displays only if
DUPLEX is set to ON.
For more information, see Automatic
two-sided (duplex) printing.
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER
ENWW
NO
This command is used to print on
Letter-size media when an A4 job is
Configure device menu
47
Item
MANUAL FEED
Values
Explanation
YES*
sent but no A4-size media is loaded in
the MFP (or to print on A4-size media
when a Letter job is sent, but no Lettersize media is loaded in the MFP).
OFF*
Feed the paper manually from tray 1,
rather than automatically from a tray.
When MANUAL FEED=ON and tray 1
is empty, the MFP goes offline when it
receives a print job. It then displays
MANUALLY FEED <PAPER SIZE>.
ON
For more information, see Manual twosided printing.
COURIER FONT
REGULAR*
Select the version of Courier font to
use:
DARK
REGULAR: The internal Courier font
available on the HP LaserJet 4 series
printers.
DARK: The internal Courier font
available on the HP LaserJet III series
printers.
Both fonts are not available at the
same time.
WIDE A4
NO*
YES
The Wide A4 setting changes the
number of characters that can be
printed on a single line of A4 paper.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can
be printed on one line.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can
be printed on one line.
PRINT PS ERRORS
OFF*
Select ON to print the PS error page
when PS errors occur.
ON
PRINT PDF ERRORS
OFF*
Select ON to print the PDF error page
when PDF errors occur.
ON
PCL
48
Chapter 2
For information about this option, see
PCL submenu.
Using the control panel
ENWW
PCL submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, touch PRINTING, and then touch PCL
submenu.
Item
Values
Explanation
FORM LENGTH
5 to 128
Default=60
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for
default paper size. Enter the value by using the
numeric keypad.
PORTRAIT*
Select the default page orientation.
ORIENTATION
LANDSCAPE
FONT SOURCE
NOTE It is recommended that you set
the page orientation in the printer driver
or in the software program. (Printerdriver settings and software-program
settings override control-panel settings.)
INTERNAL X*
INTERNAL X: Internal fonts.
CARD SLOT X
CARD SLOT 1, CARD SLOT 2, or CARD SLOT
3: Fonts stored in one of the three flash memory
slots.
FONT NUMBER
0 to 102
The MFP assigns a number to each font and lists
them on the PCL Font List (see Checking the MFP
configuration). The font number appears in the
Font # column of the printout.
FONT PITCH
0.44 to 99.99
Use the numeric keypad to enter a value. This
item might not appear, depending on the font
selected.
Default=10.00
FONT POINT SIZE
4.00 to 999.75
Use the numeric keypad to enter a value.
Default=12.00
SYMBOL SET
Variety of available
symbol sets
Select any one of several available symbol sets
at the MFP control panel. A symbol set is a unique
grouping of all the characters in a font. PC–8 or
PC–850 is recommended for line-draw
characters.
APPEND CR TO LF
NO*
Select YES to append a carriage return to each
line feed that is encountered in backwardcompatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control).
Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a
new line by using only the line-feed control code.
This option allows the user to append the required
carriage return to each line feed.
YES
SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES
NO*
When set to YES, form feeds are ignored if the
page is blank.
YES
MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING
STANDARD*
CLASSIC
ENWW
The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING
command selects an input tray by a number that
maps to the available trays and feeders.
Configure device menu
49
Print quality submenu
You can gain access to some of the items in this menu in either a software program, or in the printer
driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Printer driver settings and software program settings
override control-panel settings.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch PRINT QUALITY.
Item
Values
Explanation
ADJUST COLOR
HIGHLIGHTS
This item allows you to adjust the color
from +5 to –5.
MIDTONES
SHADOWS
RESTORE COLOR VALUES
Each value allows you to adjust CYAN
DENSITY, MAGENTA DENSITY,
YELLOW DENSITY, and BLACK
DENSITY
RESTORE COLOR VALUES removes
any color adjustments and returns the
color to the original value.
SET REGISTRATION
PRINT TEST PAGE
SOURCE
ADJUST TRAY N
AUTO SENSE MODE
TRAY 1 SENSING
Shift the margin alignment to center the
image on the page from top to bottom,
and left to right. You can also align the
image on the front, with the image printed
on the back.
Allows you to set trays to automatically
sense the type of paper that is loaded.
TRAY 2-N SENSING
PRINT MODES
PLAIN
Allows you to associate each media type
with a specific print mode.
PREPRINTED
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
LIGHT <75 G/M2
INTERMEDIATE90-104
HEAVY 105-119 G/M2
EXTRA HEAVY120-163
CARDSTOCK >163
ROUGH 90-105 G/M2
GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2
HEAVY GLOSSY120-160
50
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
EXTRA HEAVY GLOSSY
TOUGH PAPER
ENVELOPE
RESTORE MODES
OPTIMIZE
EXTRA HEAVY120-163
HIGH GLOSS IMAGES
BACKGROUND 1
BACKGROUND 2
TRANSPARENCY
This item optimizes a number of MFP
parameters for all jobs rather than by
media type. The default setting for each
value is OFF.
RESTORE OPTIMIZE resets all of the
optimize parameters to the default
settings.
MEDIA TYPE
REGISTRATION
LONG PAPER
PRE-ROTATION
RE-TRANSFER
FUSER TEMP
TRAY1
RESTORE OPTIMIZE
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW
N/A.
Performs partial printer calibrations.
FULL CALIBRATE NOW
N/A
Performs full printer calibrations.
COLOR RET
OFF
The COLOR RET menu item allows you
to turn on or turn off the printer REt
(Resolution Enhancement Technology)
setting. The default is ON.
ON*
System setup submenu
Items in this menu affect the MFP function. Configure the MFP according to your printing needs.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch SYSTEM SETUP.
Item
Values
Explanation
Date/Time
DATE
Sets the start date and time for the MFP.
DATE FORMAT
The DATE format is YEAR 2004–2087;
JAN, FEB, MAR; DAY 1–31
TIME
TIME FORMAT
The DATE FORMAT is YYYY/MMM/
DD*; MMM/DD/YYYY; DD/MMM/YYYY
The TIME format is HOUR 1–12,
MINUTE 0–59, AM, and PM
ENWW
Configure device menu
51
Item
Values
Explanation
The TIME FORMAT is 12 HR or 24 HR.
This item defaults to 12 HR.
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
1 to 100
Specifies the number of QuickCopy and
Proof-and-Hold jobs that can be stored
on the MFP hard-disk accessory.
Default=32
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
OFF*
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
SHOW ADDRESS
AUTO
OFF*
Sets the amount of time that QuickCopy
and proof-and-hold jobs are kept before
being automatically deleted from the
queue.
If you change the Job Held Timeout
value, only jobs that are stored after this
change are affected by the change. Any
jobs that were stored before you
changed the value will retain the original
timeout setting.
This item defines whether the IP address
is shown on the control-panel display
next to the Ready message.
The default setting is OFF.
COLOR/BLACK MIX
AUTO*
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES
This menu item establishes how the
printer switches from color to
monochrome (black and white) mode for
maximum performance and print
cartridge life.
AUTO resets the printer to the factory
default settings. The default is AUTO.
Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES if
nearly all of your print jobs are color with
high page coverage.
Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if you
print mostly monochrome jobs, or a
combination of color and monochrome
jobs.
TRAY BEHAVIOR
USE REQUESTED TRAY
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT
PS DEFER MEDIA
SIZE/TYPE PROMPT
USE ANOTHER TRAY
DUPLEX BLANK PAGES
IMAGE ROTATION
Specifies the behavior of the tray by
indicating which tray the MFP should
print from.
USE REQUESTED TRAY sets the tray
that the MFP should print from for
specified jobs. The values for this menu
item are EXCLUSIVELY (default) or
FIRST.
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT
determines whether or not the MFP
prompts the user when a job does not
match a requested configured tray. The
values for this menu item are Always
(default) or UNLESS LOADED.
PS DEFER MEDIA determines whether
the paper-handling model is based on
52
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
PostScript rules or HP rules. The values
for this menu item are ENABLED
(follows the HP rules) or Disabled.
SIZE/TYPE PROMPT controls whether
the tray configuration message and its
prompts are shown whenever a tray is
configured for a type or size other than
the type or size that is loaded in the tray.
USE ANOTHER TRAY determines
whether the MFP uses paper from
another tray of the designated tray is
empty.
DUPLEX BLANK PAGES determines
whether blank pages are duplexed.
IMAGE ROTATION determines if
images are rotated. The default is
STANDARD.
SLEEP DELAY
1 MINUTE
15 MINUTES
Sets how long the MFP remains idle
before it enters sleep mode.Using sleep
mode offers the following advantages:
30 MINUTES
●
Minimizes the amount of power that
the MFP consumes when it is idle
●
Reduces wear on electronic
components in the MFP
45 MINUTES
60 MINUTES*
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
NOTE Sleep mode turns off
the backlight on the display, but
the display is still readable.
4 HOURS
The MFP automatically exits sleep mode
when you send a print job, open or close
a paper tray, receive a fax, touch any
button on the control panel, touch any
part of the touchscreen, open the
scanner lid, or load media into the ADF.
To enable or disable sleep mode, see
Resets submenu.
WAKE TIME
List of days of the week
OFF*
CUSTOM
Sets the time that the MFP automatically
comes out of sleep mode. This feature
can be set for a different time for each
day of the week. Or, if you wish to apply
the same settings to each day, select
APPLY TO ALL DAYS
Each day displays the following values:
Hour 1–12, Minute 0–59, AM, and PM.
COPY SEND SETTINGS
For information about these settings, see
the separate table Copy/send settings.
PERSONALITY
AUTO*
PCL
PDF
ENWW
Select the default MFP language
(personality). Possible values are
determined by which valid languages are
installed in the MFP.
Configure device menu
53
Item
CLEARABLE WARNINGS
Values
Explanation
PS
Normally you should not change the
product language (the default is AUTO).
If you change the setting to a specific
product language, the MFP does not
automatically switch from one language
to another unless specific software
commands are sent to the MFP.
JOB*
Set the amount of time that a clearable
warning appears on the MFP control
panel.
ON
JOB: Warning messages appear on the
control panel until the end of the job from
which they were generated.
ON: Warning messages appear on the
control panel until they are cleared.
AUTO CONTINUE
OFF
This item determines how the MFP
reacts to errors.
ON*
OFF: If an error prevents printing, the
message remains on the display, and the
MFP does not print until you touch
CONTINUE.
ON: If an error prevents printing, the
message is displayed, and the MFP goes
offline for 10 seconds before returning
online.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
STOP AT OUT*
STOP AT LOW
OVERRIDE AT OUT
Sets printer behavior when a cartridge is
low. The default is STOP AT OUT. This
option allows the printer to continue
printing until a color supply is exhausted.
When the printer is set to STOP AT
LOW, printing pauses until the color
supply is replaced. OVERRIDE AT
OUT allows printing to continue when a
color supply is out, but displays a
warning the supply is out and must be
replaced.
ORDER AT
0–100
Default=15
COLOR SUPPLY OUT
STOP*
Determine how the MFP behaves when
toner is out.
AUTOCONTINUE AT BLACK
STOP: The MFP goes offline and waits
until the cartridge is replaced.
AUTOCONTINUE AT BLACK: The MFP
displays REPLACE CARTRIDGE until
the cartridge is replaced. The MFP
continues to print.
JAM RECOVERY
AUTO*
Determine how the MFP functions when
a jam occurs.
OFF
ON
54
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
AUTO: The MFP automatically selects
the best mode for jam recovery
(usually ON). This is the default setting.
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
OFF: The MFP does not reprint pages
following a jam. Printing performance
might be increased with this setting.
ON: The MFP automatically reprints
pages after a jam is cleared.
LANGUAGE
List of available languages
Sets the language of the control panel.
Copy/send settings
This table lists the options that are available for the COPY SEND SETTINGS, which are part of the
SYSTEM SETUP submenu.
Item
Values
Explanation
INACTIVITY TIMEOUT
10–300 SECONDS
Defines the amount of time until the copy settings return to the
default settings after any control panel activity is completed. If
you reset the MFP, the value resets to the default.
Default=60
AUTO SETTINGS RESET
OFF*
ON
TIMEOUT AFTER SEND
10–300 SECONDS
Allows automatic reset of copy/send settings after the defined
timeout. When set to OFF, you are prompted to reset the
settings or continue with the same settings. If this item is set
to ON, the settings are automatically reset after each send job.
The default is OFF.
Defines the amount of time before the send settings return to
the default settings after any control-panel activity is
completed. This item displays only when AUTO SETTINGS
RESET is OFF.
Default=20
HOLD OFF PRINT JOB
OFF
Prevents network print jobs from starting within a specified
period after a copy is completed.
ON*
HOLD OFF TIME
0–300 SECONDS
Defines the amount of time that print jobs must wait if HOLD
OFF PRINT JOB is set to ON.
Default=15
SCAN AHEAD
OFF
ON*
AUTO JOB INTERRUPT
OFF*
ON
COPY JOB INTERRUPT
OFF*
ON
ENWW
Allows a copy job to be scanned even if the MFP is printing
another job. The job will be scanned and held until it can be
printed. If this setting is set to OFF, the job is not scanned until
the print job is completed.
Allows a copy job to automatically interrupt any currently
printing network print job. The copy job is placed between full
copies of the job that is currently printing. If this setting is set
to OFF, the job is not printed until all copies of the print job are
completed.
Allows you to interrupt the current copy job to make a different
copy. When you press the Start button, the MFP shows a
message that asks if you want to interrupt the current copy job.
Configure device menu
55
Item
Values
Explanation
AUDIBLE FEEDBACK
OFF
Gives an audible indication when you press a button or when
you touch an interactive area of the touchscreen.
ON*
COLOR COPY OPTION
ENABLE*
Allows an administrator to set the color lockout feature.
DISABLE
MBM-3 Configuration submenu
Use the items in this menu to set up the output bins on the 3-bin mailbox.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch MBM-3 CONFIGURATION.
NOTE This menu appears only when the 3-bin mailbox is installed.
Item
Values
Explanation
OPERATION MODE
JOB SEPARATION MODE*
Select the operation mode that you want
to use. For more information, see 3-bin
mailbox.
MAILBOX MODE
STACKER MODE
56
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
NOTE The MFP restarts
automatically whenever the
operation mode is changed.
ENWW
Stapler/stacker submenu
Use the items in this menu to configure the stapling options.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch STAPLER/STACKER.
NOTE
This menu appears only when the stapler/stacker is installed.
Item
Values
Explanation
STAPLES
NONE*
To enable stapling, select ONE.
ONE
STAPLES OUT
STOP
CONTINUE*
NOTE Printer-driver settings
override control-panel settings.
Use this item to configure the MFP to
either stop or continue when the staple
cartridge is empty. If you select
CONTINUE, jobs are stacked in the
output bin, but they are not stapled.
Default=15
I/O submenu
Items in the I/O (input/output) submenu affect the communication between the MFP and the computer.
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch I/O.
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT
5 to 300
Use this to select the I/O timeout period
in seconds. (I/O timeout refers to the
time, measured in seconds, that the MFP
waits before ending a print job.)
Use this setting to adjust timeout for best
performance. If data from other ports
appear in the middle of your print job,
increase the timeout value.
Default = 15
PARALLEL INPUT
HIGH SPEED
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
HIGH SPEED accepts faster parallel
communications used for connections
with newer computers. This item
contains NO and YES* options.
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS turns the
bidirectional parallel communication on
or off. The default is set for a bidirectional
parallel port (IEEE-1284). This setting
allows the MFP to send status readback
messages to the computer. (Turning the
parallel advanced functions on might
slow language switching.) This item
contains OFF and ON* options.
ENWW
Configure device menu
57
Item
Values
Explanation
FIND SEND GATEWAYS
No value to select
This item searches the network for both
SMTP and LDAP gateways that can be
used to send e-mail.
SMTP GATEWAY
No value to select
This is the IP address of the SMTP
Gateway that is used for sending e-mail.
LDAP GATEWAY
No value to select
This is the IP address of the LDAP
Gateway that is used for looking up email address information.
JETDIRECT
See submenu below.
JETDIRECT allows you to configure
network settings.
TEST SEND GATEWAYS
No value to select
Tests the configured gateways to ensure
that they are functional.
Embedded Jetdirect submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch I/O and then touch
JETDIRECT.
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
TCP/IP
ENABLE
ON
ON: (default) Enable the TCP/IP
protocol.
OFF
OFF: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.
HOST NAME
CONFIG METHOD
An alphanumeric string, up to 32
characters, that is used to identify the
device. This name is listed on the
Jetdirect configuration page. The
default host name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is the last six digits of
the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
BOOTP
DHCP*
AUTO IP
MANUAL
Select BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
for automatic configuration from a
BootP server.
Select DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) for automatic
configuration from a DHCP server.
Select AUTO IP for automatic linklocal IP addressing. An address in
the form 169.254.x.x will be
automatically assigned.
Use the MANUAL settings menu to
configure TCP/IP parameters.
DHCP RELEASE
YES
NO*
58
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
If DHCP is used and a DHCP lease
exists, selecting NO saves the
current lease. Selecting YES
releases the current DHCP lease and
the leased IP address.
ENWW
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
DHCP RENEW
YES
This menu appears if CONFIGURE
METHOD was set to DHCP and a
DHCP lease for the print server
exists.
NO*
MANUAL SETTINGS
●
NO (default): The current DHCP
lease is saved.
●
YES: The current DHCP lease
along with the leased IP
address are released.
(Available only if CONFIG METHOD
is set to MANUAL) Configure
parameters directly from the printer
control panel:
IP ADDRESS (n.n.n.n.) The unique
IP address of the printer, where n is
a value from 0 to 255.
SUBNET MASKm.m.m.m.: The
subnet mask for the printer, where m
is a value from 0 to 255.
SYSLOG SERVERn.n.n.n.: The IP
address of the syslog server used to
receive and log syslog messages.
DEFAULT GATEWAYn.n.n.n: The
IP address of the gateway or router
used for communications with other
networks.
IDLE TIMEOUT: The time period, in
seconds, after which an idle TCP
print data connection is closed
(default is 270 seconds, 0 disables
the timeout).
DEFAULT IP
(parameters are AUTO
IP and LEGACY)
ENWW
Specify the IP address to default to
when the print server is unable to
obtain an IP address from the
network during a forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration (for example, when
manually configured to use BootP or
DHCP).
●
AUTO IP: A link-local IP
address 169.254.x.x will be set.
●
LEGACY: The address
192.0.0.192 will be set,
consistent with older Jetdirect
products.
PRIMARY DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of
the Primary Domain Name System
(DNS) Server.
SECONDARY DNS
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of
the Secondary Domain Name
System (DNS) Server.
Configure device menu
59
Item
Options
Values
PROXY SERVER
Explanation
Specifies the proxy server to be used
by embedded applications in your
printer/MFP. A proxy server is
typically used by network clients for
Internet access. It caches Web
pages, and provides a degree of
Internet security, for those clients.
To specify a proxy server, enter its IP
address or fully-qualified domain
name. The name can be up to 64
characters.
For some networks, you may need to
contact your Independent Service
Provider (ISP) for the proxy server
address.
PROXY PORT
IPX/SPX
Enter the port number used by the
proxy server for client support. The
port number identifies the port
reserved for proxy activity on your
network, and can be a value from 0
to 65535.
ENABLE
FRAME TYPE
ON*
ON: Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.
OFF
OFF: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.
AUTO
Select the frame-type setting for your
network.
EN_8023
EN_II
EN_8022
EN_SNAP
APPLETALK
ENABLE
ON*
AUTO: (default) Automatically sets
and limits the frame type to the first
one detected.
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and
EN_SNAP: Frame type selections for
Ethernet networks.
Enable or disable the AppleTalk
protocol.
OFF
DLC/LLC
ENABLE
ON*
Enable or disable the DLC/LLC
protocol.
OFF
SECURE WEB
HTTPS REQUIRED
HTTPS OPTIONAL*
DIAGNOSTICS
60
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
SECURE WEB: Specify whether the
embedded Web server accepts
communications by using only
secure HTTP (HTTPS) or by using
both HTTP and HTTPS.
DIAGNOSTICS: Provides tests to
help diagnose network hardware or
TCP/IP network connection
problems.
ENWW
Item
Options
RESET SECURITY
YES
Values
Explanation
RESET SECURITY: Specifies
whether the current security settings
on the print server are saved or reset
to factory defaults.
NO*
LINK SPEED
AUTO
The print server will automatically
configure itself to match the network
link speed and communication mode.
If this process fails, either 100TX
HALF or 10T HALF is set.
10T HALF
10T FULL
100TX HALF
10T HALF: 10 Mbps, half-duplex
operation.
100TX FULL
10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
100TX HALF: 100 Mbps, half-duplex
operation.
100TX FULL: 100 Mbps, full-duplex
operation.
Resets submenu
To gain access to this menu, touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch RESETS.
NOTE Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or MFP configuration
settings when you select these items. Reset the MFP only under the following circumstances:
●
You want to restore the MFP default settings.
●
Communication between the MFP and computer has been interrupted, and you are not able to
resolve the problem by any other method. See Solving network connectivity problems.
●
You are having problems with a port.
The items in the Resets submenu will clear all memory in the MFP, while pressing the Reset button
clears only the current job.
Item
Values
Explanation
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
No value to select
This item restores all control-panel settings
to the original factory settings.
SLEEP MODE
OFF
Turns sleep mode on or off. Using sleep
mode offers the following advantages:
ON*
●
Minimizes the amount of power that
the MFP consumes when it is idle
●
Reduces wear on electronic
components in the MFP
The MFP automatically exits sleep mode
when you send a print job, receive a fax,
touch any button on the control panel, touch
ENWW
Configure device menu
61
Item
Values
Explanation
any part of the touchscreen, open the
scanner lid, or load media into the ADF.
You can set how long the MFP remains idle
before it enters sleep mode. See the
SLEEP DELAY information in the System
setup submenu.
62
LOCK CARRIAGE
No value to select
This item must be selected before engaging
the Scanner Head Lock. It moves the
carriage into a position where it can be
locked.
CLEAR ADDRESS BOOK
No value to select
This item clears all addresses from the
address book.
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Diagnostics menu
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
PRINT EVENT LOG
Generates a localized list of
the 50 most recent entries in
the error log. For each entry,
the printed event log shows
the error number, page
count, error code, and
description or personality.
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
This item prints a series of 8
pages that include
instructions, pages for each
color, demo page, and
configuration page. These
pages can help isolate print
quality problems.
SHOW EVENT LOG
At the control panel, scroll
through the contents of the
event log, which lists the 50
most recent events.
CALIBRATE SCANNER
Use this item to calibrate the
scanner. You might need to
calibrate the scanner if it is
not capturing the correct
sections of scanned
documents.
PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
Allows you to print a page
that can assist in diagnosing
printer problems.
DISABLE CARTRIDGE
CHECK
Allows you to remove a print
cartridge to help determine
which print cartridge is the
source of a problem.
PAPER PATH SENSORS
Initiates a paper path sensor
test. You can then enter the
menus to print internal pages
(including the paper path
test), set menu items, and
send jobs from the computer.
The sensors are updated as
paper passes each sensor,
but no messages are
generated this state.
PAPER PATH TEST
PRINT TEST PAGE
Generates a test page that is
useful for testing the paper
handling features of the
MFP.
Specifies which paper paths
are tested.
SOURCE
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
ENWW
Specifies to print a test page
from a specific tray or from all
trays.
Diagnostics menu
63
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
TRAY 2*
TRAY 3
TRAY 4
DESTINATION
ALL BINS
OUTPUT BIN 1*
OUTPUT BIN 2
OUTPUT BIN 3
DUPLEX
OFF*
ON
COPIES
1*
10
50
Specify which output bin to
use during the paper path
test.
This menu displays only if the
output bin is installed.
Specifies if the duplexer is
included when the test is
performed.
Specifies how many sheets
of paper from the specified
source are sent when the test
is performed.
100
500
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
Tests the paper path sensors
and switches for correct
operation. During this test,
the MFP is offline.
On the control-panel display,
each sensor is represented
by a string of alphabetic
letters followed by a
corresponding status for
each sensor.
MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2
COMPONENT TEST
Performs tests to determine
whether the paper path
sensors are operating
correctly.
TRANSFER MODE
BELT ONLY
IMAGE DRUM MOTORS
This menu item is used by a
service technician to
exercise individual parts of
the MFP to isolate the source
of any problems.
BLACK LASER SCANNER
CYAN LASER SCANNER
MAGENTA LASER
SCANNER
YELLOW LASER
SCANNER
FUSER MOTOR
FUSER PRESSURE
RELEASE MOTOR
64
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Item
Options
Values
Explanation
ALIENATION MOTOR
ETB CONTACT/
ALIENATION
TRAY 1 PICKUP
SOLENOID
TRAY 1 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 3 PICKUP
SOLENOID
TRAY 2 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 3 PICKUP
SOLENOID
TRAY 3 PICKUP MOTOR
TRAY 4 PICKUP
SOLENOID
TRAY 4 PICKUP MOTOR
DUPLEXER PICKUP
MOTOR
REPEAT
PRINT/STOP TEST
STOP TIME
0 to 60000
This menu item is used by a
service technician to isolate
the potential source of printquality problems with the
MFP. The time is expressed
in milliseconds.
COLOR BAND TEST
PRINT TEST PAGE
1–30
PRINT TEST PAGE option
generates a test page that is
useful for testing the color
band features of the MFP.
COPIES
The COPIES option allows
you to select the number of
test pages to be printed.
Default = 1.
ENWW
Diagnostics menu
65
Item
Options
SCANNER TESTS
LOWER LAMP
ADF INPUT MOTOR
ADF INPUT MOTOR
REVERSE
Values
Explanation
This menu item is used by a
service technician to
diagnose potential problems
with the MFP scanner.
FLATBED MOTOR
ADF READ MOTOR
ADF READ MOTOR
REVERSE
ADF DUPLEX SOLENOID
ADF LED INDICATOR
CONTROL PANEL
LEDs
DISPLAY
BUTTONS
This menu item is used by a
service technician to
diagnose potential problems
with the MFP control panel.
TOUCHSCREEN
66
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
Service menu
The Service menu is locked. A service technician must type a PIN to open the menu.
ENWW
Service menu
67
68
Chapter 2
Using the control panel
ENWW
3
I/O Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure certain network parameters on the MFP. The following topics
are covered:
ENWW
●
Network configuration
●
Parallel configuration
●
USB configuration
●
Auxiliary connection configuration
●
HP Jetdirect print servers
●
Wireless printing
69
Network configuration
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the MFP. You can configure these
parameters from installation software, the MFP control panel, the embedded Web server, or
management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh.
NOTE For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Using the
embedded Web server.
For more information on supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect Print
Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is
installed.
This section contains the following instructions for configuring network parameters from the MFP control
panel:
●
Configuring TCP/IP parameters.
●
Disabling unused network protocols.
Configuring TCP/IP parameters
You can use the MFP control panel to configure the following TCP/IP parameters:
●
IP address (4 bytes)
●
Subnet mask (4 bytes)
●
Default gateway (4 bytes)
To manually configure TCP/IP parameters from the MFP control panel
Use manual configuration to set an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
Setting an IP address
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch I/O.
4.
Touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
6.
Touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Touch MANUAL or MANUAL SETTINGS.
8.
Touch IP ADDRESS.
9.
Use the right and left arrows to select each byte of the IP address, and then use the numeric keypad
to enter the value of each byte.
10. Touch OK.
70
Chapter 3
I/O Configuration
ENWW
Setting the subnet mask
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch I/O.
4.
Touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
6.
Touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Touch MANUAL.
▲
8.
Touch MANUAL SETTINGS.
Touch SUBNET MASK
NOTE The first three sets of numbers are highlighted.
9.
Use the right and left arrows to select each byte of the subnet mask, and then use the numeric
keypad to enter the value of each byte.
10. Touch OK.
Setting the default gateway
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch I/O.
4.
Touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Touch TCP/IP.
6.
Touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Touch MANUAL or MANUAL SETTINGS.
8.
Touch DEFAULT GATEWAY.
NOTE The first set of 3 numbers shows the default settings. If there is not a number
highlighted, a highlighted empty underscore appears.
9.
Use the right and left arrows to select each byte of the default gateway, and then use the numeric
keypad to enter the value of each byte.
10. Touch OK.
ENWW
Network configuration
71
Disabling network protocols (optional)
By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the
following benefits:
●
decreases MFP-generated network traffic
●
prevents unauthorized users from printing to the MFP
●
provides only pertinent information on the configuration page
●
allows the MFP control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages
To disable DLC/LLC
72
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch I/O.
4.
Touch JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Touch DLC/LLC.
6.
Touch ENABLE.
7.
Touch ON or OFF.
8.
Touch OK.
Chapter 3
I/O Configuration
ENWW
Parallel configuration
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series supports network and parallel connections at the same time. A
parallel connection is made by connecting the MFP to the computer using a bidirectional parallel cable
(IEEE-1284-C compliant) with a c-connector plugged into the MFP’s parallel port. The cable can be a
maximum of 10 meters (30 feet) long.
When used to describe a parallel interface, the term bidirectional indicates that the MFP is able to both
receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port.
Figure 3-1 Parallel port connection
1
C-connector
2
Parallel port
NOTE To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface such as
bidirectional communication between the computer and MFP, faster transfer of data, and
automatic configuration of printer drivers, ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed.
NOTE Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more
network connections on the MFP. If you are experiencing problems, see Network configuration.
ENWW
Parallel configuration
73
USB configuration
This MFP supports USB 2.0 and host USB connections. The USB ports are located on the back of the
MFP, as shown in the figure below. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.
Figure 3-2 USB connection
74
1
USB connector
2
USB port
Chapter 3
I/O Configuration
ENWW
Auxiliary connection configuration
This MFP supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling input devices. The port is located on the
back of the MFP, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-3 Auxiliary connection
1
ENWW
Auxiliary connection port (Jetlink)
Auxiliary connection configuration
75
HP Jetdirect print servers
The HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer
directly to your network at any location. They support multiple network protocols and operating systems.
HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), which
provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web
Jetadmin software.
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series is equipped with an embedded HP Jetdirect print server. The
server supports Ethernet 10/100-TX network connections. An HP Jetdirect EIO print server can also be
installed in the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series EIO slot to allow an additional network connection.
NOTE Installation of an EIO print server and network configuration should be performed by a
network administrator. Network configuration is performed using installation software, the MFP
control panel, embedded Web server, or network management software.
NOTE Refer to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information on supported EIO
network print servers.
For more information on supported networks and network configuration tools, refer to the HP Jetdirect
Print Server Administrator’s Guide, or visit HP Customer Care online at http://www.hp.com/support/
net_printing.
NetWare networks
When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server, use your NetWare utilities to
set up and manage the MFP.
Windows networks
For Windows 98, ME, 2000, Windows Server 2003, and XP systems, use your printer installation utility
for printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network. The utility supports printer setup for either peer-topeer or client-server network operation.
AppleTalk networks
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up the MFP on an EtherTalk network. For more information, refer to
the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide included with printers equipped with the
HP Jetdirect print server.
UNIX/Linux networks
Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the MFP on HP-UX or Sun Solaris networks.
For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks, use HP Web Jetadmin.
To obtain HP software for UNIX/Linux networks, visit HP Customer Care online at http://www.hp.com/
support/net_printing. For other installation options supported by the HP Jetdirect print servers, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide.
76
Chapter 3
I/O Configuration
ENWW
Wireless printing
Wireless networks offer a safe, secure, and cost-effective alternative to traditional wired network
connections. See Supplies and accessories for a list of available wireless print servers.
IEEE 802.11 standard
Optional HP Jetdirect wireless print servers support connection to an 802.11 network. This wireless
technology provides a high-quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring. Peripherals
can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without changing
network cables.
Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard.
HP Jetdirect 802.11 print servers are available for USB connections.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth wireless technology is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used to
wirelessly connect computers, MFPs, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones, and other
devices.
Unlike infrared technology, Bluetooth’s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not have to be
in the same room, office, or cubicle with an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate. This
wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business network applications.
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series uses a Bluetooth adapter (HP bt1300) to incorporate Bluetooth
wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections. The adapter has
a 10-meter line-of-sight operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates
up to 723 Kbps. The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles:
ENWW
●
Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP)
●
Serial Port Profile (SPP)
●
Object Push Profile (OPP)
●
Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)
●
Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with XHTML-Print
Wireless printing
77
78
Chapter 3
I/O Configuration
ENWW
4
Printing tasks
This chapter describes how to perform basic printing tasks. The following topics are covered:
ENWW
●
Controlling print jobs
●
Selecting print media
●
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
●
Configuring input trays
●
Printing on special media
●
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing
●
Stapling documents
●
Special printing situations
●
Selecting the output bin
●
Job storage features
●
Managing memory
●
Using features in the printer driver
●
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver
79
Controlling print jobs
In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull paper
when you send a print job. The Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or
Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. If you do not change these settings, the MFP
automatically selects a tray using the default settings.
Source
Printing by Source means that you choose a specific tray from which you want the MFP to pull paper.
The MFP tries to print from this tray, no matter what type or size is loaded. If you choose a tray that is
configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the MFP does not print automatically.
Instead, it waits for you to load the tray you chose with the type or size of print media for your print job.
If you load the tray, the MFP begins printing.
Type and Size
Printing by Type or Size means that you want the MFP to pull paper or print media from the appropriate
tray loaded with the correct type and size. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking
out trays and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for
letterhead and you specify the driver to print on plain paper, the MFP will not pull the letterhead from
that tray. Instead, it will pull paper from a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain
paper on the MFP control panel. Selecting media by Type and Size results in significantly better print
quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in
unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type for special print media, such as labels or grayscale
transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.
●
If you want to print by Type or Size, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box,
the Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the application.
●
If you often print on a certain type or size of media, the MFP administrator (for a network MFP) or
you (for a local MFP) can configure a tray for that type or size. Then, when you choose that type
or size as you print a job, the MFP pulls media from the tray configured for that type or size.
Print setting priorities
Changes made to print settings are prioritized according to where the changes are made as follows:
NOTE The names of commands and dialog boxes may vary depending on your program.
80
●
Page Setup dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Page Setup or a similar command
on the File menu of the program you are working in. Settings changed here override settings
changed anywhere else.
●
Print dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command
on the File menu of the program you are working in. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have
a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
●
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver). The printer driver opens when you click Properties
in the Print dialog box. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override
settings available anywhere else.
●
Default printer settings. The default printer settings determine settings used in all print jobs,
unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes, as
described above. There are two ways to change the default printer settings:
1.
Click Start, Settings, Printers, and then right-click the printer icon, and click Properties.
2.
Click Start, Control Panel, and then select the Printers folder, right-click the printer icon, and click
Properties.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
CAUTION To avoid affecting print jobs of other users, make printer setup changes through the
software application or the printer driver whenever possible. Printer setup changes made through
the control panel become default settings for subsequent jobs. Changes made through an
application or the printer driver affect only that specific job.
ENWW
Controlling print jobs
81
Selecting print media
You can use many types of paper and other print media with this MFP. This section provides guidelines
and specifications for selecting and using different print media. For more information about supported
print media, see Print media weights and sizes.
Before purchasing any media or specialized forms in quantity, verify that your paper supplier obtains
and understands the print media requirements specified in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide.
See Supplies and accessories for ordering information.
It is possible that media could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter and still not print satisfactorily.
This may be due to abnormal characteristics of the printing environment or to other variables over which
Hewlett-Packard has no control (for example, extremes in temperature and humidity).
Hewlett-Packard recommends testing any media before buying it in large quantities.
CAUTION Using media that does not conform to the specifications listed here or in the paper
specification guide can cause problems that require service. This service is not covered by the
Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
Media to avoid
This MFP can handle many types of media. Use of media outside the MFP’s specifications will cause
a loss of print quality and increase the chance of paper jams.
●
Do not use paper that is too rough.
●
Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3-hole punched paper.
●
Do not use multipart forms.
●
Do not use paper that has already been printed on or that has been fed through a photocopier.
●
Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.
Paper that can damage the MFP
In rare circumstances, paper can damage the MFP. Avoid the following paper to prevent possible
damage to the MFP:
82
●
Do not use paper with staples attached.
●
Do not use transparencies designed for inkjet printers or other low-temperature printers, or
transparencies designed for monochrome printing. Use only transparencies that are specified for
use with HP Color LaserJet printers.
●
Do not use glossy or photo papers intended for inkjet printers.
●
Do not use paper that is embossed or coated and is not designed for the temperatures of the image
fuser. Select media that can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●
Do not use letterhead paper with low-temperature dyes or thermography. Preprinted forms or
letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●
Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors when
exposed to 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
To order HP Color LaserJet printing supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies in the United
States or to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html worldwide.
ENWW
Selecting print media
83
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
The HP Color LaserJet 4730 series printers can automatically classify media into one of the following
categories:
●
Plain
●
Transparency
●
Glossy
●
Extra-heavy glossy
●
Glossy film
●
Heavy
●
Light
The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to Any Type Plain.
Configuring a tray to any other type, such as Bond or Glossy, deactivates the media sensor in that tray.
NOTE Get optimal performance with the automatic media sensing feature when using original
HP media designed for use in HP color LaserJet printers.
Tray 1 sensing
Full sensing (default)
●
The printer stops at each page to sense media type.
●
This is the best mode for using mixed media in a single print job.
Expanded sensing
●
Each time the printer begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.
●
The printer assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as the
first page.
●
This is the second-fastest mode, and is useful for using stacks of the same media type.
Transparency
84
●
The printer does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).
●
This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Tray 2–N sensing
Expanded sensing
●
The printer stops the first five pages fed from each paper tray to sense the type and averages the
five results.
●
The printer assumes that the sixth and all subsequent pages are of the same media type, until the
printer is turned off or goes into sleep mode, or until the tray is opened.
Transparency only (default)
ENWW
●
The printer does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).
●
This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)
85
Configuring input trays
The MFP allows you to configure input trays by type and size. You can load different media in the MFP’s
input trays and then request media by type or size using the control panel.
NOTE If you have used other HP LaserJet printer models, you might be accustomed to
configuring Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series,
setting Tray 1 size and type to ANY SIZE is equivalent to First mode. Setting size or type for
Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE is equivalent to Cassette mode.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, be sure that the media loaded meets the specifications for
duplex printing. (See Supported media weights and sizes.)
NOTE The instructions below are to configure the trays at the MFP control panel. You can also
configure the trays from your computer by accessing the embedded Web server. See Using the
embedded Web server.
Configuring trays when the MFP gives a prompt
In the following situations, the MFP automatically prompts you to configure the tray for type and size:
●
When you load paper into the tray
●
When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a
software application and the tray is not configured to match the print job’s settings
The control panel displays this message: LOAD TRAY XX: [TYPE] [SIZE], To change type touch
Menu. The instructions below explain how to configure the tray after the prompt appears.
NOTE The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and if Tray 1 is configured
for ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE.
To configure a tray when loading paper
1.
Load paper in the tray. (Close the tray if you are using Tray 2, 3, or 4.)
2.
The MFP displays the tray configuration message.
3.
Touch OK.
4.
Select the size.
NOTE The MFP automatically detects the media size in trays 2, 3, and 4.
5.
Select the paper type.
6.
Touch EXIT.
To configure a tray to match print job settings
1.
In the software application, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.
2.
Send the job to the MFP.
If the tray needs to be configured, the LOAD TRAY X: message appears.
86
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
3.
If the highlighted size is not correct, touch X.XxX.X INCHES or X MILLIMETERS. Then use the
numeric keypad to set the X and Y dimensions.
4.
If the highlighted paper type is not correct, touch PAPER HANDLING and select the paper type.
5.
Touch OK.
6.
Touch EXIT.
Configuring trays using the Paper Handling menu
You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the MFP. Use the PAPER
HANDLING menu to configure the trays as follows.
Configuring the paper size
1.
At the control panel, press Menu.
2.
Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3.
Touch TRAY <N> SIZE. (N represents the number of the tray you are configuring.)
4.
Touch SIZE. If you select CUSTOM, go to step 5.
5.
Touch ? or X MILLIMETERS. Then use either the numeric keypad or scroll bars to set the X
dimension. Press OK and then set the Y dimension.
6.
Touch OK.
7.
Touch EXIT.
Configuring the paper type
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Touch PAPER HANDLING.
3.
Touch TRAY <N> TYPE. (N represents the number of the tray you are configuring.)
4.
Touch the paper type.
5.
Touch EXIT.
Configuring Tray 2, 3, or 4 for a custom paper size
The MFP automatically detects many sizes of paper, but you can also configure trays for custom paper
sizes. You must specify the following parameters:
ENWW
●
Unit of measure (millimeters or inches)
●
X dimension (the width of the page as it feeds into the MFP)
●
Y dimension (the length of the page as it feeds into the MFP)
Configuring input trays
87
1
Media length adjustment
2
Media width adjustment
3
Page length (Y dimension)
4
Page width (X dimension)
Use the following procedure to configure a tray for a custom size. Once a custom size is set for a tray,
it will be retained until the media length guides are reset.
To set a custom size in Tray 2, 3, or 4
1.
Open the tray and place the media in the tray.
2.
Set the media length and width guides to the appropriate non-standard position and close the tray.
3.
Press Menu.
4.
Touch PAPER HANDLING.
5.
Touch TRAY <N> SIZE (where N is the number of the tray).
6.
Scroll to and touch CUSTOM.
7.
Touch X.XxX.X INCHES or X MILLIMETERS. This selects the measurement units for determining
the size of your custom paper.
8.
Use the numeric keypad or the scroll bar to set the X dimension (the short edge of the paper). The
X dimension can range from 148 to 216 mm (5.83 to 8.5 inches).
9.
Use the numeric keypad to set the Y dimension (the long edge of the paper). The Y dimension can
range from 210 to 356 mm (8.27 to 14 inches).
10. Touch OK.
11. Touch EXIT.
88
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Printing from Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Tray 1 is a multipurpose tray that holds up to 100 sheets of paper or 20 envelopes. It provides a
convenient way to print envelopes, transparencies, custom-size paper, media heavier than 32 lb, or
other types of media without having to unload the other trays.
Loading Tray 1
CAUTION To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
1.
Open Tray 1.
2.
Set the side guides to the desired width.
3.
Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed facing down and the top of the page facing you.
NOTE Tray 1 can hold approximately 100 sheets of standard 75 g/m2 (20 lb) office paper.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing for loading
instructions.
ENWW
Configuring input trays
89
4.
Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend the paper.
NOTE Make sure the paper fits under the tabs on the guides and not above the load level
indicators.
Printing envelopes from Tray 1
Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1. Up to 20 envelopes can be stacked in the tray.
Printing performance depends on the construction of the envelope.
In the software, set margins at least 15 mm (0.6 inches) from the edge of the envelope.
CAUTION Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed self-stick
adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely damage the MFP. To avoid jams and
possible MFP damage, never try to print on both sides of an envelope. Before you load envelopes,
make sure they are flat, undamaged, and not stuck together. Do not use envelopes with pressuresensitive adhesive.
To load envelopes into Tray 1
CAUTION To avoid jams, do not remove or insert envelopes during printing.
1.
90
Open Tray 1.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
2.
Load up to 20 envelopes in the center of Tray 1 with the side to be printed facing down and the
postage end toward the MFP. Slide the envelopes into the MFP as far as they will go without forcing
them.
3.
Adjust the guides to touch the envelope stack without bending the envelopes. Make sure the
envelopes fit under the tabs on the guides.
Printing envelopes
1.
Specify Tray 1 or select the media source by size in the printer driver.
2.
If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page orientation
in your software application or printer driver. Use the following guidelines to set margins for return
and destination addresses on Commercial #10 or DL envelopes.
Address type
Left margin
Top margin
Return
15 mm (0.6 inches)
15 mm (0.6 inches)
Destination
102 mm (4 inches)
51 mm (2 inches)
NOTE For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings appropriately.
3.
ENWW
Select Print from the software application or printer driver.
Configuring input trays
91
Printing from Tray 2, 3, or 4
Tray 2, 3, and 4 each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 50.8 mm (2-inch) stack of labels.
Tray 2 stacks above the other 500-sheet trays. The MFP detects the other trays and shows them as
options in the control panel CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The trays adjust for detectable media sizes;
letter, legal, A4, A5, JIS B5, and executive; and undetectable media sizes: 8.5 x 13 and Executive (JIS),
double Japan postcard, and custom. The MFP automatically detects the media size in these trays based
on the tray’s paper guide configuration. (See Supported media weights and sizes.)
Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, or 4
The following detectable standard-sized media is supported in Tray 2 and the other trays: letter, legal,
executive, A4, A5, and (JIS) B5.
CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra heavy paper, or unsupported sizes
of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill
the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the MFP.
92
1.
Slide open the tray from the MFP.
2.
Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back
of the tray to the length of the media being used.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
3.
Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using.
4.
Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting the ream of
paper. Splitting the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could result in a paper
jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than 75 g/m2 (20 lb),
the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingly. Do
not overfill the tray because the MFP might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the MFP might display an error message or the
media might jam.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing for loading
instructions.
ENWW
Configuring input trays
93
5.
Slide the tray into the MFP. The MFP will display the tray’s media type and size. If the configuration
is not correct, touch OK on the control panel. If the configuration is correct, touch EXIT.
Loading undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, and 4
Undetectable standard-sized media sizes are not marked in the tray, but are listed in the Size menu for
the tray.
The following undetectable standard-sized media is supported in the 500-sheet trays: executive (JIS),
8.5 x 13, double Japan postcard, and 16K.
CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra heavy paper, or unsupported sizes
of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill
the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause paper jams.
1.
94
Slide open the tray from the MFP.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
ENWW
2.
Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back
of the tray to the length of the media being used.
3.
Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using.
Configuring input trays
95
4.
Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting the ream of
paper. Splitting the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could result in a paper
jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than 75 g/m2 (20 lb),
the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingly. Do
not overfill the tray because the MFP might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the MFP might display an error message or the
media might jam.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing for loading
instructions.
96
5.
Slide the tray into the MFP. The MFP will display the tray’s media type and size. If the configuration
is not correct, touch OK on the control panel.
6.
If the configuration is correct, touch EXIT.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Loading custom-sized media into Tray 2
To use custom media, you must change the size setting on the control panel to CUSTOM and set the
unit of measure, X dimension, and Y dimension. See To configure a tray to match print job settings for
more information.
1.
ENWW
Slide open the tray from the MFP.
Configuring input trays
97
2.
98
Slide the media width guides all the way open and adjust the rear media-length guide to the length
of the paper being used.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
3.
Load media into the tray face up.
NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting the ream of
paper. Splitting the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could result in a paper
jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than 75 g/m2 (20 lb),
the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingly. Do
not overfill the tray because the MFP might not pick up the paper.
NOTE If you are duplex printing, see Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing for loading
instructions.
ENWW
4.
Slide the media width guides in making sure that they gently touch the paper. Insert the tray into
the MFP.
5.
Slide the tray into the MFP. The MFP will display the tray type and size configuration. To specify
specific custom dimensions, or if the type is not correct, touch OK when the MFP prompts To
change size or type.
6.
If the configuration is correct, touch EXIT.
Configuring input trays
99
Printing on special media
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media. For more information, see Print media
specifications.
NOTE Special media such as envelopes, transparencies, custom-size paper, or heavy media
greater than 120 g/m2 should be used in Tray 1.
To print on any special media, use the following procedure:
1.
Load the media in the paper tray.
2.
When the MFP prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the paper loaded
in the tray. For example, select EXTRA HEAVY GLOSS when loading HP Extra Heavy Gloss Laser
Paper.
3.
In the software application or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media type that is
loaded in the paper tray.
NOTE For the best print quality, always verify that the media type selected on the MFP control
panel and the media type selected in the application or printer driver match the type of media
loaded in the tray.
Transparencies
When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines:
●
Handle transparencies using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on the transparency can
cause print quality problems.
●
Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this MFP. Hewlett-Packard
recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this MFP. HP products are designed
to work together for optimum printing results.
●
In either the software application or the driver, select TRANSPARENCY as the media type, or print
from a tray that is configured for transparencies.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
CAUTION Transparencies not designed for LaserJet printing will melt in the MFP, causing
damage to the MFP.
Glossy paper
100
●
In either the software application or the driver, select GLOSSY or HEAVY as the media type, or
print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
●
Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY for the input tray being used.
●
Because this affects all print jobs, it is important to return the MFP to its original settings once the
job has printed. See Configuring input trays for more information.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
NOTE Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet glossy papers, such as Soft
Gloss paper, with this MFP. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing
results. If HP Color LaserJet glossy papers are not used with this MFP, print quality might be
compromised.
Colored paper
●
Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.
●
Pigments used in colored media must be able to withstand the MFP’s fusing temperature of 190°
C (374°F) for 0.1 second without deterioration.
●
Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced.
●
The MFP creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their spacing to produce
various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors.
Envelopes
NOTE Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1. Set the tray’s media size to the specific
envelope size. See Printing envelopes from Tray 1.
Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing on envelopes and help prevent MFP
jams:
●
Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1.
●
The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond).
●
Envelopes should be flat.
●
Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps.
●
Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Envelopes with peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and
pressures of the MFP’s fusing process.
●
Envelopes should be loaded face-down and with the postage end feeding into the MFP first.
Labels
NOTE For printing labels, set the tray’s media type to LABELS in the MFP control panel.
See Configuring input trays. When printing labels, use the following guidelines:
ENWW
●
Do not use partial sheets of labels.
●
Verify that the labels’ adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
●
Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels. Exposed areas can cause
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause MFP jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause
damage to MFP components.
●
Do not re-feed a sheet of labels.
Printing on special media
101
●
Verify that the labels lie flat.
●
Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Heavy paper
The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series.
Paper type
Paper weight
Heavy and extra-heavy stock
105-220 g/m2
28-60 lb
Cardstock
164-200 g/m2
43-53 lb
Intermediate
90-104 g/m2
24-28 lb
HP Tough paper
5 mil
44 lb
When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines:
●
Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb).
●
For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the MFP control panel to set the media
type for the tray to HEAVY.
●
In either the software application or the driver, select Heavy as the media type, or print from a tray
that is configured for heavy paper.
●
Because this setting affects all print jobs, it is important to return the MFP to its original settings
once the job has printed. See Configuring input trays.
CAUTION In general, do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification
recommended for this MFP. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality,
and excessive mechanical wear.
HP LaserJet Tough paper
When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines:
102
●
Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on
HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems.
●
Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this MFP. HP products are designed to work together for
optimum printing results.
●
In either the software application or the driver, select TOUGH PAPER as the media type, or print
from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Preprinted forms and letterhead
Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead:
●
Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or release
hazardous emissions when subjected to the MFP’s fusing temperature of approximately 190°C
(374°F) for 0.1 second.
●
Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any MFP rollers.
●
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during
storage.
●
Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper.
●
When duplex printing, preprinted forms and letterhead must be oriented correctly. For more
information, see Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing.
Recycled paper
This MFP supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as
standard paper. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Hewlett-Packard recommends
that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground wood.
ENWW
Printing on special media
103
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing
NOTE You must specify two-sided printing options in your software application or in the printer
driver in order to print on both sides of the page. If this option is not visible in the software
application or printer driver, use the following information to make duplex printing options
available.
To use two-sided printing:
●
Verify that the printer driver is configured to show the two-sided printing options: automatic and/or
manual. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
●
Once the two-sided printing option is shown, select the appropriate two-sided printing options in
the printer driver software. Two-sided printing options include page and binding orientation. For
more information about options for binding two-sided printing jobs, see Options for binding twosided printing jobs.
●
Automatic two-sided printing is not supported for certain media types, including transparencies,
envelopes, labels, heavy, extra heavy, cardstock, and Tough paper. (The maximum weight paper
for automatic duplex printing is 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond.)
●
Automatic two-sided printing only supports letter, legal, B5, executive, 8.5 x 13, and A4 paper sizes.
●
Manual two-sided printing can support all sizes and more types of media. (Transparencies,
envelopes, and labels are not supported.)
●
If both automatic and manual two-sided printing are enabled, the MFP will automatically print on
two sides if the size and type are supported by the duplexer. Otherwise, it will manually duplex.
●
For best results, avoid two-sided printing with rough-textured, heavy-weight media.
●
When using special media such as letterhead or forms, place the media face down in Tray 2, 3, or
4, with the logo to the left. Place special media face down in Tray 1, with the logo facing away from
the MFP.
NOTE Loading paper for duplexing is different than loading for one-sided printing.
104
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Control panel settings for automatic two-sided printing
Many software applications allow you to change two-sided print settings. If your software application or
printer driver does not allow you to adjust two-sided printing settings, you can adjust these settings
through the control panel. The factory default setting is OFF.
CAUTION Do not use two-sided printing when printing on labels. Serious damage may result.
To enable or disable two-sided printing from the MFP control panel
NOTE Changing settings for two-sided printing through the MFP control panel affects all print
jobs. Whenever possible, change settings for two-sided printing through your software application
or printer driver.
NOTE
panel.
Any changes made in the printer driver will override settings made using the MFP control
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch PRINTING
4.
Touch DUPLEX.
5.
Touch ON to enable two-sided printing or OFF to disable automatic two-sided printing.
6.
Touch Menu.
7.
Select two-sided printing from your software application or printer driver, if possible.
NOTE To select two-sided printing from the printer driver, the driver must first be properly
configured. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
ENWW
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing
105
Options for binding two-sided printing jobs
Before printing a two-sided document, use the printer driver to choose the edge on which you will bind
your finished document. Long-edge or book binding is the conventional layout used in book binding.
Short-edge or tablet binding is the typical calendar binding.
NOTE The default binding setting is to bind on the long edge when the page is set up for portrait
orientation. To change to long-edge binding, click the Flip Pages Up check box.
Manual two-sided printing
If you want to print on two sides (duplex) on paper other than the supported sizes or weights (for example,
paper heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb) or very thin paper), you will have to go to the MFP and reinsert the
paper manually after the first side has printed.
NOTE Damaged or previously used paper can cause paper jams and should not be used.
NOTE Manual two-sided printing is not supported for Windows 98/Me systems that use the PS
driver.
To manually print on two sides (duplex)
1.
Ensure that the printer driver is configured to allow manual duplexing. In the printer driver,
select Allow Manual Duplex.
2.
From the application, open the printer driver.
3.
Select the appropriate size and type.
4.
On the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides or Print on Both Sides (Manually).
5.
The default binding option is to bind on the long edge of the paper in portrait layout. To change the
setting, click the Finishing tab, and select the Flip pages up check box.
6.
Click OK. The Print on Both Sides instructions will appear. Follow the instructions to finish printing
your document.
NOTE If the total number of sheets to be duplexed exceeds the Tray 1 capacity for manual
duplex jobs, feed the top 100 sheets and press Menu. When prompted, feed the next 100 sheets
and press Menu. Repeat as necessary until all the sheets from the output stack have been loaded
into Tray 1.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
Printing booklets
Some versions of the printer driver let you control the printing of booklets when duplexing. You can
select binding on the left or right side on letter, legal, or A4 paper size. Windows 2000 and XP supports
booklet printing for all paper sizes.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
106
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Stapling documents
The optional stapler/stacker can staple jobs of up to 30 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. The stapler can
staple letter-size, A4-size, legal-size paper, Executive (JIS), and 8.5 x 13. The stapler/stacker can stack
up to 500 sheets of paper.
●
Paper weight can range from 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb).
●
If the job consists of only one sheet or more than 30 sheets, the MFP will print the job to the bin,
but will not staple the job.
●
The stapler supports paper only. Do not try to staple other media, such as transparencies or labels.
The stapler staples a maximum of 20 sheets of glossy papers, cardstock, and HP Tough papers.
To staple a print job, select stapling in the software. You can usually select the stapler in your program
or printer driver, although some options might be available only in the printer driver. Where and how you
make selections depends on your program or printer driver. You might need to configure the printer
driver to recognize the stapler/stacker. You need to set this setting only once. For details, see
Configuring the printer driver to recognize the 3-bin mailbox/stapler/stacker.
If you cannot select the stapler in the program or printer driver, select the stapler at the MFP control
panel.
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The printer driver
can be configured to disable the staple option if the staple cartridge is empty.
To select the stapler in an application (Windows)
1.
On the File menu, click Print, and then click Properties.
2.
On the Output tab, click the drop-down list under Staple, and click One staple angled.
To select the stapler at the control panel
1.
Press Menu to enter the menus.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch STAPLER/STACKER.
4.
Touch STAPLE.
5.
Touch ONE.
NOTE Selecting the stapler at the MFP control panel changes the default setting to STAPLE.
It is possible that all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer
driver override settings that are changed at the control panel.
Loading staples
Load staples if the MFP control-panel display prompts you with a STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES
message (the stapler has fewer than 20 usable staples left) or a REPLACE STAPLER CARTRIDGE
message (the stapler is empty, or the remaining staples cannot be used).
ENWW
Stapling documents
107
You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues
printing but does not staple the jobs. For more information, see To configure the MFP to stop or continue
when the staple cartridge is empty.
To load staples
108
1.
Press and hold the release button on the top of the stapler/stacker. Pull the stapler/stacker away
from the MFP.
2.
Open the staple-cartridge cover.
3.
Grasp the green staple-cartridge handle and pull the old staple cartridge out of the stapler unit.
4.
Insert the new staple cartridge into the stapler unit and push down on the green handle until the
unit snaps into place.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
5.
ENWW
Close the staple-cartridge cover, and slide the stapler/stacker into the MFP.
Stapling documents
109
Special printing situations
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.
Printing a different first page
Use the following procedure to print the first page of a document on a different media type than the rest
of the document, for example, to print the first page of a document on letterhead paper and the rest on
plain paper.
1.
From your application or printer driver, specify a tray for the first page and another tray for the
remaining pages.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
2.
Load the special media into the tray that you specified in step 1.
3.
Load the media for the remaining pages of the document into another tray.
You can also print on different media by using the MFP control panel or printer driver to set the types
of media that are loaded in the trays and then selecting the first and remaining pages by media type.
Printing a blank back cover
Use the following procedure to print a blank back cover. You can also select an alternate paper source
or print on a different media type than the rest of the document.
1.
On the printer driver’s Paper tab, select Use different paper, then from the drop-down list, select
Back Cover, check Add a blank back cover, and then click OK.
2.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
You can also select an alternate paper source or print a blank back cover on a different media type than
the rest of the document. If desired, select a different source and type from the drop-down lists.
Printing on custom-size media
The MFP supports single-sided printing on custom-size media. Tray 1 supports media sizes from 76 x
127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). Trays 2, 3, and 4 support media sizes from
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) (A5 size) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
When printing on custom-size media, if Tray 1 is configured in the MFP control panel as TRAY X TYPE=
ANY TYPE and TRAY X SIZE= ANY SIZE, the MFP will print on whatever media is loaded in the tray.
When printing on custom-size media from Tray 2, 3, or 4, adjust the switch on the tray to the
CUSTOM position, and from the control panel, set the media size to CUSTOM or ANY CUSTOM.
Some software applications and printer drivers allow you to specify custom paper-size dimensions. You
can configure custom paper sizes from the printer driver’s Paper tab or Forms tab (Windows 2000 and
XP). Be sure to set the correct paper size in both the page setup and print dialog boxes.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
If your software application requires you to calculate margins for custom-size paper, see the online Help
for that application.
110
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Stopping a print request
You can stop a print request either from the MFP control panel or from your software application. To
stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific network software.
NOTE
It may take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.
To stop the current print job from the MFP control panel
1.
Press Stop on the MFP control panel.
2.
To resume the print job, press Start.
Pressing Stop does not affect subsequent print jobs that are stored in the MFP buffer.
To stop the current print job from a software application
A dialog box will appear briefly on the control panel display, giving you the option to cancel the print job.
If several requests have been sent to the MFP through an application, the print jobs might be waiting in
a print queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the application documentation for specific
instructions on canceling a print request from the computer.
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows 98, 2000, XP, or
Me), delete the print job there.
For Windows 98, 2000, XP, or Me, go to Start, Settings, and then Printers. Double-click the HP Color
LaserJet 4730mfp icon to open the print spooler. Select the print job you want to cancel, and then press
Delete. If the print job is not cancelled, you might need to shut down and restart the computer.
ENWW
Special printing situations
111
Selecting the output bin
The MFP has two output-bin locations: the ADF output bin and the standard output bin(s) on the output
device.
1
Standard output bin
2
ADF output bin (for copy originals)
When documents are scanned or copied by using the ADF, the original documents are automatically
delivered to the ADF output bin. Copies are delivered to the standard output bin or the output bin(s) on
the stapler/stacker or to the 3-bin mailbox.
Documents that are sent to the MFP from a computer are delivered to the standard output bin or the
output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or to the 3-bin mailbox.
3-bin mailbox output bins
If you are using the 3-bin mailbox, three output bins are available. You can configure these bins to act
as individual mailboxes, or they can be combined to function as a single bin to stack documents.
112
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
1
3–bin mailbox output bins
2
ADF output bin (for copy originals)
You can set up these options in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, on the MBM-3 CONFIGURATION
submenu. This menu is available only when the 3-bin mailbox is installed. For more information about
using the 3-bin mailbox, see 3-bin mailbox.
The top two bins each hold up to 100 sheets of paper. A sensor causes the MFP to stop when the bin
is full. MFP operation continues when you empty or reduce the amount of media in the bin.
The lower bin holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
Selecting an output location
It is recommended that you select an output location (bin) through your program or driver. Where and
how you make selections depends on your program or driver. If you cannot select an output location
from the program or driver, set the default output location from the MFP control panel.
To select an output location at the control panel
ENWW
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch PRINTING.
4.
Scroll to and touch PAPER DESTINATION to view the output bin options.
5.
Scroll to and touch the output bin that you want. The message Setting saved appears on the
control-panel display for a moment.
Selecting the output bin
113
Job storage features
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series lets you store a job in the MFP’s memory for printing at a later
time. The job storage features use memory from both the hard disk and random access memory (RAM).
These job storage features are described below.
To support job storage features for complex jobs, or if you often print complex graphics, print PostScript
(PS) documents, or use many downloaded fonts, HP recommends that you install additional memory.
Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job-storage features, such as quick copying.
NOTE To use the Private Job and Proof and Hold features, you must have a minimum of
192 MB of memory: 256 MB DDR plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board.
CAUTION Make sure to uniquely identify jobs in the printer driver before printing. Using default
names may override previous jobs with the same default name or cause the job to be deleted.
Proofing and holding a job
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then
print additional copies. This option stores the print job on the MFP hard disk, and prints only the first
copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the
remaining copies of the print job from the MFP control panel. The number of proof-and-hold print jobs
that can be stored in the MFP is set from the MFP control panel.
To permanently store the job and prevent the MFP from deleting it, select the Stored Job option in the
driver.
Printing stored jobs
1.
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
2.
Touch RETRIEVE JOB.
3.
Touch USER NAME to see a list of names.
4.
Scroll to and touch your name to see a list of jobs.
5.
Scroll to and touch your job.
6.
Touch PRINT.
7.
To print the default number of copies, touch OK. To change the number of copies, use the keypad
to select a new number and touch OK.
Deleting stored jobs
When you send a stored job, the MFP overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and job name.
If there is not a job already stored under the same user and job name, and the MFP needs additional
space, the MFP may delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest. The default number of jobs that
can be stored is 32. You can change the number of jobs that can be stored from the control panel. For
more information about setting the job storage limit, see Configure device menu.
114
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
A job can be deleted from the control panel, from the embedded Web server, or from HP Web Jetadmin.
To delete a job from the control panel, use the following procedure:
1.
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
2.
Scroll to and touch RETRIEVE JOB.
3.
Scroll to and touch your name.
4.
Scroll to and touch your job.
5.
Scroll to and touch DELETE.
6.
Touch YES.
Quick-copying a job
Quick Copy stores a copy of a printed job on the hard disk, and allows you to print additional copies of
a print job using the control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the MFP
is set from the MFP control panel.
This feature can be turned on or off from the driver.
1.
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
2.
Touch RETRIEVE JOB.
3.
Touch your USER NAME to see a list of names.
4.
Scroll to your job and touch OK.
5.
To print the default number of copies, touch PRINT. To change the number of copies, use the
keypad to enter the number of copies and touch OK.
Private jobs
This option allows you to send a print job directly to the MFP memory. Selection of Private Job activates
the PIN field. The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN in the MFP control panel. After the
job is printed, the MFP removes the job from the MFP memory. This feature is useful when you are
printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
Private Job stores the print job on the hard disk. After it is released for printing, the private job is
immediately deleted from the MFP. If more copies are needed, you have to reprint the job from the
program. If you send a second private job to the MFP with the same user name and job name as an
existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the
existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if power to the MFP is turned off.
NOTE
A lock symbol next to a job name indicates that the job is private.
Specify that a job is private from the driver. Select the Private Job option and type a 4-digit PIN. To
avoid overwriting jobs with the same name, also specify a username and job name.
Printing a private job
ENWW
1.
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
2.
Touch RETRIEVE JOB.
Job storage features
115
3.
Touch your USER NAME.
4.
Touch the JOB NAME.
5.
Touch PRINT.
6.
Use the keypad to enter the PIN.
7.
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies and touch OK.
Deleting a private job
A private job can be deleted from the MFP control panel. You can delete a job without printing it, or it
will be automatically deleted after it is printed.
1.
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
2.
Touch RETRIEVE JOB.
3.
Touch your USER NAME.
4.
Touch the JOB NAME.
5.
Touch DELETE.
6.
Use the keypad to enter the PIN and touch OK.
Storing a print job
You can download a print job to the MFP without printing it. You can then print the job at any time through
the MFP control panel. For example, you may want to download a personnel form, calendar, time sheet,
or accounting form that other users can access and print.
To store a print job permanently, select the Stored Job option in the driver when printing the job.
1.
Press Menu to enter MENUS.
2.
Touch RETRIEVE JOB.
3.
Touch USER NAME.
4.
Touch JOB NAME.
5.
Touch PRINT.
6.
Use the keypad to enter the PIN, and touch OK.
7.
Use the keypad to enter the number of copies, and touch OK.
Mopier mode
When Mopier Mode is enabled, the MFP produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases MFP performance and reduces network traffic by sending
the job to the MFP once, then storing it in the MFP’s RAM. The remainder of the copies are printed at
the MFP’s fastest speed. All documents can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the
desktop, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
116
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
Managing memory
This MFP supports up to 544 MB of memory: 512 MB DDR plus 32 MB of additional memory on the
formatter board. You can add additional memory by installing dual data-rate (DDR) memory. To allow
for memory expansion, the MFP has two DDR slots, which accept 128 or 256 MB of RAM each. For
information about installing memory, see Working with memory and print server cards.
NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series use 200-pin small outline dual
inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.
The MFP features Memory Enhancement Technology (MEt), which automatically compresses page
data to provide the most efficient use of the MFP’s RAM.
The MFP uses DDR SODIMM. Extended data output (EDO) DIMMs are not supported.
NOTE If memory problems occur when you are printing complex graphics, you can make more
memory available by removing downloaded fonts, style sheets, and macros from MFP memory.
Reducing the complexity of a print job from within an application can help avoid memory
problems.
ENWW
Managing memory
117
Using features in the printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the product features are available from the printer
driver. For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver, see the printerdriver Help. The following features are described in this section:
●
Creating and using quick sets
●
Creating and using watermarks
●
Resizing documents
●
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver
●
Using different paper/covers
●
Printing a blank first page
●
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●
Printing on both sides of the paper
●
Setting the stapling options
●
Setting the color options
●
Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
●
Using the Services tab
NOTE Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel
settings. Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.
Creating and using quick sets
Use quick sets to save the current driver settings for reuse. For example, you can save the page
orientation, print on both sides, and paper source settings in a quick set. Quick sets are available on
most printer-driver tabs. You can save up to 25 Print Task Quick Sets.
NOTE The printer driver might report that 25 Print Task Quick Sets have been defined when
fewer than 25 are visible. Some predefined Print Task Quick Sets, which do not apply to your
product, might be included and are counted in the total number.
To create a quick set
118
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Select the print settings that you want to use.
3.
In the Print Task Quick Sets box, type a name for the selected settings (for example "Quarterly
Report" or "My Project Status").
4.
Click Save.
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
To use quick sets
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Select the quick set that you want to use from the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down list.
3.
Click OK. The product is now set to print according to the saved settings in the quick set.
NOTE To restore printer-driver default settings, select Default Print Settings from the Print
Task Quick Sets drop-down list.
Creating and using watermarks
A watermark is a notice, such as "Confidential," that is printed in the background of each page of a
document.
To use an existing watermark
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
From the Effects tab, click the Watermarks drop-down list.
3.
Click the watermark that you want to use.
4.
If you want the watermark to appear only on the first page of the document, click First Page Only.
5.
Click OK. The product is now set to print the watermark that you have selected.
To remove the watermark, click (none) in the Watermarks drop-down list.
Resizing documents
Use the document resizing options to scale a document to a percentage of its normal size. You can also
choose to print a document on a different size paper, with or without scaling.
To reduce or enlarge a document
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
On the Effects tab, type the percentage by which you want to reduce or enlarge your document.
You can also use the scroll bar to adjust the reduce or enlarge percentage.
3.
Click OK. The product is now set to scale the document to the reduce or enlarge percentage that
you selected.
To print a document onto a different paper size
ENWW
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
On the Effects tab, click Print Document On.
3.
Select the target paper size to print on.
4.
To print the document on the target paper size without scaling it to fit, make sure that the Scale to
Fit option is not selected.
5.
Click OK. The product is now set to print the document as you specified.
Using features in the printer driver
119
Setting a custom paper size from the printer driver
To set a custom paper size
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Custom.
3.
On the Custom Paper Size window, type the name of the custom paper size.
4.
Type the paper-size length and width. If you type a size that is too small or too large, the driver
automatically adjusts the size to the minimum or maximum size that is allowed.
5.
If necessary, click the button to change the unit of measure between millimeters and inches.
6.
Click Save.
7.
Click Close. The product is now set to print the document on the custom-size paper that you
selected. The name that you saved appears in the paper-size list for future use.
Using different paper/covers
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from other pages in the print job.
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, select the appropriate paper for the first page of the print job.
3.
Click Use Different Paper/Covers.
4.
In the list box, click the pages or covers that you want to print on different paper.
5.
To print front or back covers, you must also select Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
6.
Select the appropriate paper type or source for the other pages of the print job. The product is now
set to print the document on the paper that you selected.
NOTE The paper size must be the same for all pages of the print job.
Printing a blank first page
To print a blank first page
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
On the Paper or Paper/Quality tab, click Use Different Paper/Covers.
3.
In the list box, click Front Cover.
4.
Click Add Blank or Preprinted Cover.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature is available in some drivers
and provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
120
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a layout or pages-per-sheet option in the
driver. (This is sometimes called 2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Click the Finishing tab.
3.
In the section for Document Options, select the number of pages that you want to print on each
sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).
4.
If the number of pages is greater than 1, select the correct options for Print Page Borders and
Page Order.
5.
●
Click Print Page Borders if you want to print a border around each page on the sheet.
●
Click Page Order to select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
Click OK. The product is now set to print the number of pages per sheet that you have selected.
Printing on both sides of the paper
When a duplex printing accessory is installed, you can automatically print on both sides of a page. If a
duplex printing accessory is not installed, you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the
paper through the product a second time.
NOTE In the printer driver, Print on Both Sides (manually) is available only when no duplex
printing accessory is installed in the product or when the duplex printing accessory does not
support the type of print media being used.
To print on both sides by using the duplex-printing accessory
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, bottom-edge first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper with front side down, and the top edge at the
back of the tray.
CAUTION Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond). This could lead
to a Paper Jam in the printer.
2.
ENWW
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
Using features in the printer driver
121
3.
For Windows, on the Finishing tab, click Print on Both Sides.
4.
Click OK. The product is now ready to print on both sides of the paper.
To print on both sides manually
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, bottom-edge first.
●
For all other trays, load letterhead paper with front side down, and the top edge at the back
of the tray.
Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond). Jamming could
CAUTION
result.
2.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3.
On the Finishing tab, select Print on Both Sides (manually).
4.
Click OK.
5.
Send the print job to the product.
6.
Go to the product. Remove any blank paper that is in tray 1. Insert the printed stack with the printed
side up, and the bottom-edge feeding into the product first. You must print the second side from
tray 1. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears before feeding the output stack
back into Tray 1 for printing the second half.
7.
A prompt might appear on the control-panel display that instructs you to press a button to continue.
Layout options for printing on both sides
The four duplex orientation options are shown below. To select option 1 or 4, select Flip Pages Up in
the printer driver.
1
2
1. Long-edge landscape
122
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
3
4
This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and
spreadsheet programs. Every other printed image is oriented
upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to
bottom.
ENWW
2. Short-edge landscape
Each printed image is oriented right-side-up. Facing pages are
read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to
bottom on the right page.
3. Long-edge portrait
This is the default setting, and the most common layout used,
with every printed image oriented right-side-up. Facing pages
are read from top to bottom on the first page, then from top to
bottom on the second page.
4. Short-edge portrait
This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed
image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read
continuously from top to bottom.
Setting the stapling options
You can select whether a job is stapled by using the printer driver.
To set the stapling options
1.
Open the printer-driver properties, and click the Configure tab. (The Configure tab is not available
from within software programs.)
NOTE The procedure to open the printer-driver properties depends on the operating
system that you are using. For information about opening the printer-driver properties for
your operating system, see Gaining access to the printer drivers. Look for the column titled
"To change the configuration settings".
2.
In the area for configuring additional output devices, select the stapler/stacker, and then click
OK.
3.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
4.
Click the Output tab.
5.
In the Staple box, select the stapling option that you want to use for the print job.
6.
Click OK. The product is now set to use the stapling option that you selected.
Setting the color options
Options on the Color tab control how colors are interpreted and printed from software programs. You
can choose either Automatic or Manual color options. For more information, see Managing printer color
options on Windows computers.
ENWW
●
Select Automatic to optimize the color and halftone used for each element in a document (such
as text, graphics, and photographs). The Automatic setting provides additional color options for
applications and operating systems that support color-management systems. This setting is
recommended for printing all color documents.
●
Select Manual to manually adjust the color and halftone modes for text, graphics, and photographs.
If you are using a PCL driver, you can adjust the RGB data. If you are using the PS driver, you can
adjust RGB or CMYK data.
Using features in the printer driver
123
To set the color options
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Select the Color tab.
3.
In the Color Options area, select the option that you want to use.
4.
If you selected Manual, click Settings to open the Color Settings dialog box. Adjust the individual
settings for text, graphics, and photographs. You can also adjust the general printing settings. Click
OK.
5.
In the Color Themes area, select the RGB Color option that you want to use.
6.
Click OK. The product is now set to use the color options that you selected.
Using the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
HP Digital Imaging Options make it easy for you to get better photos and images.
NOTE HP Digital Imaging Options are available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
The following options are available on the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box:
●
Contrast Enhancement: Automatically enhance colors and contrast for washed-out photos. Click
Automatic to allow the printer software to intelligently brighten your photo, focusing only on areas
that need adjustment.
●
Digital Flash: Adjust the exposure in dark areas of photos to bring out detail. Click Automatic to
allow the printer software to balance lightness and darkness automatically.
●
SmartFocus: Enhance the image quality and clarity of low resolution images such as those
downloaded from the Internet. Click On to allow the printer software to sharpen details in the image
automatically.
●
Sharpness: Adjust the image sharpness to your preference. Click Automatic to allow the printer
software to set the level of sharpening for the image automatically.
●
Smoothing: Soften an image. Click Automatic to allow the printer software to set the level of
smoothing for the image automatically.
Opening the HP Digital Imaging Options dialog box
1.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2.
Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then click the HP Digital Imaging button.
NOTE If you installed the HP Image Zone software, you can use it to edit and further enhance
digital photos.
Using the Services tab
NOTE The Services tab is available for Windows XP.
124
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
If the product is connected to a network, use the Services tab to obtain product and supply-status
information. Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status page of the
HP Embedded Web Server. This page shows the current status of the product, the percentage of life
remaining for each supply, and information for ordering supplies.
ENWW
Using features in the printer driver
125
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver
When you print from a software program, many of the printer features are available from the printer
driver. For complete information about the features that are available in the printer driver, see the printerdriver Help. The following features are described in this section:
●
Creating and using presets in Mac OS X
●
Printing a cover page
●
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
●
Printing on both sides of the paper
●
Setting the color options
NOTE Settings in the printer driver and software program generally override control-panel
settings. Software-program settings generally override printer-driver settings.
Creating and using presets in Mac OS X
Use presets to save the current driver settings for reuse. For example, you can save the page orientation,
print-on-both-sides feature, and paper-type settings in a preset.
To create a preset
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Select the print settings that you want to use.
3.
In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset (for example "Quarterly Report"
or "My Project Status").
4.
Click OK.
To use presets
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
In the Presets menu, select the preset that you want to use.
NOTE To restore printer-driver default settings, select Standard from the Presets pop-up
menu.
Printing a cover page
If you want to, you can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such
as “Confidential”).
126
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
To print a cover page
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
On the Cover Page or Paper/Quality pop-up menu, select whether to print the cover page Before
Document or After Document.
3.
If you are using Mac OS X, in the Cover Page Type pop-up menu, select the message that you
want to print on the cover page.
NOTE To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way
to print draft pages.
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Click the Layout pop-up menu.
3.
Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,
4, 6, 9, or 16).
4.
If the number of pages is greater than 1, next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement
of the pages on the sheet.
5.
Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
Printing on both sides of the paper
When a duplex printing accessory is installed, you can automatically print on both sides of a page. If a
duplex printing accessory is not installed, you can manually print on both sides of a page by feeding the
paper through the printer a second time.
ENWW
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver
127
To print on both sides by using the duplex-printing accessory
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up and the bottom-edge feeding into
the printer first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper with the front side down and the top edge at the
back of the tray.
CAUTION
result.
Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond). Jamming might
2.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3.
Open the Layout pop-up menu.
4.
Next to Two Sided Printing, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.
5.
Click Print.
To print on both sides manually
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:
●
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side up and the bottom-edge feeding into
the printer first.
●
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper with the front side down, and the top edge at the
back of the tray.
CAUTION
result.
Do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond). Jamming might
2.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
3.
On the Finishing pop-up menu, select the Manual Duplex option.
NOTE If the Manual Duplex option is not enabled, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.
4.
Click Print.
5.
Go to the printer. Remove any blank paper that is in tray 1. Insert the printed stack with the printed
side up and the bottom-edge feeding into the printer first. You must print the second side from
tray 1. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears before replacing the output stack
in tray 1 for printing the second half.
6.
If a prompt appears on the control-panel display, press a control-panel button to continue.
Setting the color options
Use the Color Options pop-up menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software
programs.
128
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
NOTE For more information about using the color options, see Managing printer color options
on Macintosh computers.
To set the color options
ENWW
1.
Open the printer driver (see Gaining access to the printer drivers).
2.
Open the Color Options pop-up menu.
3.
If you are using Mac OS X, click Show Advanced Options.
4.
Manually adjust the individual settings for text, graphics, and photographs.
Using features in the Macintosh printer driver
129
130
Chapter 4
Printing tasks
ENWW
5
Copying
This MFP can function as a standalone, walk-up copier. It is not necessary to install the printing system
software on a computer, nor is it necessary to have a computer turned on to make photocopies. You
can adjust the copy settings at the control panel. You can also copy originals by using either the ADF
or the scanner glass. The MFP can process copying, printing, and digital-sending jobs simultaneously.
This chapter provides information about how to make copies and how to change copy settings, including
the following topics:
●
Copy-screen navigation
●
Basic copying instructions
●
Modifying copy settings for the current job
●
Copying multiple sized originals
●
Creating a stored copy job
It is recommended that you review the basic control-panel information before using the MFP copying
functions. See Using the control panel for more information.
ENWW
131
Copy-screen navigation
Navigate through the control-panel features and options by using the touchscreen graphical display.
1
Original section
2
Image modification section
3
Copy section
4
Describe Original button
5
Original page-size icon
6
Contrast adjustment
7
Copy page icon
8
Start button
9
Back button
10
COPY SETTINGS button
User-attention error messages appear in a pop-up dialog box that prohibits normal screen interaction
until the message is cleared.
Cancel button
Each lower-level screen (any screen after the home screen) has a Cancel button. Touching the
Cancel button negates any changes you made, and takes you back to the previous screen.
OK button
Each lower-level screen on the touchscreen has an OK button. Touching the OK button accepts any
changes that you made, and takes you to the next screen.
132
Chapter 5
Copying
ENWW
Basic copying instructions
This section provides the basic instructions for copying.
Copying by using the default settings
The default settings for copying are the following:
●
Number of copies: One
●
Size: Letter/A4-size original and Letter/A4-size copy
●
Page Orientation: Portrait
●
Number of Sides: One-sided copying
●
Page Content: Mixed (mixed text and graphics)
●
Job Mode: Off
●
Heavy Paper: Off
●
Black copies
To copy by using the default settings
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face up in the ADF.
2.
Press Start.
Copying by using user-defined settings
Use the following procedure to change the settings for your copies.
To make copies by using settings other than the default settings
1.
Place the original face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
On the touchscreen of the graphical display, do the following:
2.
Touch COPY.
3.
Touch Describe Original to view the options. You can select BASIC options or Advanced... options.
4.
Touch the BASIC items that describe your original. The following options are available:
5.
ENWW
●
Size: Select the paper size of your original.
●
PAGE ORIENTATION: Select PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE. For portrait orientation, the top
of the original document is along the short edge of the page. For landscape orientation, the
top of the original document is along the long edge of the page.
●
NUMBER OF SIDES: Select 1 or 2.
●
PAGE CONTENT: Select TEXT, MIXED, PHOTO, or GLOSSY PHOTO.
Touch the Advanced... tab to change the Job Mode setting. If you are combining multiple scans
into a single job, select ON. For more information, see Using Job Mode.
Basic copying instructions
133
6.
After you make your selections, touch OK.
NOTE The page icon in the ORIGINAL section of the graphical display shows a
representative image of the original document.
7.
Make any necessary adjustments to the contrast and reduction or enlargement by using the
CONTRAST CONTROL bar and the REDUCE/ENLARGE button in the image modification section
of the graphical display.
8.
Touch COPY to view your options. You can select BASIC options or Advanced... options.
9.
SIZE AND TYPE: Select AUTO (paper size is matched to original size), or the copy size that you
want. Be sure that you have loaded the correct paper size in the tray.
NUMBER OF SIDES: Select 1-SIDED or 2-SIDED.
-orBACK SIDE ORIENTATION: Select NORMAL or FLIP (applies when 2-SIDED copying is chosen).
-orPAGES PER SHEET: Select 1, 2, 4, or BOOKLET.
-orIf you select 4 pages per sheet, "Z" or "N" ordering is tailored to the page orientation, and the option
to put a border around each smaller page is displayed.
-orBORDER: Select BORDER or NO BORDER. This item is available only when printing multiple
pages on one sheet.
-orSTAPLE: Stapling options depend on your output device and the paper size selected.
10. Touch the Advanced... options, if necessary. Some of the options include the following items:
●
COLLATION: Select COLLATED or UNCOLLATED.
●
Output Bin: Select the appropriate bin.
●
Job Storage: Select ON to indicate that the copy job should be stored on the MFP rather than
printed. Select OFF to copy the job normally. See Creating a stored copy job for more
information.
●
ENHANCE: Touch SHARPNESS or BACKGROUND REMOVAL.
●
SCALE TO FIT: Select ON to automatically scale the copy to fit on the paper that is loaded
in the MFP.
NOTE The page icon in the COPY section of the graphical display shows a representative
image of the copy.
11. After you make your selections, touch OK.
12. Use the numeric keypad to type the number of copies, and then press Start.
134
Chapter 5
Copying
ENWW
Copying by using the scanner glass
Use the scanner glass to copy small, lightweight (less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)), or irregularly-sized originals
such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, or old or worn documents.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass.
2.
Make any image modifications, and select any copy settings, if necessary.
3.
If you are making only one copy, press Start. If you are making multiple copies, use the numeric
keypad to type the number of copies (up to 999), and then press Start to begin copying. If you are
copying more than one page from the scanner glass, see Using Job Mode to make a multi-page
copy job.
Copying by using the ADF
Use the ADF to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages (depending on the
thickness of the pages).
1.
Load the document face-up in the ADF.
2.
Make any image modifications, and select any copy settings.
3.
If you are making only one copy, press Start. If you are making multiple copies, use the numeric
keypad to type the required number of copies, and then press Start.
The ADF can distinguish between letter- and legal-sized original documents. If the document that you
are copying has mixed sizes, specify MIXED LTR/LGL in the Describe Original settings. Copying is
slower when using this feature.
Using Job Mode
Use the Job Mode feature to build a single copy job from multiple scans. You can use either the ADF
or the scanner glass. The settings for the first scan are used for subsequent scans.
1.
Touch COPY.
2.
Touch Describe Original.
3.
Touch Advanced....
4.
In the JOB MODE check box, touch ON.
5.
Select any output settings, if necessary.
6.
After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.
7.
If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then press Start.
8.
If the job contains no more pages, touch FINISHED to print.
NOTE In Job Mode, if you scan the first page of a document by using the ADF, then you must
scan all of the pages in that document by using the ADF. If you scan the first page of a document
by using the scanner glass, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using the
scanner glass.
ENWW
Basic copying instructions
135
Modifying copy settings for the current job
You can modify your copies by adjusting the contrast, reducing or enlarging the size, or enhancing the
quality.
Adjusting the copy brightness
You can adjust the contrast by touching the arrows on the BRIGHTNESS CONTROL bar. The slider
moves to the lighter or darker area of the bar.
Reducing or enlarging copies
The MFP has an autoscaling feature. If the original paper size differs from the copy paper size, the MFP
can autodetect a size mismatch between the original page size and the copy page size. The scanned
image of the original page is reduced or enlarged automatically to match the copy paper size. You can
override autoscaling by using the reduce and enlarge feature.
The MFP can reduce copies to as little as 25% of the original size and enlarge copies to as much as
400% of the original (200% when using the ADF).
To reduce or enlarge your copies, touch the arrows on the REDUCE/ENLARGE button until you reach
the size that you want. The scale percentage box in the center of the REDUCE/ENLARGE button
indicates the percentage of reduction or enlargement. You can also touch 100% to display the keypad
to type the number that you want. Touch OK to save the changes.
Background removal
If you copy a document that is printed on colored paper, or if you use two-sided copying, you can enhance
the copy quality by removing any background that might cause your copy to streak or blur. Touch COPY
SETTINGS, and then touch the Advanced... tab to gain access to the embedded BACKGROUND
REMOVAL screen. Adjust the amount of background removal by touching the arrows on the
BACKGROUND REMOVAL control. The slider moves to the lighter or darker area of the
BACKGROUND REMOVAL control bar.
Sharpness
The SHARPNESS control specifies the sharpness setting that the scanner uses when the MFP scans
your original. Touch COPY SETTINGS, and then touch the Advanced... tab to gain access to the
SHARPNESS screen. Sharpness enhances the edges of the original so that faint or fine text and
graphics are reproduced more sharply. Adjust the amount of sharpness by touching the arrows on
the SHARPNESS control bar.
136
Chapter 5
Copying
ENWW
Copying multiple sized originals
If the original document contains mixed-size originals, for example, a letter-size document with several
legal-size charts, see Copying submenu and Copying by using the ADF for more information.
ENWW
Copying multiple sized originals
137
Creating a stored copy job
Turning on the job storage setting indicates that you want the copy job to be stored on the hard disk,
and that you will print the job later. You must provide the following information to create a stored job:
1.
Touch COPY SETTINGS.
2.
Select your basic copy settings (see Copying by using user-defined settings).
3.
Touch the Advanced... tab.
4.
At the Job Storage box, select ON. A popup dialog box is displayed, asking for the USER
NAME, and JOB NAME. If AUTHENTICATION REQUIRED is selected, a Personal Identification
Number (PIN), if required. To enter the PIN, touch the small box next to AUTHENTICATION
REQUIRED. The keyboard is displayed when you select USER NAME and JOB NAME. The PIN
is a four-digit number that can be typed on the numeric keypad.
5.
Type the User Name.
6.
Type the Job Name.
7.
Type the PIN, if required.
8.
Touch OK.
9.
Press Start.
See Printing stored jobs for information on printing a stored job.
138
Chapter 5
Copying
ENWW
6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
The MFP offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel, you can scan
black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an e-mail attachment. To
use digital sending, the MFP must be connected to a local area network (LAN). The MFP connects
directly to your LAN.
This chapter addresses both scanning and sending, because they are fully integrated functions. The
following topics are addressed in this chapter:
ENWW
●
What is SMTP?
●
What is LDAP?
●
e-mail configuration
●
e-mail screen navigation
●
e-mail basics
●
Using the address book
●
Additional e-mail features
139
What is SMTP?
Simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that
send and receive e-mail. In order for the MFP to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a
LAN that has a valid SMTP IP address. The SMTP server must also have Internet access.
If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address for your
SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL connection, contact the service provider to obtain
the SMTP server IP address.
140
Chapter 6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
What is LDAP?
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is used to gain access to a database of information. When
the MFP uses LDAP, it searches a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail
address, LDAP uses an auto-complete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the
characters you type. As you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes
smaller.
The MFP supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the MFP to
be able to send to e-mail.
ENWW
What is LDAP?
141
e-mail configuration
Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the MFP for e-mailing. The MFP has an
auto-configuration feature that attempts to find the correct IP addresses for the SMTP server and the
LDAP server. You can also configure the IP addresses manually.
NOTE The instructions that follow are for configuring the MFP at the control panel. You can
also perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server. For more information, see
Using the embedded Web server.
Automatic e-mail configuration
1.
On the MFP control panel, touch Menu.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then touch SENDING.
3.
Touch E-MAIL, and then touch FIND SEND GATEWAYS. The MFP searches the local network to
try to determine the IP address for the SMTP server and the LDAP server. If the process is not
successful, the IP addresses appear as all zeros on the control-panel display. If this happens,
configure the IP addresses manually.
Manual e-mail configuration
Consult your system administrator to find the IP address for the SMTP server and the LDAP server.
Then use this procedure to manually configure the IP addresses.
To configure the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch SENDING.
4.
Touch E-MAIL.
5.
Touch SMTP GATEWAY.
6.
Type the SMTP gateway address. The gateway address consists of up to 12 digits that are arrayed
as four groups of three digits (for instance, 123.123.123.123). Touch OK.
7.
Scroll to and touch LDAP GATEWAY.
8.
Type the LDAP gateway. After typing the SMTP and LDAP gateways, test the configuration by
using the TEST SEND GATEWAYS self-test, and then send an e-mail to yourself.
To use the Test Send Gateways self-test procedure
142
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch SENDING.
Chapter 6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
4.
Touch E-MAIL.
5.
Touch TEST SEND GATEWAYS. If the configuration is correct, GATEWAYS OK appears on the
control-panel display.
If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself by using the digital-send feature. If you receive
the e-mail, you have successfully configured the digital-sending feature.
If you do not receive the e-mail, use these actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending software:
●
Check the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses to make sure that you typed them correctly.
●
Print a configuration page. Verify that the LDAP and SMTP gateway addresses are correct.
●
Make sure that the network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from a computer. If
you receive the e-mail, the network is operating correctly. If you do not receive the e-mail, contact
your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP).
●
Run the DISCOVER.EXE file. This program attempts to find the gateways. You can download the
file from the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
To find gateways by using an e-mail program
Because most e-mail programs also use SMTP to send e-mail and LDAP to address e-mail messages,
you might be able to find the hostname of the SMTP gateway and LDAP server by looking at the settings
for your e-mail program. In many cases, the SMTP and LDAP servers are contained under one
hostname. After you have the hostname, you can find its IP address by using the following procedure.
1.
At your computer, open the Command Prompt (also known as the MS-DOS prompt).
2.
Type nslookup followed by a space and then the hostname.
3.
Press Enter.
When you have found the IP address of the SMTP and LDAP servers, use them to manually configure
digital sending. See Manual e-mail configuration.
ENWW
e-mail configuration
143
e-mail screen navigation
Use the touchscreen graphical display to navigate through the options on the e-mail screen.
1
Help button
2
From: field
3
To: field
4
CC: field
5
Subject: field
6
BCC: field
7
Clear All button
8
Scroll button
9
Start button
10
Back button
11
E-mail Settings area
12
Page preview image
Help button
For Help, touch the (Help) button, and then touch What is This? or Show Me How. For more
information, see Help system.
From: field
Touch From: to type your e-mail address. The administrator can set up the From: field to contain an email address that other users cannot change.
To:, CC:, and BCC: fields
Touch these buttons to set up e-mail recipients. To set up e-mail recipients, you can type e-mail
addresses by using the touchscreen or by using the address book. For more information, see Using the
address book.
144
Chapter 6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
Clear All button
Touching the Clear All button clears all text and fields that you have typed.
User-attention error messages appear in a pop-up dialog box that prohibits normal screen interaction
until the message is cleared.
ENWW
e-mail screen navigation
145
e-mail basics
The MFP e-mail feature offers the following benefits:
●
Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.
●
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that the
recipient can manipulate.
With e-mail, documents are scanned into the MFP memory and sent to an e-mail address or multiple
addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several graphics formats, such
as .TIF and .JPG, which allows recipients to manipulate the document file in various programs to meet
their specific needs. Documents arrive in near-original quality, and then can be printed, stored, or
forwarded.
In order to use the e-mail feature, the MFP needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network
that includes Internet access.
Loading documents
You can scan a document by using either the glass or the automatic document feeder (ADF). The glass
and ADF can accommodate Letter, Executive, A4, and A5 originals. The ADF can also accommodate
legal-size originals. Smaller originals, receipts, irregular and worn documents, stapled documents,
previously folded documents, and photographs should be scanned by using the glass. Multiple-page
documents can be scanned easily by using the ADF.
Sending documents
The MFP scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can use default settings or change the
scanning preferences and file formats. The following are the default settings:
●
Color
●
PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat® viewer to view the e-mail attachment)
To send documents
146
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.
2.
Touch E-MAIL.
3.
If prompted, type your user name and password.
4.
Complete the From:, To:, and Subject: fields. Complete the CC: and BCC: fields if appropriate.
Your user name or other default information might appear in the From: field. If so, you might not
be able to change it.
5.
(Optional) Touch E-mail Settings and then touch Describe Original to change the default settings
for the document that you are sending (for example, the document size). If you are sending a
double-sided document, you must describe the original as a two-sided document.
6.
(Optional) Touch E-mail Settings to change the default settings for the scanned document that you
are creating (for example, to change the type of file format).
7.
Press Start to begin sending.
Chapter 6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
8.
9.
The MFP prompts you to CONTINUE or to Reset.
●
CONTINUE: Retains all of the information that you just entered. You can easily send another
e-mail or fax that uses these settings.
●
Reset: Clears all the settings that you just entered. However, pressing Reset does not cancel
the e-mail or fax that you just sent.
When you are finished, remove the original document from the scanner glass or ADF.
Using the auto-complete function
When you type characters into the To:, CC:, or From: fields on the Send to e-mail screen, the autocomplete function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen,
the MFP automatically searches the address book list and completes the address or name by using the
first match. You can then select that name by touching Enter, or continue typing the name until autocomplete finds the correct entry. If you type a character that does not match any entry in the list, the
auto-complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an address that is not in
the address book.
ENWW
e-mail basics
147
Using the address book
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the MFP. See your
system administrator for information about configuring address lists.
NOTE You can also use the embedded Web server to create and manage the e-mail address
book. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server.
Creating a recipient list
On the touchscreen of the graphical display, complete the following steps:
1.
Touch E-MAIL.
2.
Touch To: to open the keyboard screen.
3.
Type the first letter of the recipient's name.
4.
Touch
5.
Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to scroll
quickly through the list.
6.
Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch Add >>.
(address book icon) to open the address book.
You can also select a distribution list by touching All, or add a recipient from a local list by touching
the Local button. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch Add >> to add the name to your
list of recipients.
You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then touching
Remove.
7.
The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you want, you
can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail address on the
keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK.
8.
Touch OK on the keyboard screen.
9.
Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send to e-mail screen, if necessary.
You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To: text line.
10. Press Start.
Using the local address book
Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address book can be
shared between MFPs that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending software.
You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From:, To:, CC:, or BCC: fields.
You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.
To open the address book, touch the address book button on the keyboard screen. When you touch
Local, the Edit button appears. Touch this button to add or delete items from the address book.
148
Chapter 6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
To add e-mail addresses to the local address book
1.
Touch Local.
2.
Touch Edit.
3.
Touch Address Book — Add >>.
4.
In the Address field, type the e-mail address for the new entry (required).
5.
In the Name field, type a name for the new entry (optional). The Name is the alias for the e-mail
address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be the e-mail address itself.
6.
Do one of the following:
●
To add the e-mail address to the local address book without closing the Add >> screen, touch
Save.
●
To return to the Edit screen without saving the e-mail address, touch Cancel.
●
To save the e-mail address and return to the Edit screen, touch OK.
After you add an address, the following confirmation message appears: Address Stored
Successfully. The e-mail address is added to the public address book. All users will have access
to this address.
To delete e-mail addresses from the local address book
You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.
NOTE To change an e-mail address, you must first delete the address and then add the
corrected address as a new address in the local address book.
1.
Touch Local.
2.
Touch Edit.
3.
Touch DELETE to see a list of e-mail addresses that you can delete from the local address book.
If no addresses are available to delete, the list appears blank.
4.
Touch the check box for each e-mail address that you want to delete, and then touch OK.
The following confirmation message appears: Do you want to delete the selected email
addresses?
ENWW
5.
Touch YES to delete the e-mail address(es) or touch NO to return to the DELETE screen.
6.
To return to the Edit screen, touch OK.
Using the address book
149
Additional e-mail features
If you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software (HP DSS), additional e-mail features become
available.
Secondary e-mail
If the system administrator has made the feature available, a SECONDARY EMAIL option might appear
on the control-panel display. Secondary e-mail is designed for solutions that require an extra measure
of data security. It differs from the regular e-mail feature in that the data between the device and the
HP DSS server is encrypted. An rfc822-compliant e-mail message, which has the scanned data as an
attachment, is created in the \HPEMAIL2 folder in the DSS program directory. The third-party software
program, which is monitoring this folder, processes the e-mail message and sends it out in a secure
format.
See the information that came with the HP DSS software for more information about configuring the
Secondary e-mail feature. The process for sending an e-mail message by using the Secondary e-mail
option is exactly the same as it is for normal e-mail.
Send to folder
If the system administrator has made the feature available, the MFP can scan a file and send it to a
folder on the network. Supported operating systems for folder destinations include Windows 98,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, and Novell.
NOTE Authentication might be required in order to use this option, or to send to certain folders.
See your system administrator for more information.
See the information that came with the HP DSS software for more information about using the Send to
Folder feature.
Send to workflow
If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality, you can scan a document and send
it to a custom workflow destination. A workflow destination gives you the ability to send additional
information, along with the scanned document, to a specified network or file transfer protocol (FTP)
location. Prompts for specific information appear on the control-panel display. A third-party software
program that monitors the network folder or FTP site can then retrieve and decipher the information,
and perform the specified operation on the scanned image. The system administrator can also designate
a MFP as a workflow destination, which allows you to scan a document and then send it directly to a
network MFP for printing.
See the information that came with the HP DSS software for more information about using the Send to
Workflow feature.
150
Chapter 6
Scanning and sending to e-mail
ENWW
7
Faxing
The HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet 4730xm
mfp models come with an Analog Fax Accessory already installed. Windows users can also install the
optional HP Digital Sending Software (DSS), which provides digital faxing services.
For complete instructions for configuring the fax accessory and for using the fax features, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. A printed copy of this guide is included with the
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp.
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
●
Analog faxing
●
Digital faxing
151
Analog faxing
When the analog fax accessory is installed, the MFP can function as a standalone fax machine.
The HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet
4730xm mfp models come with a fax accessory already installed. For the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
(base model), you can order this accessory as an option. See Part numbers for information about
ordering the analog fax accessory.
Installing the fax accessory
Use this procedure to install the analog fax accessory if it is not already installed.
1.
152
Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all the cables.
Chapter 7
Faxing
ENWW
ENWW
2.
Locate the formatter board in the back of the MFP.
3.
Locate the gray formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
4.
Gently squeeze the tabs and pull them out of the formatter.
Analog faxing
153
5.
Gently pull on the black tabs at the top and bottom of the formatter board to pull the board from the
MFP. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
6.
If you are replacing an existing fax accessory, pull up to remove it.
7.
Remove the fax accessory from its antistatic pouch.
CAUTION The fax accessory contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge
(ESD). When removing the fax accessory from its antistatic pouch and while installing it,
use static protection, such as a grounding wrist strap that is connected to the metal frame
of the MFP, or touch the metal frame of the MFP with your other hand.
154
Chapter 7
Faxing
ENWW
ENWW
8.
Push the fax accessory into place, and make sure that the fax accessory is securely connected to
the formatter.
9.
Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom, and slide the board back into the MFP.
Analog faxing
155
10. Reinsert the formatter pressure release tabs by squeezing them together and pushing them into
place.
11. Reconnect all the cables, and turn on the MFP.
Connecting the fax accessory to a phone line
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used for the fax
accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line should be an analog
line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems. If you are
not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line, contact your telecom provider.
NOTE HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that
the accessory functions correctly.
156
Chapter 7
Faxing
ENWW
Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.
1.
Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone
cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.
CAUTION Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port, which is located in
the center of the formatter. Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect port, which is
nearer the bottom of the formatter.
2.
Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector until
it clicks.
Configuring and using the fax features
Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus. For complete
information about configuring and using the fax accessory and for information about troubleshooting
problems with the fax accessory, see theHP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide provided
with the fax accessory.
ENWW
Analog faxing
157
Digital faxing
Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information
about ordering this software, go to http://www.hp.com/go/digitalsending.
With digital faxing, the MFP does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the MFP
can send a fax in one of three ways:
●
LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.
●
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that allows
the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.
●
Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a traditional
fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the
HP Digital Sending Software.
158
Chapter 7
Faxing
ENWW
8
Color
This chapter describes how the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series provides great color printing. This
chapter also describes ways to produce the best possible color prints. The following topics are covered:
ENWW
●
Using color
●
Color matching
●
Managing printer color options on Windows computers
●
Restricting color printing
●
Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers
159
Using color
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series offers great color printing as soon as you set up the MFP. It
provides a combination of automatic color features to generate excellent color results for the general
office user, plus sophisticated tools for the professional who is experienced with color use.
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series provides carefully designed and tested color tables to provide
a smooth, accurate color rendition of all printable colors.
HP ImageREt 3600
HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed exclusively by
HP to deliver superior print quality. The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart from the industry by
integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of the print system. Several
categories of HP ImageREt have been developed for a variety of user needs.
The system’s foundation is composed of key color laser technologies, including image enhancements,
smart supplies, and high-resolution imaging. As the level or category of ImageREt increases, these core
technologies are refined for more advanced system usage, and additional technologies are integrated.
HP offers superior image enhancements for general office documents and marketing collateral.
Optimized for printing on HP color laser high-gloss papers, HP Image REt 3600 provides superior results
on all supported media, and under a variety of environmental conditions.
Color lockout
The color lockout feature provides the system administrator with an effective method for limiting the
number of color copies printed by walk-up users. When this feature is enabled, the Color Copies button
is grayed-out, and the option to choose color copies is not available on the copy screen. When this
option is selected, all copies automatically print in black and white.
The feature is controlled by a password set by the system administrator. The administrator can enable
or disable the feature at the MFP control panel by setting a lock in the Color Copy option in the System
Setup menu. The color lockout feature can also be enabled or disabled through the embedded Web
server or WebJetadmin.
NOTE If the color copy lockout feature is enabled at the control panel, the change takes effect
immediately. If the feature is enabled or disabled through the embedded Web server or
WebJetadmin, it does not take effect until the administrator presses the Reset key or the MFP
enters sleep mode.
Enabling color copy lockout at the control panel
This procedure describes how to enable the color copy lockout feature and disable the Color Copies
button on the Copy screen.
160
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch COPY/SEND SETTINGS.
5.
Touch COLOR COPY OPTION.
6.
Touch ENABLE.
Chapter 8
Color
ENWW
Disabling color copy lockout at the control panel
This procedure describes how to disable the color copy lockout feature and restore the Color Copies
button on the Copy screen.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch COPY/SEND SETTINGS.
5.
Touch COLOR COPY OPTION.
6.
Touch DISABLE.
Paper selection
For the best color and image quality, it is important to select the appropriate media type from the MFP
menu or from the front panel. See Selecting print media.
Color options
Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents.
Color options use object tagging, which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different
objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page. The printer driver determines which objects are used on
a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object. Object
tagging, combined with optimized default settings, produces great color out of the box.
In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer
driver.
For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
sRGB
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a world-wide color standard originally developed by HP and
Microsoft as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and
output devices (MFPs, printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft
operating systems, the Web, and most office software sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical
Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television.
NOTE Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room’s lighting can affect the
appearance of colors on your screen. For more information, see Color matching.
The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop, CorelDRAW™, Microsoft Office, and many other applications
use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in Microsoft operating
systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between
applications and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly
improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors between the MFP, the computer
monitor and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to become a
color expert.
ENWW
Using color
161
Printing in four colors — CMYK
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK) are the inks used by a printing press. The process is often
called four-color printing. CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts (printing
and publishing) environments. The MFP will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver. The
MFP color-rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich, saturated colors for text and graphics.
CMYK ink set emulation (PostScript only)
The MFP color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard offset press ink sets. In
some situations, the CMYK color values in an image or document might not be suited to the MFP. For
example, a document might be optimized for another printer. For best results, the CMYK values should
be adapted to the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp. Select the appropriate color input profile from the printer
driver.
162
●
Default CMYK+. HP CMYK+ technology produces optimal printing results for most printing jobs.
●
Specification for Web Offset Publications (SWOP). Common ink standard in the United States
and other countries/regions.
●
Euroscale. Common ink standard in Europe and other countries/regions.
●
Dainippon Ink and Chemical (DIC). Common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.
●
Custom profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output,
for example, to emulate another HP color LaserJet printer. Color profiles can be downloaded from
http://www.hp.com.
Chapter 8
Color
ENWW
Color matching
The process of matching MFP output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers
and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by light pixels
using an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors using a CMYK (cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black) process.
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor. These factors
include:
●
Print media
●
Printer colorants (inks or toners for example)
●
Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology for example)
●
Overhead lighting
●
Personal differences in perception of color
●
Software applications
●
Printer drivers
●
Computer operating system
●
Monitors
●
Video cards and drivers
●
Operating environment (humidity for example)
Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.
For most users, the best method for matching colors on your screen to your MFP is to print sRGB colors.
PANTONE® color matching
PANTONE® has multiple color matching systems. PANTONE® Matching System is very popular and
uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp for details on how to use PANTONE® Matching System with this MFP.
NOTE PANTONE® Colors generated may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc.
trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2000.
Sample book color matching
The process for matching MFP output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is
complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create
the sample book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color
sample books.
Some sample books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of
these spot colors are outside of the range of the MFP. Most spot color sample books have companion
process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.
ENWW
Color matching
163
Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book. In
most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process sample
book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the MFP menu. If you cannot identify the process
standard, use SWOP ink emulation.
Printing color samples
To use the color samples, select the color sample that is the closest match to the desired color. Use the
sample’s color value in your application to describe the object you wish to match. Colors may vary
depending on paper type and the software application used. For more details on how to use the color
samples, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Use the following procedure to print color samples at the MFP using the control panel:
164
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Touch PRINT CMYK SAMPLES or PRINT RGB SAMPLES. The pages will print.
Chapter 8
Color
ENWW
Managing printer color options on Windows computers
Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common
printing requirements. However, for some documents, setting the color options manually can enhance
the way the document appears. Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain
many images or documents that are printed on a media type that is not listed in the printer driver.
For Windows, you can print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings found on the
Color tab in the printer driver.
For more information about how to access the printer drivers, see Gaining access to the printer drivers.
Print in grayscale
Select the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver to print a document in black and white.
RGB Color (Color Themes)
Five values are available for the RGB Color setting:
●
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB
color as sRGB, wihch is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization
(www).
●
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPEG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching
for rendering sRGB, bitmap images. This setting has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.
Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
●
Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRBG, and documents that are produced
with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses AdobeRGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software
program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
●
Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents
properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the program in which you are
working or in the operating system.
CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color
in the software program or in the operating system.
●
Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for
using special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input
profile to more accurately predict and control color output. You can download custom profiles from
www.hp.com.
Automatic or manual color adjustment
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge
enhancements that are used for each element in a document. For more information, see Printer
drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
NOTE
ENWW
Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing most color documents.
Managing printer color options on Windows computers
165
The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones,
and edge enhancements for text, graphics, and photographs. To access the Manual color options, from
the Color tab, select Manual, then Settings.
Manual color options
You can manually adjust color options for Edge Control, Halftones, and Neutral Grays.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has three components:
adaptive halftoning, REt, and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness. Trapping
reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The
color REt option smoothes the edges.
NOTE If you notice white gaps between objects, or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow
of cyan, magenta, or yellow at the edge, choose an edge-control setting that increases the
trapping level.
Four levels of edge control are available:
●
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are
on.
●
Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning and color
REt settings are on.
●
Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on.
●
Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings
for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.
●
The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth
area fills are top priority.
●
The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp
edges and details are top priority.
NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to bitmap images. In these cases, setting the
color options for Photographs also affects how text and graphics appear.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors that are used in text,
graphics, and photographs.
166
Chapter 8
Color
ENWW
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
●
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees
neutral colors without a color cast.
●
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest
black.
NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, setting the
color options for Photographs also affects how text and graphics appear.
ENWW
Managing printer color options on Windows computers
167
Restricting color printing
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp includes a RESTRICT COLOR USE setting for networked printers. A
network administrator can use the setting to restrict user access to the color printing features in order
to conserve color toner. If you are unable to print in color, see your network administrator.
For more information on restricting color printing, visit the Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/
coloraccess.
1.
Press Menu to enter the menus.
2.
Scroll to and touch PRINT QUALITY.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch RESTRICT COLOR USE.
5.
Scroll to and select one of the following options:
6.
●
DISABLE COLOR: This setting denies the printer color capabilities to all users.
●
ENABLE COLOR: This is the default setting, which allows all users to use the printer color
capabilities.
●
COLOR IF ALLOWED: This setting allows the network administrator to allow color use for
select users. Use the embedded Web server to designate users who can print in color.
Touch OK.
The network administrator can monitor color usage for a specific HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp by printing
a color usage job log.
168
Chapter 8
Color
ENWW
Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers
Setting the color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most
common printing requirements. However, for some documents, setting the color options manually can
enhance the way the document appears. Examples of these documents include marketing brochures
that contain many images or documents that are printed on a media type that is not listed in the printer
driver.
Print color as gray or change the color options by using the Color Options pop-up menu in the Print
dialog box.
For more information about how to gain access to the printer drivers, see Gaining access to the printer
drivers.
Print Color as Gray
Selecting the Print Color as Gray option from the printer driver prints a document in black and shades
of gray. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output, or for
printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.
Advanced color options for text, graphics, and photographs
Use manual color adjustment to adjust the Color (or Color Map) and Halftoning options for a print job.
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings
independently for text, graphics, and photographs. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.
●
The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option when uniform and smooth
area fills are the top priority.
●
The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option when sharp
edges and details are the top priority.
NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, the
Photographs settings also control text and graphics.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method that the printer uses to create gray colors in text,
graphics, and photographs.
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
ENWW
●
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This guarantees
neutral colors that do not have a color cast.
●
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest
black.
Managing printer color options on Macintosh computers
169
NOTE Some software programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, the
Photographs settings also control text and graphics.
RGB Color
Five values are available for the RGB Color setting:
●
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the printer to interpret RGB
color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization
(www).
●
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPEG files. This setting instructs the printer to use the best color matching
for rendering sRGB, bitmap images. This setting has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.
Using glossy media in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.
●
Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRGB, and documents that are produced
with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses AdobeRGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software
program and allow the printer software to manage the color space.
●
Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents
properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the program that you are using or
in the operating system.
CAUTION Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color
in the software program or in the operating system.
●
Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other printers or for
using special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the printer to use a custom input
profile to more accurately predict and control color output. You can download custom profiles from
http://www.hp.com.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has three components:
adaptive halftoning, Resolution Enhancement Technology (REt), and trapping. Adaptive halftoning
increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly
overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The color REt option smooths the edges.
NOTE If you notice white gaps between objects, or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow
of cyan, magenta, or yellow at the edge, choose an edge-control setting that increases the
trapping level.
Four levels of edge control are available:
170
●
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are
on.
●
Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning and color
REt settings are on.
●
Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on.
●
Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.
Chapter 8
Color
ENWW
9
Optional output devices
This chapter includes information about using and troubleshooting the following output and input
devices:
ENWW
●
Output accessory bridge
●
3-bin mailbox
●
Stapler/stacker accessory
●
Troubleshooting the output accessories
171
Output accessory bridge
The output accessory bridge is required if a 3-bin mailbox or a stapler/stacker is installed on the MFP.
The output accessory bridge is a pathway between the MFP and the output device. For more information
about installing the output accessory bridge, see the Installation Guide. For information about clearing
paper jams in the output accessory bridge, see Clearing jams.
1 Output accessory bridge
2 Stapler/stacker
3 3-bin mailbox
172
Chapter 9
Optional output devices
ENWW
3-bin mailbox
The optional 3-bin mailbox has one bin that stacks up to 500 sheets and two bins that stack up to
100 sheets each, for a total capacity of 700 sheets.
The 3-bin mailbox has three operating modes: mailbox mode, stacker mode, and function separator
mode. Each mode is explained in the sections that follow.
Mailbox mode
The bins can be assigned to a user or to a group of users. All print, copy, and fax jobs that an assigned
user or group of users sends are delivered to the designated bin. Each user can select the bin in the
printer driver or at the control panel.
When the designated bin is full, the MFP stops printing. Printing continues only when you empty the bin.
Stacker mode
The 3-bin mailbox can combine the bins to act as a stacker. It can stack up to 700 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) paper. Jobs are sent to the bottom bin first, then to the middle bin, and then to the top bin.
Print jobs that require more than 500 sheets fill the bottom bin and continue stacking into the middle
and top bins.
When all three bins are full, the MFP stops printing. Printing continues only when you remove paper
from the top bin. The MFP does not resume printing if you remove paper from the bottom bin or the
middle bin before you remove paper from the top bin.
NOTE Do not remove paper from the top bin and then attempt to put it in place again. This
causes the pages to stack in the incorrect order.
When the 3-bin mailbox is in stacker mode, you cannot designate that a job be sent to a particular bin.
Function-separator mode
You can configure the bins to receive jobs that come from a specific MFP function, such as printed jobs,
copy jobs, or faxes. For instance, you can specify that all copy jobs are sent to the top bin.
The MFP stops functioning when the designated bin is full. Printing, copying, or faxing can continue only
when you empty the bin.
Configuring the printer driver to recognize the 3-bin mailbox/stapler/
stacker
This section contains information about configuring the printer driver for the 3-bin mailbox and the
stapler/stacker.
Windows
ENWW
1.
Open the Printers folder.
2.
Select HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp.
3.
On the File menu, click on Properties.
3-bin mailbox
173
4.
Select the Device Settings tab.
5.
Use either of the following methods to select the stapler/stacker.
●
Scroll down to Automatic Configuration, select Update Now, and click Apply.
●
Scroll down to Accessory Output Bin, select HP 500 sheet stapler/stacker or HP 700 Sheet
3-bin Mailbox, and click Apply.
Macintosh
1.
Open the Printer Center utility.
2.
Select HP Color LaserJet 4730.
3.
On the File menu, click on Show Info (command, i).
4.
Select the Installable Options tab.
5.
Scroll to Accessory Output Bins and select HP 500 sheet stapler/stacker or HP 700 Sheet 3bin Mailbox.
6.
Click on Apply Changes.
To select the operating mode at the control panel
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch MBM-3 CONFIGURATION.
4.
Touch OPERATION MODE. Select the operation mode that you want to use.
5.
Touch OK.
To configure a destination bin at the control panel (Mailbox and Functionseparator modes)
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch PRINTING, COPYING, or FAX.
4.
Touch PAPER DESTINATION. Select the output bin that you want to use.
5.
Touch OK.
To select the operating mode in the printer driver (Windows 2000 and Windows
XP)
174
1.
Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers
and Faxes (for Windows XP).
2.
Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences.
3.
Click the Device Settings tab.
4.
Perform one of the following actions:
Chapter 9
Optional output devices
ENWW
For automatic configuration, under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic
Configuration list.
-orFor manual configuration, under Installable Options, select the appropriate operation mode in the
Accessory Output Bin list.
5.
Click OK to save the settings.
Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
1.
Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2.
Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties (for Windows 98 and Windows Me)
or Document Defaults (for Windows NT 4.0).
3.
Perform one of the following actions:
If you are using a Printer Control Language (PCL) printer driver: For automatic configuration, click
the Configure tab, and then click Update Now. For manual configuration, select the appropriate
operation mode in the Optional Paper Destinations list.
-orIf you are using a PostScript (PS) printer driver: Click the Device Options tab (for Windows 98 and
Windows Me) or the Device Settings tab (for Windows NT 4.0). Under Installable Options, select
the appropriate operation mode in the Accessory Output Bin list.
4.
Click OK to save the settings.
Mac OS X
ENWW
1.
In the Apple menu, click System Preferences.
2.
In the System Preferences box, click Print and Fax.
3.
Click Set Up Printers. A Printer List displays.
4.
Select the HP product, and then click Show Info on the Printers menu.
5.
Select the Installable Options panel.
6.
In the Accessory Output Bins list, select HP 3-Bin Mailbox.
7.
In the Mailbox Mode list, select the appropriate operational mode, and then click Apply Changes.
3-bin mailbox
175
Stapler/stacker accessory
The optional stapler/stacker can staple jobs of up to 30 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. The stapler can
staple these sizes: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive (JIS), and 8.5 x 13. It can stack up to 500 sheets of
paper.
●
Paper weight can range from 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb). Heavier paper, such as cardstock and
gloss, might have a stapling limit of 20 sheets.
NOTE The optional stapler/stacker accessory cannot staple tough paper.
●
If the job consists of only one sheet, or if it consists of more than 30 sheets, the MFP delivers the
job to the bin, but the MFP does not staple the job.
●
The stapler supports paper only. Do not try to staple other types of print media, such as envelopes,
transparencies, or labels.
When you want the MFP to staple a document, select stapling in the software. You can usually select
the stapler in your program or printer driver, although some options might be available only in the printer
driver. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or printer driver.
If you cannot select the stapler in the program or printer driver, select the stapler at the MFP control
panel.
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The printer driver
can be configured to disable the staple option if the staple cartridge is empty.
To configure the printer driver to recognize the optional stapler/
stacker
You need to configure the printer driver to recognize the optional stapler/stacker. You need to set this
setting only once. The procedure to configure the driver to recognize the accessory depends on the
operating system you are using.
Windows
1.
Open the Printers folder.
2.
Select HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp.
3.
On the File menu, click Properties.
4.
Select the Device Settings tab.
5.
Use either of the following methods to select the stapler/stacker:
Scroll to Automatic Configuration, select Update Now, and then click Apply.
-orScroll to Accessory Output Bin, select HP 500 sheet stapler/stacker or HP 700 sheet 3-bin
Mailbox, and click Apply.
176
Chapter 9
Optional output devices
ENWW
Macintosh
1.
Open the Printer Center utility.
2.
Select HP Color LaserJet 4730.
3.
On the File menu, click Show Info (command, i).
4.
Select the Installable Options tab.
5.
Scroll to Accessory Output Bins and select HP 500 sheet stapler/stacker or HP 700 sheet 3bin Mailbox.
6.
Click Apply Changes.
To select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch STAPLER/STACKER.
4.
Touch STAPLE.
5.
Touch the option that you want to use, either NONE or ONE.
NOTE Selecting the stapler at the MFP control panel changes the default setting to STAPLE.
It is possible that all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer
driver override settings that are changed at the control panel.
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Windows)
1.
Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and
Faxes (for Windows XP).
2.
Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printer Preferences.
3.
Click the Device Settings tab.
4.
On the Output tab, click the drop-down list under Staple, and click One-edge.
To select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Mac)
Select the stapler by creating a new preset in the printer driver.
ENWW
1.
Open a document and then click Print on the File menu.
2.
Select the appropriate stapling option.
3.
In the Presets pop-up menu, click Save As, and then type a name for the preset.
Stapler/stacker accessory
177
To set the stapler at the control panel for all copy jobs
NOTE The following procedure changes the default setting for all copy jobs.
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch COPYING.
4.
Touch STAPLE.
5.
Touch the option that you want to use, either NONE or CORNER.
To set the stapler at the control panel for a single copy job
NOTE The following procedure sets the stapling option for only the current copy job.
1.
Touch COPY.
2.
Touch COPY SETTINGS.
3.
Touch the STAPLE tab.
4.
Touch the option that you want to use, either NONE or ONE.
To configure the MFP to stop or continue when the staple cartridge
is empty
You can specify whether the MFP stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues
printing but does not staple the jobs.
178
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch STAPLER/STACKER.
4.
Touch STAPLES OUT.
5.
Touch the option that you want to use:
●
Select Stop to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.
●
Select CONTINUE to continue printing jobs without stapling them.
Chapter 9
Optional output devices
ENWW
Troubleshooting the output accessories
When the 3-bin mailbox or the stapler/stacker is installed correctly with the output accessory bridge, the
LED at the top of the accessory is lit green. If the LED is off, is blinking, or is lit amber, a problem exists.
See Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker. For information about
clearing jams, see Clearing jams.
ENWW
1
LED for the stapler/stacker
2
LED for the 3-bin mailbox
Troubleshooting the output accessories
179
180
Chapter 9
Optional output devices
ENWW
10 Security features
This section explains important security features that are available for the MFP:
ENWW
●
Securing the embedded Web server
●
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
●
Secure Disk Erase
●
Job-storage features
●
DSS authentication
●
Locking the control-panel menus
●
Locking the formatter cage
181
Securing the embedded Web server
Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change
the MFP settings.
To secure the embedded Web server
182
1.
Open the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server.
2.
Click the Settings tab.
3.
On the left side of the window, click Security.
4.
Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.
5.
Click Apply. Make note of the password, and store it in a safe place.
Chapter 10
Security features
ENWW
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
The Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) provides a portal on the MFP. By using the FIH and third-party
equipment, you can track information about copies that are made on the MFP.
Requirements
●
Windows 9X, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
●
Access to third-party accounting hardware solutions, such as Equitrac or Copitrak devices
Using the FIH
To use the FIH, you must download and install the FIH software. The software is available from
http://www.hp.com/go/clj4730mfp_software. The software is used to enable or disable the FIH portal.
Use the software to set and change the administrator personal identification number (PIN).
Administrators can use the PIN option to configure the FIH to prevent any unauthorized changes.
Changes can be made only with the correct PIN authentication.
NOTE It is important to remember the PIN that is assigned to the FIH administration software.
The PIN is required to make any changes to the FIH.
To enable the FIH portal
1.
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2.
Click OK.
3.
Click Enable.
4.
If you have not entered a PIN before, click No. If you have entered a PIN before, click Yes. If you
click No, type and confirm the PIN, and then click OK. If you click Yes, type the PIN and click OK.
NOTE The PIN must be numeric.
5.
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,
type the MFP port. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the MFP.
NOTE The IP address for the MFP can be found on the Configuration page. You can print
a Configuration page from the control panel by touching Menu, touching INFORMATION,
and then touching PRINT CONFIGURATION.
If you typed an incorrect IP address, you will receive an error message. Otherwise, the portal is enabled.
To disable the FIH portal
ENWW
1.
Double-click the FIH.EXE file. The Foreign Interface Harness dialog box appears.
2.
Click OK.
3.
Click Disable.
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
183
4.
Type the PIN and click OK.
5.
Click the appropriate button for the type of connection: Direct or Network. If Direct is selected,
type the MFP port and click OK. If Network is selected, type the IP address and port for the MFP,
and then click OK. The portal is disabled.
NOTE If you lose the PIN number and the portal needs to be disabled, try using the default PIN
that is listed to disable it. For assistance, use the HP Instant Support service, which is available
through the embedded Web server or at http://instantsupport.hp.com. See Using the
embedded Web server.
184
Chapter 10
Security features
ENWW
Secure Disk Erase
To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the MFP hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase
feature. This feature can securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive.
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:
●
Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed,
but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations.
This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.
●
Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical
character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure
Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk
media.
●
Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is
repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This
mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.
Data affected
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created
during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, and disk-based
macros (forms).
NOTE Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through
the RETRIEVE JOB menu on the MFP after the appropriate erase mode has been set. See
Retrieve job menu.
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that
is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is
stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the
flash-based system boot RAM.
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the
MFP cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.
Gaining access to Secure Disk Erase
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.
Additional Information
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, see the HP support flyer or go to
http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin/.
ENWW
Secure Disk Erase
185
Job-storage features
Several job-storage features are available for this MFP. These features include printing private jobs,
storing print jobs, quick-copying jobs, and proofing and holding jobs.
For more information about job-storage features, see Creating a stored copy job.
186
Chapter 10
Security features
ENWW
DSS authentication
Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the MFP is available for purchase separately. The software
provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This process requires
users to type a user identification and a password before they can use any of the DSS features that
require authentication.
See Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies for ordering information.
ENWW
DSS authentication
187
Locking the control-panel menus
To prevent someone from changing the MFP configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus. This
prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server. The
following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the HP Web
Jetadmin software. (See Using HP Web Jetadmin software.)
To lock the control-panel menus
188
1.
Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2.
Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate
to the DEVICE LISTS folder.
3.
Select the MFP.
4.
In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.
5.
Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.
6.
Type a Device Password.
7.
In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users
from gaining access to configuration settings.
Chapter 10
Security features
ENWW
Locking the formatter cage
To purchase a locking accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp formatter cage, please contact HP
at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
The following figure indicates where you should place the lock.
ENWW
Locking the formatter cage
189
190
Chapter 10
Security features
ENWW
11 Managing and maintaining the MFP
This chapter contains information about these topics:
ENWW
●
Using the embedded Web server
●
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software
●
Using HP Web Jetadmin software
●
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
●
Configuring and verifying an IP address
●
Setting the real-time clock
●
Configuring alerts
●
Checking the MFP configuration
●
Upgrading the firmware
●
Managing print cartridges
●
Replacing supplies
●
Performing preventive maintenance
●
Cleaning the MFP
●
Calibrating the scanner
191
Using the embedded Web server
Use the embedded Web server to view MFP and network status and to manage printing functions from
your computer instead of from the MFP control panel. The following are examples of what you can do
using the embedded Web server:
NOTE When the printer is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care
Software to view the printer status.
●
View MFP status information.
●
Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray.
●
Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.
●
View and change tray configurations.
●
View and change the MFP control-panel menu configuration.
●
View and print internal pages.
●
Receive notification of MFP and supplies events.
●
View and change network configuration.
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape
6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for
HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the MFP is connected to an IP-based
network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based MFP connections. You do not have
to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
When the MFP is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.
NOTE For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded
Web Server User Guide, which is on the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series software CD-ROM.
Opening the embedded Web server
1.
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the MFP. To find the IP
address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see
Configuration page.
NOTE After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in
the future.
192
2.
The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the MFP: the
Information tab, the Settings tab, the Digital Sending tab, and the Networking tab. Click the tab
that you want to view.
3.
See the following sections for more information about each tab.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Information tab
The Information pages group consists of the following pages.
●
Device Status. This page shows the MFP status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with
0% representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print media set
for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings.
●
Configuration page. This page shows the information that is found on the MFP configuration page.
●
Supplies Status. This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% representing that a
supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Order
Supplies in the Other Links area of the window. To visit any Web site, you must have Internet
access.
●
Event log. This page shows a list of all MFP events and errors.
●
Usage page. This page details the total usage of the MFP.
●
Device information. This page shows the MFP network name, address, and model information.
To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
●
Control panel. View the current status of the MFP control panel.
●
Print. Select a file on your network or on the Web, and send it to the MFP to be printed. The
document must be a print-ready document, such as a .PS, .PDF, .PCL, or .TXT file.
Settings tab
Use this tab to configure the MFP from your computer. The Settings tab can be password protected. If
this MFP is networked, always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this
tab.
The Settings tab contains the following pages.
ENWW
●
Configure Device. Configure all MFP settings from this page. This page contains the traditional
menus found on the control-panel display. These menus include Information, Paper Handling,
Configure Device, and Diagnostics.
●
e-mail Server. Use this page to set up the SMTP server that will be used to send MFP e-mail alerts
(set up on the Alerts page).
●
Alerts. Network only. Set up to receive e-mail alerts for various MFP and supplies events. These
alerts can be sent to a list of up to 20 e-mail, mobile device, or Web site destinations.
●
AutoSend. Use the AutoSend screen to send product-configuration and usage information
periodically to your service provider. This feature establishes a relationship with Hewlett-Packard
Company or another service provider to provide you with services that include support agreements
and usage tracking.
●
Security. Set a password that must be typed in order to gain access to the Settings, Digital
Sending, and Networking tabs. Turn on and off certain features of the EWS.
●
Edit Other Links. Add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is shown in the Other
Links area on all embedded Web server pages. These permanent links always appear in the Other
Links area: HP Instant Support, Order Supplies, and Product Support.
●
Device Information. Name the MFP and assign an asset number to it. Type the name of the
primary contact who will receive information about the MFP.
Using the embedded Web server
193
●
Language. Determine the language in which to show the embedded Web server information.
●
Date & Time. Use this page to set the correct date and time for the device. Once the time is set,
the device's real-time clock maintains the accurate time.
●
Wake Time page. Wake Time can be set to wake the MFP at a certain time on a daily basis. Only
one wake time can be set per day; however, each day can have a different wake time. You can
also set the time delay for Sleep Mode on this page.
Digital Sending tab
Use the pages on the Digital Sending tab to configure the digital-sending features.
NOTE If the MFP is configured to use the optional HP Digital Sending Software, the options on
these tabs are not available. Instead, all digital-sending configuration is performed by using the
HP Digital Sending Software.
●
General page. Set up contact information for the system administrator.
●
Send to e-mail page. Configure the e-mail settings for digital sending. You can specify the SMTP
server, the default "From" address, and the default subject. You can also set the maximum file size
that is allowed for attachments.
●
Addressing page. Configure the LDAP server settings for digital sending. The LDAP server can
be used to retrieve e-mail addresses for digital sending. Select the check box at the top of this page
to enable this feature. Click Find Server to find the LDAP server on your network, then click
Test near the bottom of the page to test access to the server. Contact your network administrator
for more information about using the LDAP server.
●
Address Book page. Use this page to import e-mail addresses, in the form of a Comma-Separated
Value (CSV) file into the MFP internal address book. This process is necessary only if you are not
using an LDAP server to find e-mail addresses.
●
Activity Log page. View the digital-sending activity log for the MFP. The log contains digitalsending job information, including any errors that occur.
●
Preferences page. Configure digital-sending defaults such as the default page-size and the default
settings-reset delay. You can also configure these settings by using the MFP control-panel menus.
Networking tab
The network administrator can use this tab to control network-related settings for the MFP when it is
connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the MFP is directly connected to a
computer, or if the MFP is connected to a network with anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server.
Other links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. You must have Internet access in order to
use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the
194
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might
require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
ENWW
●
HP Instant Support. Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service
analyzes your MFP error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support
information specific to your MFP.
●
Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to an ordering Web site and order genuine HP supplies,
such as print cartridges and media.
●
Product Support. Connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series. Then,
you can search for help regarding general topics.
Using the embedded Web server
195
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is an application that you can use for the following tasks:
●
Check the printer status.
●
Check supplies status.
●
Set up alerts.
●
Gain access to troubleshooting and maintenance tools.
You can use the HP Easy Printer Care Software when the printer is directly connected to your computer
or when it is connected to a network. You must perform a complete software installation to use the HP
Easy Printer Care Software.
NOTE You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Easy Printer Care
Software. However, if you click a Web-based link, you must have Internet access to go to the site
associated with the link.
For more information on HP Easy Printer Care Software, visit http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare.
Supported operating systems
The HP Easy Printer Care Software is supported for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
To use the HP Easy Printer Care Software
Use one of the following methods to open HP Easy Printer Care Software:
●
In the Windows system tray/taskbar (in the lower right-hand corner of the desktop), select HP Easy
Printer Care Software.
●
Double-click the HP Easy Printer Care Software icon.
●
Double-click the desktop icon.
HP Easy Printer Care Software sections
The HP Easy Printer Care Software contains the sections described in the table below.
196
Section
Description
Overview tab
●
Devices list: Shows the printers that you can select.
Contains basic status
information for the
printer.
●
Device Status section: Shows printer status information. This section will indicate printer alert
conditions, such as an empty print cartridge. It also shows device-identification information,
control-panel messages, and print-cartridge levels. After you correct a problem with the printer,
(Refresh) button to update the section.
click the
●
Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the percentage of toner
remaining in the print cartridges and the status of the media that is loaded in each tray.
●
Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about
printer supplies, ordering information, and recycling information.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Section
Description
Support tab
●
Provides device information, including alerts for items needing attention.
Provides help information
and links.
●
Provides links to troubleshooting information and tools.
●
Provides links to the HP Web site for registration, support, and for ordering supplies.
NOTE If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect to the Internet when you
first opened the HP Easy Printer Care Software, you must connect before you can
visit these Web sites.
Supplies Ordering
window
●
Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each printer. If you want to order a
certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list.
Provides access to online
or e-mail supplies
ordering.
●
Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP supplies Web site in a new browser window.
If you have checked the Order check box for any items, the information about those items can
be transferred to the Web site.
●
Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check
box selected.
●
Email Shopping List button: Creates a text list of items that have the Order check box
selected. The list can be copied into an e-mail message that you send to your supplier.
Alert Settings window
●
Alerts on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature for a certain printer.
Allows you to configure
the printer to
automatically notify you
of printer issues.
●
When alerts appear: Sets when you want alerts to appear—either when you are printing to
that particular printer, or anytime there is a printer event.
●
Alert event type: Sets whether you want alerts for only critical errors, or for any error, including
continuable errors.
●
Notification type: Sets what type of alert should appear (pop-up message or system tray alert,
and e-mail message).
Device List tab
●
Printer information, including printer name, make, and model
Shows information about
each printer in the
Devices list.
●
An icon (if the View as drop-down box is set to Tiles, which is the default setting)
●
Any current alerts for the printer
If you click a printer in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care Software opens the Overview tab for that
printer.
Device List tab information includes the following:
Find Other Printers
window
Clicking the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list opens the Find Other Printers window.
The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you
can add them to the Devices list and then monitor those printers from your computer.
Allows you to add more
printers to your printer
list.
ENWW
Using the HP Easy Printer Care Software
197
Using HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP printers. Management is proactive,
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve printer issues before users are affected. Download
this free, enhanced-management software at http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically
connect to the HP Web site.
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
NOTE Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple Macintosh computer is not
supported.
198
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
Use the HP Printer Utility to configure and maintain a printer from a Mac OS X v10.2 or v10.3 computer.
This section describes several functions that you can perform through the HP Printer Utility.
Opening the HP Printer Utility
The process that you use to start the HP Printer Utility depends on the Macintosh operating system that
you are using.
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X v10.2
1.
Open the Finder, and then click Applications.
2.
Click Library, and then click Printers.
3.
Click hp, and then click Utilities.
4.
Double-click HP Printer Selector to open the HP Printer Selector.
5.
Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
To open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X 10.3
1.
In the Dock, click the Printer Setup Utility icon.
NOTE If the Printer Setup Utility icon does not appear in the Dock, open the Finder, click
Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.
2.
Select the printer that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
Printing a cleaning page
Print a cleaning page if the printer is not printing jobs at the expected quality level.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Color Cleaning.
3.
Click Print Cleaning Page to print the cleaning page.
Printing a configuration page
Print a configuration page to view the printer settings. For more information about the configuration page,
see Configuration page.
ENWW
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Configuration Page.
3.
Click Print Configuration Page to print the configuration page.
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
199
Viewing supplies status
View the status of the printer supplies (such as print cartridges, imaging drum, or print media) from a
computer.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Supplies Status.
3.
Click the Supplies tab to view the status of various replaceable supplies, and click the Media tab
to view the status of print media.
●
To view a more detailed status list, click Detailed Supplies Information. The Supplies
Information dialog box appears.
●
To order supplies online, click Order HP Supplies. You must have Internet access in order
to use the online ordering Web page. For more information about online ordering, see Ordering
supplies online and using other support features.
Ordering supplies online and using other support features
Use the HP Web site to order printer supplies, register the printer, get customer support, or learn about
recycling printer supplies. You must have Internet access in order to use the supplies and support Web
pages.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select HP Support.
3.
Click one of the following buttons:
●
Instant Support: Opens a Web page that you can use to seek technical assistance.
●
Order Supplies Online: Opens a Web page that you can use to order printer supplies.
●
Online Registration: Opens a Web page that you can use to register the printer.
●
Return & Recycle: Opens a Web page that you can use to find information about recycling
used supplies.
Uploading a file to the printer
Send a file from the computer to the printer. The action that the printer takes depends on the type of file
that is being sent to it. For example, when a print-ready file (such as a .PS or .PCL file) is sent, the printer
prints the file.
200
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select File Upload.
3.
Click Choose, navigate to the file that you want to upload, and then click OK.
4.
Click Upload to load the file.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Uploading fonts to the printer
Add fonts from the computer to the printer.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Upload Fonts.
3.
In the Fonts in printer's pop-up menu, select where you want the fonts to be stored on the printer.
The fonts in that storage device appear in the list that appears below the pop-up menu.
4.
Click Add and navigate to the font file that you want to upload to the printer.
5.
Click Upload to upload the font to the printer.
NOTE To remove a font from the printer, open the HP Printer Utility, select Upload Fonts,
select the correct storage device in the pop-up menu, select the font that you want to delete, and
then click Remove.
Updating the firmware
Update the printer firmware by loading the new firmware file from the computer. You can find new
firmware files for your printer at www.hp.com.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Firmware Update.
3.
Click Choose, navigate to the firmware file that you want to upload, and then click OK.
4.
Click Upload to load the firmware file.
Activating the two-sided printing (duplexing) mode
Turn on the two-sided printing feature on printers equipped with automatic duplexers.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Duplex Mode.
3.
Select Enable Duplex Mode to activate the two-sided printing mode, and then click Apply Now.
Activating the Economode printing mode
Use the Economode setting to conserve printer supplies.
ENWW
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Economode Toner Density.
3.
Select Turn Economode on, and then click Apply Now.
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
201
Changing the toner density
Conserve print-cartridge toner by changing the toner-density level. The lower toner-density levels
conserve the most toner.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Economode Toner Density.
3.
On the Toner Density popup menu, select the toner density level, and then click Apply Now.
Changing the resolution settings
Change the resolution settings from the computer. You also can change the Resolution Enhancement
Technology (REt) setting.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Resolution.
3.
On the Resolution pop-up menu, select the resolution level, and then click Apply Now.
NOTE To change the REt setting, repeat step 3 in the REt Level pop-up menu.
Locking or unlocking printer storage devices
Manage access to printer storage devices from the computer.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Lock Resources.
3.
On the Control Panel Access Level pop-up menu, select the access level that you want to set
for the printer control panel.
4.
Select the devices that you want to lock, and clear any devices that you want to unlock.
5.
Click Apply Now.
Saving or printing stored jobs
Turn on the printer job-storing function, or print a stored job from the computer. You also can delete a
stored print job.
202
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Stored Jobs.
3.
Perform any of the following tasks:
●
To turn on the job-storing function, select Enable Job Storing, and then click Apply Now.
●
To print a stored job, select a stored job in the list, type the necessary personal identification
number (PIN) in the Enter Secure Job PIN box, type the number of copies that you want in
the Copies to Print box, and then click Print.
●
To delete a stored job, select a stored job in the list, and then click Delete.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Configuring trays
Change the default printer tray settings from the computer.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Trays Configuration.
3.
In the Trays list, select the tray to be configured.
NOTE To make the selected tray the default tray for printing, click Make Default.
4.
In the Default Media Size pop-up menu, select the default media size for the tray.
5.
In the Default Media Type pop-up menu, select the default media type for the tray.
6.
Click Apply Now.
Changing network settings
Change the network internet protocol (IP) settings from the computer. You also can open the embedded
Web server to change additional settings. For more information, see Using the
embedded Web server.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select IP Settings.
3.
Change any of the settings in the following pop-up menus or fields:
●
Configuration
●
Host Name
●
IP Address
●
Subnet Mask
●
Default Gateway
If you want to change more settings in the embedded Web server, click Additonal Network
Settings. The embedded Web server opens with the Networking tab selected.
4.
Click Apply Now.
Opening the embedded Web server
Open the embedded Web server through the HP Printer Utility. For more information, see Using the
embedded Web server.
ENWW
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select Additional Settings.
3.
Click Open Embedded Web Server.
Using the HP Printer Utility for Macintosh
203
Setting up e-mail alerts
Set up e-mail messages that alert you to certain events that occur with the printer, such as a low toner
level in a print cartridge.
1.
Open the HP Printer Utility.
2.
In the Configuration Settings list, select E-mail Alerts.
3.
Click the Server tab, and, in the SMTP server box, type the server name.
4.
Click the Destinations tab, click the add (+) button, and then type the e-mail addresses, mobile
device numbers, or Web site URLs to which you want the e-mail alerts sent.
NOTE If your printer supports e-mail lists, you can make alerts lists for specific events the
same way that you added e-mail addresses.
204
5.
Click the Events tab, and, in the list, define the events for which an e-mail alert should be sent.
6.
To test the alerts setup, click the Server tab, and then click Test. A sample message is sent to the
defined e-mail addresses if the configuration is correct.
7.
Click Apply Now.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Configuring and verifying an IP address
You can use the following browser-based options to assign and configure TCP/IP addresses on an
HP Jetdirect print server:
●
HP Web Jetadmin
●
Embedded Web server
●
Control panel
TCP/IP assignment
The system administrator or primary user is responsible for determining the TCP/IP address for a specific
print server. If you are unsure what the TCP/IP address should be or if you are unfamiliar with using
TCP/IP on a network, go to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/. Click Search in the upper-left corner
of the Web page and search for TCP/IP Overview.
Automatic discovery
The product is equipped with an HP Jetdirect embedded print server. If a BootP or DHCP server is
available during product installation, the print server is automatically assigned an IP address for use on
the network. The print server defaults to 192.0.0.192 (Legacy default) or to 169.254.x.x (Auto IP) if the
print server cannot obtain an IP address over the network from a BootP or DHCP server. The default
that is assigned depends on the particular network (small/private or enterprise) by using sensing
algorithms.
To determine the new IP address, print a configuration page and check the TCP/IP status and address.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
When the product is turned on, the HP Jetdirect print server broadcasts DHCP requests. DHCP
automatically downloads an IP address from a network server. DHCP servers maintain a fixed set of IP
addresses and only loan an IP address to the print server. Consult your operating system documentation
to set up DHCP service on your network.
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
Print a configuration page at the control panel. Check the TCP/IP status and the TCP/IP addresses. If
the information is incorrect, check your hardware connections (cables, hubs, routers, or switches) or
recheck the validity of the TCP/IP address.
Changing an IP address
Use the following procedures if you need to change the product TCP/IP address.
To change an IP address by using HP Web Jetadmin
Open HP Web Jetadmin. Type the TCP/IP address in the Quick Device Search field and click Go. At
the top menu bar, follow this procedure for discovery options.
ENWW
1.
In the drop-down menu, click Devices.
2.
In the drop-down menu, click New Devices. Click Go.
Configuring and verifying an IP address
205
3.
Click the column header of your choice (such as IP Address or Device Model) to arrange the list
of available devices in ascending or descending order.
4.
Highlight the product to configure, and click Open Device.
5.
From the sub-menu at the top of the HP Web Jetadmin screen, click Configuration.
6.
Click the network link located on the left side of the configuration screen.
7.
Type the new IP information. You might need to scroll down for more options.
8.
Click Apply to save the settings.
9.
Click the Refresh button located next to the question mark on the right side of the screen.
10. Verify the IP information by clicking Status Diagnostics or by printing a configuration page.
To change an IP address by using the embedded Web server
The MFP has an embedded Web server that can be used to modify the TCP/IP parameters. To use the
embedded Web server, the HP Jetdirect print server must have an IP address already configured. On
a network, this is done automatically during initial product installation.
1.
In a supported Web browser, type the current IP address of the HP Jetdirect print server as the
URL. The Device Status page of the embedded Web server appears.
2.
Click Networking. From this page, you can modify the MFP network configuration.
To change an IP address using the control panel
For more information about using the control panel to change an IP address, see Configuring the printer
driver to recognize the 3-bin mailbox/stapler/stacker.
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch I/O.
4.
Scroll to and touch EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU.
5.
Scroll to and touch TCP/IP.
6.
Scroll to and touch CONFIG METHOD.
7.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL.
8.
Scroll to and touch MANUAL SETTINGS.
9.
Scroll to and touch IP ADDRESS.
10. Touch the left and right arrows to select each byte of the IP address.
11. Use the numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte.
12. Touch OK to save the IP address.
13. Scroll to and touch SUBNET MASK.
14. Touch the left and right arrows to select each byte of the subnet mask.
206
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
15. Use the numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte of the subnet mask.
16. Touch OK to save the subnet mask.
17. Scroll to and touch DEFAULT GATEWAY.
18. Touch the left and right arrows to select each byte of the default gateway.
19. Use the numeric keypad to enter the value of each byte of the default gateway.
20. Touch OK to save the default gateway.
ENWW
Configuring and verifying an IP address
207
Setting the real-time clock
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is
attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored
print jobs. You can also set the MFP to automatically warm up and prepare for use at a set time each
day.
Setting the date and time
When setting the date and time you can set the date format, date, time format, and time.
To set the date format
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch Date/Time.
5.
Touch DATE FORMAT.
6.
Touch the desired format. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time
submenu.
7.
Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
To set the date
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch Date/Time.
5.
Touch DATE.
6.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct month, date of the month, and the year.
NOTE The order of modifying the month, date of the month, and year depends upon the
date format setting.
7.
The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time submenu.
8.
Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
To set the time format
208
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch Date/Time.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
5.
Touch TIME FORMAT.
6.
Touch the appropriate format. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/
Time submenu.
7.
Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
To set the time
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch Date/Time.
5.
Touch TIME.
6.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
NOTE The order of modifying the hour, minute, and AM/PM setting depends upon the time
format setting.
7.
The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time submenu.
8.
Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
Setting the wake time
Use the wake time feature to wake the MFP at a set time each day. If a wake time is set, use an extended
sleep delay period. See Setting the sleep delay.
To set the wake time
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Scroll to and touch WAKE TIME.
5.
Touch the day of the week for which you want to set the wake time.
6.
Touch CUSTOM.
7.
Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.
8.
If you want to wake the MFP at the same time each day, on the APPLY TO ALL DAYS screen,
touch YES.
9.
If you want to set the time for individual days, touch NO, and repeat the procedure for each day.
10. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the WAKE TIME submenu.
11. Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
ENWW
Setting the real-time clock
209
Setting the sleep delay
Use the sleep-delay feature to set the period of time that the MFP must be idle before it enters the sleep
mode.
NOTE If the sleep-delay feature is turned off in the Reset menu, the MFP never enters the sleep
mode. Selecting a sleep delay value automatically turns the sleep feature on. The default value
for the sleep delay setting is 45 minutes.
To set the sleep delay
210
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Scroll to and touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Scroll to and touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch SLEEP DELAY.
5.
Scroll to and touch the sleep-delay setting that you want.
6.
The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the SYSTEM SETUP submenu.
7.
Touch EXIT to exit the menu.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Configuring alerts
You can use HP Web Jetadmin or the MFP’s embedded Web server to configure the system to alert
you of problems with the MFP. The alerts take the form of e-mail messages to the e-mail account or
accounts that you specify.
You can configure the following:
●
The printer(s) you want to monitor
●
What alerts are to be received (for example, alerts for paper jams, paper out, supplies status, and
cover open)
●
The e-mail account to which the alerts should be forwarded
Software
Information location
HP Web Jetadmin
See HP Web Jetadmin for general information about HP Web
Jetadmin.
See the HP Web Jetadmin Help system for details on alerts
and how to set them up.
Embedded Web server
See Using HP Web Jetadmin software for general information
about the embedded Web server.
See the embedded Web server Help system for details on
alerts and how to set them up.
ENWW
Configuring alerts
211
Checking the MFP configuration
From the control panel, you can print pages that give details about the MFP and its current configuration.
The following information pages are described here:
●
Menu map
●
Configuration page
●
HP Jetdirect page
●
Supplies status page
●
Usage page
●
PCL or PS font list
Use the following procedure to print these information pages. Then, see the following sections for more
information about each page.
To print an information page
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Scroll to the information page that you want, and touch the appropriate page. The page
automatically prints.
Menu map
To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available in the control panel, print a controlpanel menu map.
Many of these values can be overridden from the driver or program. Store the menu map near the MFP
for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options that are currently installed in the MFP.
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see Using the control panel.
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current MFP settings, to help troubleshoot MFP problems, or to verify
installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs) or printer languages.
NOTE If an optional 3-bin mailbox or stapler/stacker is installed, a page also prints for that
device.
NOTE If an analog fax accessory is installed, a fax accessory page also prints. see
theHP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide supplied with the fax accessory for
information about understanding the fax accessory page.
The MFP configuration page contains the following information:
212
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
1
Device Information lists the serial number, page counts, firmware datecodes, maintenance-kit counts, calibration
information, color density, and other information for the MFP.
2
Installed Personalities and Options lists all MFP languages that are installed (such as PCL and PS), and lists options
that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot.
3
Calibration Information lists the last CPR and last DMax/DHalf calibrations.
4
Color Density shows current settings for highlights, midtones, and shadows.
5
Memory lists the MFP memory information, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O buffering and Resource Saving
information.
6
Event Log lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable, and the last three entries.
The second page of the event log is the manufacturer page. This page contains information that might assist HP Customer
Care representatives in solving possible MFP problems.
7
Security lists the status of the control-panel lock, control-panel password, and disk drive.
8
Paper Trays and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists paper-handling accessories that are installed.
NOTE The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options that are currently
installed in the MFP.
HP Jetdirect page
The second configuration page is the HP Jetdirect page, which contains the following information:
ENWW
Checking the MFP configuration
213
1
HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the MFP status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port
configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.
2
Security Settings information
3
Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors
received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.
5
TCP/IP information, including the IP address
6
IPX/SPX information
7
Novell/NetWare information
8
AppleTalk information
9
DLC/LLC information
Always make sure the status line indicates "I/O Card Ready".
Supplies status page
Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the print cartridge that is installed in the MFP,
the amount of toner that remains in the print cartridge, and the number of pages and jobs that have been
processed. The page also lets you know when you should schedule the next preventive maintenance
for each maintenance kit.
NOTE The MFP has three separate maintenance kits: one for the fuser, one for the transfer
unit, and one for the ADF (automatic document feeder). For more information, see Supplies and
accessories.
The supplies status page contains the following information:
214
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
1
Black Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining,
total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used.
2
Cyan Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining,
total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used.
3
Magenta Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages
remaining, total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used.
4
Yellow Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining,
total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used.
5
Image Transfer Kit indicates the part number and status.
6
Image Fuser Kit indicates the part number and status.
7
Ordering Information provides information on ordering new HP MFP supplies.
8
Return & Recycling provides information on recycling HP MFP supplies.
Usage page
The usage page provides information about the page sizes and number of pages printed, copied, and
sent.
The usage page contains the following information:
ENWW
Checking the MFP configuration
215
1
Usage Totals: Printed (Print, Copy & Fax) indicates types of pages that have been printed; the number of single-sided
pages that have been printed; the number of duplexed pages that have been printed (if a duplexer is installed); the total
number of copies made; and the total number of fax pages printed.
2
Usage Totals: Scanned (Copy, Send & Fax) indicates types of pages that have been scanned; the number of singlesided and duplexed pages that have been scanned; copy and send job counts; and pages scanned by scanner mode.
3
Print Modes and Paper Path Usage shows the number of pages that have been printed with each fuser mode and the
number of pages that have been printed from each input tray and to each output bin.
4
Historical Device Coverage indicates the average percentage of toner used on all pages that have been printed.
PCL or PS font list
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the MFP. (The font lists also show which
fonts are resident on a hard disk or flash DIMM.)
The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed, and gives a sample of those fonts. The following describes
the information that can be found on the PCL font list:
●
Font gives the font names and samples.
●
Pitch/Point indicates the pitch and point size of the font.
●
Escape Sequence (a PCL 5e programming command) is used to select the designated font. (See
the legend at the bottom of the font list page.)
●
Font # is the number used to select fonts from the control panel (not the software application). Do
not confuse the font # with the font ID (see the following information). The number indicates the
DIMM slot where the font is stored.
●
216
●
Soft: Downloaded fonts that stay resident in the MFP until other fonts are downloaded to
replace them or until the MFP is turned off.
●
Internal: Fonts that permanently reside in the MFP.
Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you download them through software.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Upgrading the firmware
The MFP has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to upgrade
the MFP firmware. The overall process involves the following steps:
1.
Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the MFP.
2.
Go to the HP Web site and find out whether a firmware update is available. If an update is available,
download the latest firmware to your computer.
3.
Transfer the new firmware from your computer to the MFP.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration information on the MFP control panel.
To view the configuration information, follow these instructions.
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Touch PRINT CONFIGURATION PAGE?
4.
The firmware datecode is listed in the section called Device Information. The firmware datecode
has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date, where YYYY
represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example, a
firmware datecode of that begins with 20040225 represents February 25, 2004.
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the MFP, go to http://www.hp.com/go/
clj4730mfp_software. This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version.
Transferring the new firmware to the MFP
Use one of the following methods to update the firmware.
Using FTP to upload the firmware through a browser
Follow these steps to update the MFP firmware by using FTP through a browser.
To use a browser for firmware update
NOTE
ENWW
These instructions can be used for both Windows and Macintosh operating systems.
1.
Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page.
2.
Open a browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<ADDRESS>, where <ADDRESS> is the address
of the MFP. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp://192.168.0.90.
4.
Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the MFP.
5.
Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Upgrading the firmware
217
NOTE The MFP turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update
process is complete, a Ready message displays on the MFP control panel.
Using FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection
NOTE The MFP can receive an .RFU file update as long as it is in a "ready" state.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the
MFP to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host
computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the
firmware is downloaded (while Receiving upgrade appears on the control-panel display), the firmware
file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while the Performing upgrade
message appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message Resend
upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send the upgrade
by using the parallel port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are completed
before the update is processed.
Follow these instructions to perform the upgrade by using FTP.
NOTE The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to
default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the
defaults.
To upgrade the firmware on a network connection by using FTP
1.
Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page
that prints when you print the configuration page.
NOTE Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the MFP is not in Sleep mode. Also
make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2.
Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer.
3.
Type: ftp TCP/IP ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp
192.168.0.90.
4.
Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored.
5.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
6.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
7.
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
8.
Type bin at the command prompt.
9.
Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in
the command window.
10. Type put and then the file name (for example, if the file name is 4730mfp.efn, type 4730mfp.efn).
11. 200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
218
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
-or226 Ready
-or226 Processing Job
-or226 Transfer complete
12. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the MFP. This can take
approximately five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the MFP or
computer.
NOTE The MFP automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
13. At the command prompt, type: bye to exit the ftp command.
14. At the command prompt, type: exit to return to the Windows interface.
Using HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your computer. See
Using HP Web Jetadmin software. Complete the following steps to update a single device through
HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
3.
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the MFP in the list of devices, and
then click to select it.
If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series MFPs, select
all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each MFP.
ENWW
4.
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update
Printer Firmware from the action list.
5.
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the
Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
6.
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After the
upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.
7.
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
8.
Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the MFP. The control
panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of the upgrade
process, the control panel shows the Ready message.
Upgrading the firmware
219
Using MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware
To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions.
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: copy /B FILENAME> \
\COMPUTERNAME>\SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the
path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the MFP is being shared, and
<SHARENAME> is the MFP share name. For example: C:\>copy /b C:\9200fW.RFU \
\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
NOTE If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS
\3500FW.RFU" \\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of
the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready
message . The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Using the HP Jetdirect firmware
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the MFP has firmware that can be upgraded separately from the
MFP firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your
computer. See Using HP Web Jetadmin software. Complete the following steps to update the
HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin.
1.
Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.
2.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
3.
Select the device that you want to update.
4.
In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update.
5.
Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version
are listed. Make a note of these.
6.
Go to http://www.hp.com/go/wja_firmware.
7.
Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote down.
8.
Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote
down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the <drive>:\PROGRAM FILES
\HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer
that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.
9.
In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main device list and select the digital sender again.
10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again.
11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect Firmware
Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect
firmware.
220
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Managing print cartridges
Be sure to use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results. This section provides information
on proper use and storage of HP print cartridges. It also provides information about using non-HP print
cartridges.
HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following supplies information:
●
Percentage of supplies remaining
●
Estimated number of pages remaining
●
Number of pages printed
NOTE
See Supplies and accessories for cartridge ordering information.
Non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not genuine HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control
their quality. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be covered
under the MFP warranty.
When you use a non-HP print cartridge, certain features, such as remaining toner volume data may not
be available as a result of using this non-HP supply.
If the non-HP print cartridge was sold to you as a genuine HP product, see HP fraud hotline.
Print cartridge authentication
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series automatically authenticates the print cartridges when the
cartridges are inserted into the MFP. During authentication, the MFP will let you know if a cartridge is a
genuine HP print cartridge.
If the MFP control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe
you purchased an HP print cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline.
To override a non-HP print cartridge error message, touch OK.
HP fraud hotline
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) when you install an HP print
cartridge and the MFP message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the product is
genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:
ENWW
●
A high number of problems with the print cartridge.
●
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from HP
packaging).
Managing print cartridges
221
Print cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a
few minutes.
Table 11-1 Print cartridge temperature specifications
Environmental condition
Recommended
Allowed
Storage/standby
Temperature (print cartridge)
17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)
15° to 30°C (59° to 78°F)
-20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Print cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on usage patterns and the amount of toner that print jobs require.
HP print cartridges last an average of 12,000 pages when printing on letter or A4-size paper at 5%
coverage for each print cartridge. Usage conditions and print patterns may cause actual results to vary.
At any time, you can verify the life expectancy by checking the toner level, as described below.
Checking the print cartridge life
You can check the print cartridge life using the MFP control panel, the embedded Web server, MFP
software, HP Easy Printer Care Software, or HP Web Jetadmin software.
Using the MFP control panel
1.
Press Menu.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Touch PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE.
Using the embedded Web server
1.
In your browser, enter the IP address for the printer home page. This takes you to the printer status
page. See Supplies status page.
2.
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status page,
which provides print cartridge information.
Using HP Easy Printer Care Software
In the Overview tab in the Supplies Status section, click Supplies Details to open the supplies status
page.
Using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer device. The device status page shows print cartridge information.
222
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Changing print cartridges
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message
recommending that you order a replacement. The MFP can continue to print using the current print
cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge.
The MFP uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M), cyan
(C), and yellow (Y).
Replace a print cartridge when the MFP control panel displays a REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
message. The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a genuine
HP cartridge is currently installed).
CAUTION If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold
water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE For information about recycling used print cartridges, see Environmental Product
Stewardship program, or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies website at http://www.hp.com/go/
recycle.
To replace the print cartridge
1.
Using the handles, open the covers on the right side of the MFP.
CAUTION
ENWW
The fuser might be hot.
Managing print cartridges
223
2.
Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down to open it.
CAUTION Do not place any item on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is
punctured, print quality problems may result.
224
3.
Remove the used print cartridge from the MFP.
4.
Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
5.
Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the MFP and insert the cartridge until it is completely
seated.
NOTE If a cartridge is in the wrong slot, the control panel will display the message
INCORRECT <COLOR> CARTRIDGE.
6.
ENWW
Close the transfer unit.
Managing print cartridges
225
7.
Close the covers on the right side of the MFP. After a short while, the control panel should display
Ready.
8.
Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived.
See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
9.
If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the control panel for further instructions.
For additional help, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
226
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Replacing supplies
When you use genuine HP supplies, the MFP automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need
to be replaced. For more information about ordering supplies, see Supplies and accessories
Locating supplies
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.
Figure 11-1 Supply item locations
1
Fuser
2
Print cartridges
3
Transfer unit
For information about staple cartridges, see Stapling documents.
Supply replacement guidelines
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the MFP.
●
Allow sufficient space above and in the front of the MFP for removing supplies.
●
The MFP should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.
For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see
more information at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp. When you connect, select Solve a
Problem.
CAUTION Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this MFP. Use of
non-HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the HewlettPackard extended warranty or service agreements.
ENWW
Replacing supplies
227
Making room around the MFP for replacing supplies
The following illustration shows the clearance necessary in front of, above, and to the side of the MFP
for replacing supplies.
Figure 11-2 Supplies replacement clearance diagram
1
1160 mm (45.7 inches). If stapler/stacker or 3-bin mailbox is installed: 1460 mm (57.5 inches).
2
980 mm (38.6 inches)
3
1050 mm (41.4 inches)
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages
that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary.
1
2
Item
Printer message
Page count
Approximate time period
Black cartridges
REPLACE BLACK
CARTRIDGE
12,000 pages1
3 months
Color cartridges
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
12,000 pages1
3 months
Image transfer kit
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
120,000 pages2
40 months
Image fuser kit
REPLACE FUSER KIT
150,000 pages
50 months
Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual colors.
Approximate life is based on 4,000 pages per month.
You can use the embedded Web server to order supplies. For more information, see Using the
embedded Web server.
228
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Performing preventive maintenance
The MFP requires periodic maintenance to maintain optimum performance. A control-panel message
alerts you when it is time to purchase the preventive maintenance kits. Separate maintenance
procedures are required for the printer-portion of the MFP and for the ADF.
ADF maintenance kit
After feeding 90,000 pages through the ADF, a REPLACE DOCUMENT FEEDER KIT message
appears on the control-panel display. This message appears approximately one month before the kit
needs to be replaced. Order a new kit when this message appears. See Part numbers for information
about ordering a new ADF maintenance kit.
The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items:
●
One pick-up roller assembly
●
One separation pad
●
One mylar sheet kit
●
An instruction sheet
Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.
After replacing the kit, reset the ADF maintenance-kit count.
To reset the ADF maintenance-kit count
ENWW
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
When XXXMB appears on the control-panel display, press and hold 6 until all three LEDs flash
once and then stay on. (This might take up to 20 seconds.)
3.
Release 6 and then press 3 twice.
4.
Press 6 to select NEW DOCUMENT FEEDER KIT.
5.
The MFP completes its initialization sequence. The ADF maintenance-kit counter is automatically
reset.
Performing preventive maintenance
229
Cleaning the MFP
To maintain print quality, clean the MFP thoroughly whenever print-quality problems occur and every
time you replace the print cartridge.
WARNING! Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the MFP. It can be hot.
CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based
cleaners on or around the MFP except as directed.
Cleaning the outside of the MFP
●
Clean the outside of the MFP if it is visibly marked.
●
Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or water and a mild detergent.
Cleaning the touchscreen
Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the touchscreen
gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen. Do not pour or
spray water directly onto the touchscreen.
To clean the scanner glass
●
Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality,
such as streaking.
●
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner
glass.
CAUTION Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass. Do not press hard on
the glass surface. (You could break the glass).
230
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Cleaning the ADF delivery system
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality
(such as streaking).
To clean the ADF delivery system
ENWW
1.
Open the scanner lid.
2.
Locate the white, vinyl ADF backing.
3.
Clean the ADF backing by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based
surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the ADF components.
4.
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner
glass.
Cleaning the MFP
231
5.
Close the scanner lid.
To clean the ADF rollers
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks
as they exit the ADF.
CAUTION Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you
notice dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device.
1.
232
Open the scanner lid.
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
2.
Locate the rollers near the white vinyl ADF backing.
3.
Wipe the rollers gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
4.
ENWW
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
Close the scanner lid.
Cleaning the MFP
233
5.
Pull the release lever to open the ADF cover.
6.
Locate the rollers.
7.
Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION
234
Chapter 11
Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
8.
Locate the separation pad.
9.
Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
10. Close the ADF cover.
Cleaning the mylar strip
Clean the mylar strips on the underside of the scanner lid only if you are experiencing a decrease in
copy quality (such as vertical lines) during copying using the ADF.
To clean the mylar strip
1.
ENWW
Open the scanner lid.
Cleaning the MFP
235
2.
Locate the mylar strip.
3.
Clean the mylar strip with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth.
4.
Close the scanner lid.
NOTE Replacement mylar strips are stored in an envelope that is underneath the white vinyl
ADF backing. Follow the instructions that are in the envelope.
236
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
Calibrating the scanner
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF
and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the
position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated
and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the
document is captured.
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.
The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.
Before calibrating the scanner, print the calibration target.
To print the calibration target
1.
Place letter- or A4-size paper in tray 1, and adjust the side guides.
2.
Press Menu to enter the menus.
3.
Scroll to and touch DIAGNOSTICS.
4.
Scroll to and touch CALIBRATE SCANNER.
5.
Touch OK to print the first pass of the calibration target.
6.
Place the first pass of the calibration target face-down in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into
the MFP.
7.
Touch OK to print the second pass. The final calibration target must look like the following figure.
CAUTION If the calibration target does not look like the figure shown here, the calibration
process will fail and the quality of scans will be degraded. The black areas must extend
completely to the short edges of the page. If they do not, use a black marker to extend the
black areas to the edge of the page. Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
8.
Place the calibration target face-up into the ADF, and adjust the side guides.
9.
After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once, reposition it face down in the ADF
and touch OK.
10. Place the calibration target face-down on the scanner glass, touch OK, and scan the page. After
this pass, the calibration is complete. If the calibrations is successful, the control panel will display
Scanner calibration successful.
ENWW
Calibrating the scanner
237
238
Chapter 11
Managing and maintaining the MFP
ENWW
12 Solving problems
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
●
Solving general problems
●
Determining MFP problems
●
Troubleshooting information pages
●
Control panel message types
●
Control panel messages
●
Paper jams
●
Clearing jams
●
Media-handling problems
●
Understanding MFP messages
●
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker
●
Understanding lights on the formatter
●
Color printing problems
●
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
●
Solving e-mail problems
●
Solving network connectivity problems
●
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
239
Solving general problems
If the MFP is not responding properly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the MFP
does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the
problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.
Troubleshooting checklist
1.
2.
Make sure the MFP Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:
a.
Check the power-cable connections.
b.
Check that the power switch is on.
c.
Check the power source by plugging the MFP directly into the wall or into a different outlet.
d.
If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care. (See HP customer
care or the support flyer that came in the MFP box.)
Check the cabling.
a.
Check the cable connection between the MFP and the computer or network port. Make sure
that the connection is secure.
b.
Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.
c.
Check the network connection. See Solving network connectivity problems.
3.
Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. See Print media specifications.
4.
Print a configuration page (see Configuration page. If the MFP is connected to a network, an
HP Jetdirect page also prints.)
5.
6.
a.
If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media.
b.
If the page jams in the MFP, see Clearing jams.
If the configuration page prints, check the following items.
a.
If the page prints correctly, then the MFP hardware is working. The problem is with the
computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.
b.
If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the MFP hardware. Contact
HP Customer Care. (See HP customer care or the support flyer that came in the MFP box.)
Select one of the following options:
Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers, or Printers and Faxes. Double click
HP Color LasaerJet 4730mfp.
-orMac OS X: Open Print Center, (or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X v. 10.3), and double-click
the line for the HP Color LasaerJet 4730mfp.
7.
240
Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series printer driver. Check the
program to make sure that you are using an HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series printer driver.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
8.
9.
ENWW
Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,
then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work (the document
does not print) complete these steps:
a.
Try printing the job from another computer that has the MFP software installed.
b.
If you connected the MFP to the network, connect the MFP directly to a computer with a
parallel cable. Redirect the MFP to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the new
connection type that you are using.
If the problem is still not resolved, see Determining MFP problems.
Solving general problems
241
Determining MFP problems
Situation/Message
Solution
The control-panel display is blank, and internal fans are not
running.
Make sure that the MFP power is on. Press all the keys to see
if one is stuck. Contact your HP-authorized service
representative if these steps do not work. See HP customer
care.
The MFP is turned on, but the internal fans are not running.
Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the MFP power
configuration. (See the label that is inside the top cover on the
MFP for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip
and its voltage is not within specification, plug the MFP directly
into the power receptacle.
The MFP voltage is not correct.
Make sure that the line voltage is in the correct range. (See the
label that is inside the top cover on the MFP for voltage
requirements.)
Messages appear on the control-panel display.
See Understanding MFP messages.
Print media is jammed in the MFP.
Check for jams. For more information, see Clearing jams.
The control-panel display shows the wrong language or
unfamiliar characters.
Reconfigure the control-panel display language.
1.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
2.
When XXXMB appears on the control-panel display,
press and hold 6 until all three LEDs flash once and then
stay on. (This might take up to 20 seconds.
3.
Release 6 and then press 6 again.
4.
Wait while the MFP completes its initialization sequence.
When it is finished, the Select A Language menu
appears on the control-panel display. Scroll to and touch
the correct language.
An error occurs during a Digital Send job. Job failed.
The MFP experienced an error during the digital sending job.
The administrator should check on the status of the SMTP
server. See Solving e-mail problems.
The e-mail gateway could not accept the job because the
attachment is too large.
Reduce the size of the e-mail attachment by setting the
maximum attachment size. Set the maximum attachment size
on the Digital Sending tab of the embedded Web server. See
Using the embedded Web server.
Try using a different file format or sending the document a few
pages at a time.
A network connection is required for digital sending
242
Chapter 12
Solving problems
The MFP cannot find a network connection. The administrator
should check to see if the MFP is connected to the network.
See Solving network connectivity problems.
ENWW
Troubleshooting information pages
From the MFP control panel, you can print pages that can help diagnose MFP problems. The procedures
for printing the following information pages are described here:
●
Configuration page
NOTE It is recommended that you print a configuration page before beginning any MFP
diagnostics.
●
Paper path test page
●
Registration page
●
Event log
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view or restore current MFP settings, to help troubleshoot MFP problems,
or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as DIMMs, paper handling accessories, and printer
languages.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Touch PRINT CONFIGURATION.
The message Printing... CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the MFP finishes printing the
configuration page. The MFP returns to the Ready state after printing.
NOTE If the MFP is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server, external duplexer, or stapler/
stacker, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices.
Paper path test page
The Paper Path Test page is useful for testing the paper handling features of the MFP. You can define
the paper path you want to test by selecting the source, destination, and other options available on the
MFP.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch DIAGNOSTICS.
3.
Touch PAPER PATH TEST.
The message Performing... PAPER PATH TEST appears on the display until the MFP finishes the
paper path test. The MFP returns to the Ready state after printing the paper path test page.
Registration page
The Registration page prints a horizontal arrow and a vertical arrow that show how far from center an
image can be printed on the page. You can set registration values for a tray so that an image on the
ENWW
Troubleshooting information pages
243
back and front of a page is centered. Image placement varies slightly for each tray. Perform the
registration procedure for each tray.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch PRINT QUALITY.
4.
Touch SET REGISTRATION.
NOTE You can select a tray by specifying a SOURCE. The default SOURCE is Tray 2.
To keep the registration for Tray 2, go to step 7. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
5.
Touch SOURCE.
6.
Select a tray.
After selecting the tray, the MFP control panel returns to the SET REGISTRATION menu.
7.
Touch PRINT TEST PAGE.
8.
Follow the instructions on the printed page.
Event log
The event log lists the MFP events, including MFP jams, service errors, and other MFP conditions.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch DIAGNOSTICS.
3.
Touch PRINT EVENT LOG.
The message Printing... EVENT LOG appears on the display until the MFP finishes printing the event
log. The MFP returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.
244
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message types
Control panel messages are divided into three types, depending on their severity.
●
Status messages
●
Warning messages
●
Error messages
Within the error message category, some messages are ranked as Critical error messages. This section
explains the differences between the control panel message types.
Status messages
Status messages reflect the current state of the MFP. They inform you of normal MFP operation and
require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the MFP changes. Whenever the MFP
is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready is displayed if
the MFP is online.
Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
Ready or Status messages and remain displayed until the error is cleared. If CLEARABLE
WARNINGS is set to JOB in the MFP’s configuration menu, these messages are cleared by the next
print job.
Error messages
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing
a paper jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable; if AUTO CONTINUE=ON the MFP will continue normal
operation after displaying an auto-continuable error message for 10 seconds.
NOTE Any button pressed during the 10-second display of an auto-continuable error message
will override the auto-continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take precedence.
For example, pressing the Menu button will display the main menu.
Critical error messages
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by
turning the MFP off and then on. These messages are not affected by the AUTO CONTINUE setting.
If a critical error persists, service is required.
The following table lists and describes control panel messages, in numeric and alphabetical order.
ENWW
Control panel message types
245
Control panel messages
Message listing
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
10.00.YY SUPPLY
The MFP cannot read or write to at least one
print cartridge memory tag.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
Reinstall the print cartridge
corresponding to the appropriate error,
or install a new print cartridge if
available.
01 = cyan print cartridge
3.
Press
02 = magenta print cartridge
4.
If the error persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
Reinstall the print cartridge
corresponding to the appropriate error,
or install a new print cartridge if
available.
3.
Press
MEMORY ERROR
The values of YY are:
alternates with
00 = black print cartridge
Press
for more information.
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
03 = yellow print cartridge
10.10.YY SUPPLY
A memory tag is missing from at least one
print cartridge.
MEMORY ERROR
The values of YY are:
alternates with
00 = black print cartridge
Press
for more information.
01 = cyan print cartridge
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
for more information.
for more information.
02 = magenta print cartridge
03 = yellow print cartridge
10.90.XY REPLACE
A color cartridge is out of toner and needs to
be replaced.
Replace the color cartridge.
The print cartridge is not seated properly in
the MFP.
Remove and reinstall the print cartridge.
This message is displayed when there is a
problem with the real-time clock on the
formatter board.
Touch OK to continue. If this error occurs, the
MFP will continue to track the time and date
using the processor clock until the MFP is
turned off. Unless the error is corrected, you
will be prompted to reset the date and time
whenever the MFP is turned off then on.
[COLOR] CARTRIDGE
For help press
10.92.YY CARTRIDGES
NOT ENGAGED
11.X INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR
To continue touch "OK".
XX=01 Dead clock battery
XX=02 Dead real-time clock
13.XX.YY EXTERNAL OUTPUT
There is a jam in the stapler/stacker.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
DEVICE PAPER JAM
246
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
13.XX.YY JAM IN
There is a jam in the duplex path.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
DUPLEX PATH
For help press
13.XX.YY JAM IN
There is a jam in the paper path.
PAPER PATH
For help press
13.XX.YY JAM IN
STAPLER
A staple is jammed in the stapler. Check the 1.
stapler/stacker for jammed staples. For more
information, see Jam in the stapler/stacker.
2.
For help press
13.XX.YY JAM IN
Paper is jammed in Tray 1.
touch OK
13.XX.YY JAM IN
A page is jammed in Tray 2, 3, or 4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
TRAY X
For help press
ENWW
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
TRAY 1
Clear jam then
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
Control panel messages
247
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
13.XX.YY JAM IN TOP
There is a jam in the top cover area.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen
dialog box.
2.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
3.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
For more information, see Clearing
jams.
4.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
COVER OR DUPLEX AREA
For help press
13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE
Paper is jammed in the duplexer. Check the
device for jammed paper.
DUPLEXER
For help press
13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE
Paper is jammed in the output area.
LEFT OUTPUT AREA
For help press
13.XX.YY MULTIPLE
There are multiple jams in the duplex path.
This includes the top cover area.
JAMS IN DUPLEX PATH
For help press
13.XX.YY MULTIPLE
There are multiple jams in the paper path.
This includes the top cover area.
JAMS IN PAPER PATH
For help press
248
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
13.XX.YYJAM IN
Paper is jammed in an external paper
handling device.
OUTPUT DEVICE
Check the duplexer or the stapler/stacker for
jammed paper. For more information, see
Jam in the stapler/stacker.
For help press
1.
Press for detailed information about
clearing the jam.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
If the message persists after clearing all
pages, contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Touch OK to continue printing.
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
The MFP has received more data from the
computer than fits in available memory.
For help press
NOTE A loss of data will
occur.
alternates with
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
2.
Reduce the complexity of the print job to
avoid this error in the future.
3.
Adding memory to the MFP may allow
printing of more complex pages.
To continue touch "OK".
22 EIO X
The EIO card in card slot X has overflowed its 1.
I/O buffer during a busy state.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
NOTE A loss of data will
occur.
To continue touch "OK".
22 EMBEDDED I/O
The embedded JetDirect print server has
overflowed.
2.
If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Touch OK to continue. When this error
occurs, data might be lost. If necessary,
resend the job to the MFP.
2.
If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Touch OK to resume printing.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue touch "OK".
22 PARALLEL I/O
The parallel buffer has overflowed during a
busy state.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
NOTE A loss of data will
occur.
For help press
alternates with
2.
If the message persists, disconnect the
parallel cable at both ends and
reconnect.
3.
If the message still persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue touch "OK".
ENWW
Touch OK to continue printing.
Control panel messages
249
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
22 USB I/O
The USB buffer has overflowed during a busy
state.
1.
Touch OK to continue printing.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
NOTE A loss of data will
occur.
To continue touch "OK".
2.
30.1.YY SCANNER FAILURE
An error has occurred in the scanner.
If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
Turn the MFP off and then on.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider. See
the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/suppport/clj4730mfp.
40 EIO X BAD
A connection with the card in EIO slot X has
been broken.
1.
Touch OK to continue printing.
TRANSMISSION
NOTE A loss of data will
occur.
To continue touch "OK".
2.
40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD
A connection with the embedded JetDirect
print server has been broken.
TRANSMISSION
SIZE IN TRAY X
Turn the MFP off then on. Press
information.
for more
If the message persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
To continue touch "OK".
41.3 UNEXPECTED
If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
The paper that is loaded is longer or shorter
in the feed direction than the size configured
for the tray.
1.
If the incorrect size was selected, cancel
the job or press to access help.
OR
For help press
2.
Touch OK to select another tray.
3.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
1.
If the incorrect type was selected,
cancel the job or press to access help.
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray touch OK
41.5 UNEXPECTED
The MFP senses a different paper type in the
paper path than configured in the tray.
TYPE IN TRAY X
OR
For help press
2.
Touch OK to select another tray.
3.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray touch OK
250
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
44.1 USB ACCESSORY
This message appears when a connected
Use the scroll bar to step through the
USB accessory draws too much power.
instructions.
When this happens, the ACC port is disabled
and printing stops.
ERROR
For help press
49.XXXX
A critical firmware error has occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
Recommended action
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
To continue
turn off then on
50.X FUSER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off then on.
50.X FUSER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
For help press
The error might be due to an inadequate
power supply, inadequate line voltage, or a
problem with the fuser.
2.
If the message persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
To continue turn off then on
The following are specific fuser errors:
50.1: A low fuser temperature error has
occurred in the main thermistor.
50.2: A fuser warm-up service error has
occurred.
50.1: A low fuser temperature error has
occurred in the main thermistor.
50.6: An open fuser error has occurred.
50.7: A fuser pressure release mechanism
has failed.
50.8: A low fuser pressure temperature has
occurred in the sub thermistor.
50.9: A high fuser pressure temperature has
occurred in the sub thermistor.
51.2Y
Either a laser beam detects an error, or a
laser error has occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
The values of Y are:
For help press
Y Description
alternates with
0 - Black
51.2Y
1 - Cyan
PRINTER ERROR
2 - Magenta
To continue
3 - Yellow
turn off then on
51.XY PRINTER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
To continue printing, turn the MFP off then on.
alternates with
ENWW
Control panel messages
251
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
An MFP error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off then on. Press
information.
To continue
turn off then on
52.XY PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
for more
If the message persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
To continue
turn off then on
53.XY.ZZ CHECK RAM
A memory error has occurred.
DIMM SLOT X
If prompted to do so, touch OK to continue.
The MFP should come to the Ready state,
but will not make full use of all memory
installed.
Otherwise:
54.01 PRINTER
Printing cannot continue. The humidity
environmental sensor is abnormal.
ERROR
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Verify that all DDR SDRAM meets
specifications and is correctly seated.
3.
Turn the MFP on.
4.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
To continue
turn off then on
54.XX
There is a sensor malfunction.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
PRINTER ERROR
Values of XX are:
2.
To continue
01 - Humidity sensor
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
turn off then on
05 - media sensor
07 - Yellow drum phase (home) position
sensor
08 - Magenta drum phase (home) position
sensor
09 - Cyan drum phase (home) position sensor
0A - Black drum phase (home) position
sensor
0B - Density Sensor Out of Range
0C - Halftone Calibration
0D - Halftone Diffusion Calibration
0B - CPR Out of Range
252
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
55.0X.YY DC
A printer command error has occurred.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
CONTROLLER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
55.0X.YY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
56.XX
An MFP error has occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
57.0X
An MFP fan error has occurred.
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
58.0X
A memory tag error was detected.
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
58.0X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
An MFP motor error has occurred.
Note: This message might also appear
if the transfer unit is missing or
incorrectly installed. Ensure that the
transfer unit is correctly installed.
To continue
turn off then on
ENWW
Control panel messages
253
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
60.X
A tray lifting error has occurred, where X is
the number of the tray.
1.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
2.
Turn the MFP off then on.
3.
If the error does not clear, record the
message and contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the MFP off, and then turn the MFP
on.
2.
Check that the accessory is properly
seated on and connected to the MFP,
without any gaps between the MFP and
the accessory. If the accessory uses
cables, disconnect and reconnect them.
Ensure that all connecting screws are
tightened.
3.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/suppport/
clj4730mfp.
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
62 NO SYSTEM
No system was found.
To continue
turn off then on
64 PRINTER ERROR
A scan buffer error has occurred.
To continue
turn off then on
65.X.X OUTPUT
An external output device has a condition that
needs attention before printing can resume.
Turn the MFP off then on. If necessary, reseat the output device. Ensure that the output
device is connected and the cable is
tightened.
Communication between the MFP and the
device has been broken. The device could be
disconnected.
1.
Turn the MFP off. Replace the stapler/
stacker on the MFP. Turn the MFP on.
2.
Check that the accessory is properly
seated on and connected to the MFP,
without any gaps between the MFP and
the accessory. If the accessory uses
cables, disconnect and reconnect them.
Ensure that all connecting screws are
tightened.
3.
If the error does not clear, record the
message and contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
1.
Turn the power off.
2.
Check that the accessory is properly
seated on and connected to the MFP,
without any gaps between the MFP and
the accessory. If the accessory uses
cables, disconnect and reconnect them.
Ensure that all connecting screws are
tightened.
DEVICE CONDITION
65.X.X OUTPUT
DEVICE DISCONNECTED
66.XX.X OUTPUT
An error occurred in an external paper
handling accessory.
DEVICE FAILURE
254
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
For help press
alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
Description
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
To continue touch "OK".
3.
Turn the MFP on.
4.
If this message persists, contact an HPauthorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/suppport/
clj4730mfp.
A non-volatile storage device is full. Touching 1.
OK should clear the message. Printing can
2.
continue, but there may be unexpected
behavior.
X Description
Touch OK to continue.
For 68.0 errors, turn the MFP off then
on.
3.
If a 68.0 error persists, contact
HPSupport.
4.
For 68.1 errors, use the HPWeb
Jetadmin software to delete files from
the disk drive.
5.
For 68.1 errors that persist, contact
HPSupport.
0 for onboard NVRAM
1 for removable disk (flash or hard)
To continue touch "OK".
68.X PERMANENT
Recommended action
A non-volatile storage device is full. Touching 1.
OK should clear the message. Printing can
2.
continue, but there may be unexpected
behavior.
X Description
3.
0 for onboard NVRAM
Touch OK to continue.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
1 for removable disk (flash or hard)
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTINGS CHANGED
For help press
alternates with
One or more MFP settings saved in the non- 1.
volatile storage device is invalid and has been
2.
reset to its factory default. Touching OK
should clear the message. Printing can
continue, but there may be unexpected
3.
behavior.
68.X STORAGE ERROR
Touch OK to continue.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
SETTINGS CHANGED
To continue touch "OK".
69.X PRINTER ERROR
An MFP error has occurred.
Turn the MFP off then on. Press
information.
A critical hardware error has occurred.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
for more
For help press
alternates with
69.X PRINTER ERROR
To continue
turn off then on
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
ENWW
Control panel messages
255
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
The I/O accessory card in slot X has
encountered a critical error.
1.
Turn the MFP off then on.
2.
If the problem persists, contact
HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
turn off then on
8X.YYYY
EIO X ERROR
X Description
1: error in slot 1
2: error in slot 2
8X.YYYY EMBEDDED
This message is generated by a failure of the
embedded JetDirect print server.
JETDIRECT ERROR
Turn the MFP off then on. Press
information.
for more
If the message persists, contact HP Support
at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
[FS] FILE
The MFP received a PJL file system
command that attempted to perform an
illogical operation (for example, to download
a file to a non-existent directory).
OPERATION FAILED
To clear touch "OK".
alternates with
1.
To clear the message, touch OK.
2.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
3.
If the message reappears, there may be
a problem with the software application.
Ready
[FS] NOT
The device has not been initialized.
You can use Web JetAdmin to initialize the
device.
The Flash file system has not been initialized.
It must be initialized before it can be used.
Touch OK to continue.
This message is displayed when a paper path
sensor test or a paper path test is run. The
alphabetical value indicates which sensor is
being checked.
No action necessary.
An attempt has been made to modify a menu
item while the control panel security
mechanism is enabled by the MFP
administrator. The message will disappear
shortly, and the MFP will return to Ready
state.
Contact the MFP administrator to change
settings.
ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open.
Close the ADF cover. Follow the instructions
in the onscreen dialog box.
ADF Output Bin Full
The ADF output bin holds 50 sheets of paper.
The MFP stops when the bin is full.
Remove the paper from the ADF output bin.
ADF Paper Jam
Paper is jammed in the ADF.
Follow the instructions in the onscreen dialog
box. For more information, see Clearing
jams.
INITIALIZED
[FS] NOT
INITIALIZED
To clear touch "OK".
alternates with
<Current status message>
ABCDEFGHIJYW
011000000000
alternates with
To exit press Stop
Access Denied
MENUS LOCKED
256
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
ADF Pick Error
The ADF experienced an error while picking
paper.
Make sure that your original contains no more
than 30 pages. Follow the instructions in the
onscreen dialog box.
ADF Skew Error
Paper is skewed in the ADF.
Make sure that the paper guides are aligned
on the sides of the originals, and that all of the
originals are the same size. Remove the
remaining paper from the ADF and close the
ADF cover. Follow the instructions in the
onscreen dialog box.
Attachment Too Big
The scanned documents have exceeded the Send the job again using a lower resolution,
size limit of the server.
smaller file size settings, or fewer pages. See
Using the embedded Web server to learn
how to reduce the size of the attachment.
Contact the network administrator to enable
sending the scanned documents by using
multiple e-mails.
BAD DUPLEXER
The duplexer is not connected properly and
must be reinserted before printing can
continue.
CONNECTION
Turn the MFP off.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
alternates with
If the error does not clear, record the
message and contact HP Support at
http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
For help press
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY
The 500-sheet input tray is not making proper
connection with the MFP.
CONNECTION
1.
Verify that the MFP is on a level surface.
2.
Turn the MFP off.
3.
Reseat the MFP on the 500-sheet input
tray.
4.
Turn the MFP on after reseating the
500-sheet input tray.
Calibrating...
The MFP is calibrating.
Canceling... X
The MFP is in the process of canceling a job. No action necessary.
The message will continue to be displayed
while the job is stopped, the paper path
flushed, and any remaining incoming data on
the active data channel is received and
discarded.
CARD SLOT X NOT
The flash card in slot X is not working
correctly.
FUNCTIONAL
No action necessary.
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Remove the card from the slot indicated
and replace with a new card.
Check Cables
The cable that connects the scanner to the
MFP is experiencing an error.
Check Cables Check Scanner
The scanner might be locked or the interface Make sure the scanner is unlocked and the
cable might be seated incorrectly.
interface cable is seated correctly.
Check Output Device
An error has occurred with the output device. Remove and reinstall the ouptut device.
Observe the LED on the device. If it is flashing
ENWW
Make sure that the cable between the
scanner and the MFP is connected. Turn the
MFP off then on. If the error persists, replace
the cable. If the error still persists, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/suppport/clj4730mfp.
Control panel messages
257
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
or is amber, see Understanding accessory
lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/
stacker.
Check The Glass
A digital send or copy job has been performed
from the scanner glass, but the original
document needs to be removed.
Remove the original document from the
scanner glass and press Start.
Checking paper path
The engine is turning its rollers to check for
possible paper jams.
No action necessary.
Checking printer
The engine is doing an internal test.
No action necessary.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
PJL encountered a request for a personality
that did not exist in the MFP. The job is
aborted and no pages will be printed.
1.
Press
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
3.
Reprint using the correct driver for the
device.
NOT AVAILABLE
To continue touch "OK".
alternates with
for detailed information.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
For help press
CLEANING DISK X% COMPLETE
A storage device is being cleaned. Do not
turn the MFP off. When the process is
complete, the MFP will automatically restart.
No action necessary.
Cleaning...
A cleaning page is being processed.
No action necessary.
Clearing event log
This message is displayed while the event log
is cleared. The MFP will exit the MENUS once
the event log has been cleared.
No action necessary.
Clearing paper path
The MFP jammed or detected misplaced
paper when turned on. The MFP is attempting
to eject jammed pages automatically.
No action necessary.
CLOSE FRONT COVERS
The top cover needs to be closed.
Close front covers.
For help press
NOTE This message might also
appear if the fuser is missing or
incorrectly installed. Ensure that the
fuser is correctly installed.
Close top cover
The top cover of the MFP is open.
Close the top cover.
Creating... CLEANING PAGE
This message is displayed while a cleaning
page is being generated. When the page is
complete, the control panel display backs up
one screen to the PRINT QUALITY menu.
No action necessary.
The MFP received data and is waiting for a
form feed. When the MFP receives another
file, the message should disappear.
Touch OK to continue printing.
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page touch "OK"
When the page is printed, follow the
instructions printed on the cleaning page to
process the page.
alternates with
Ready
258
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Date/Time
Prompt for setting the MFP date and time.
Default format is [YYYY]/[MMM]/[DD] [HH][MM].
To change, touch OK and follow the time and
date prompts.
DELETING PRIVATE JOBS
The MFP is deleting a private stored job. A
PIN is required to delete a private job.
No action necessary.
Deleting... X
The MFP is currently deleting the stored job.
No action necessary.
Digital Send Communications Error
An error has occurred during a digital send
task.
Contact the network administrator.
Digital Send Server Error
The MFP cannot communicate with the
server.
Verify the network connection. Contact the
network administrator.
DISK DEVICE
A device failure has occurred on the specified 1.
drive. Printing may continue for jobs that do
2.
not require access to the disk drive.
FAILURE
To clear the message, touch OK.
If the message persists, remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive.
To clear touch "OK".
3.
Turn the MFP back on.
4.
If the message still persists, replace the
EIO disk drive.
1.
To clear the message, touch OK.
2.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
3.
If the message reappears, there may be
a problem with the software application.
1.
Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to
delete files from the EIO disk drive, or
delete the stored job from the MFP
control panel.
2.
To clear the message, touch OK.
3.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
1.
To enable writing to the disk, turn off
write protection, using HP Web
Jetadmin.
To clear touch "OK".
2.
To clear the message, touch OK.
alternates with
3.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
and then on.
alternates with
Ready
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear touch "OK".
The MFP received a PJL file system
command that attempted to perform an
illogical operation (for example, to download
a file to a non-existent directory). Printing may
continue.
alternates with
Ready
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear touch "OK".
The MFP received a PJL file system
command that attempted to store something
on the file system but was unsuccessful
because the file system is full.
alternates with
Ready
DISK IS
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
WRITE PROTECTED
Ready
E-mail Gateway did not respond. Job
failed.
A gateway has exceeded the time out value.
Validate the SMTP IP address. See Solving
e-mail problems.
E-mail Gateway rejected the job because
of the addressing information. Job failed.
One or more of the e-mail addresses is
incorrect.
Send the job again.
EIO X DISK
The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly. 1.
NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press
ENWW
2.
Turn the MFP off.
Remove the EIO disk from the slot
indicated and replace with a new EIO
disk drive.
Control panel messages
259
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
EIO X disk
The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing.
No action necessary.
The EIO disk device in slot X is spinning up
its platter.
No action necessary.
Error executing Digital Send job. Job
failed.
A digital send job has failed and cannot be
delivered.
Try to send the job again.
Event Log Empty
SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from the
control panel, and the event log is empty.
No action necessary.
FLASH DEVICE
A device failure has occurred on the specified
drive. Printing can continue for jobs that do
not require the Flash DIMM.
1.
To clear the message, touch OK.
2.
If the message persists, remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive.
3.
Turn the MFP back on.
4.
If the message still persists, replace the
Flash DIMM.
1.
Use HP Web Jetadmin software to
delete files from the Flash Memory and
try again.
2.
To clear the message, touch OK.
3.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
1.
To enable writing to the Flash Memory,
turn off write protection, using HP Web
Jetadmin.
To clear touch "OK".
2.
To clear the message, touch OK.
alternates with
3.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
initializing
EIO X disk
spinning up
FAILURE
To clear touch "OK".
alternates with
Ready
FLASH FILE
The MFP received a PJL file system
command that attempted to store something
on the file system but was unsuccessful
because the file system is full.
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear touch "OK".
alternates with
Ready
FLASH IS
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
WRITE PROTECTED
Ready
Front Side Optical System Error
The scanner has experienced an error.
To temporarily clear the message so you can
send a fax or send to e-mail, touch
IGNORE. If this message persists, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider.
See the HP support flyer, or go to
http://www.hp.com/suppport/clj4730mfp.
Genuine HP supplies installed
A new HP cartridge has been installed. The
MFP returns to the Ready state after
approximately 10 seconds.
No action necessary.
HP Digital Sending: Delivery Error
A digital send job has failed and cannot be
delivered.
Try to send the job again.
Incorrect PIN
The wrong PIN was entered. After three
incorrect PIN entries, the MFP will return to
Ready.
Re-enter PIN correctly.
260
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
INCORRECT SUPPLIES
At least one supply item is incorrectly
1.
positioned in the MFP and another supply
item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
2.
For status touch "OK".
Recommended action
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
Initializing
Touch OK to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
Use the scroll bar to highlight the
specific supply that has a problem.
3.
Press
4.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
to view help for the supply.
Displayed when the MFP is turned on to show
that permanent storage is being initialized.
No action necessary.
Initializing...
This message is displayed when the MFP is
turned on, as soon as the individual tasks
begin initialization.
No action necessary.
INSERT OR CLOSE
Tray X must be inserted or closed before the Close the tray indicated.
current job can be printed.
permanent storage
TRAY X
For help press
INSTALL FUSER
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status touch "OK".
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
TO LOAD FONTS/DATA
For help press
The fuser is not installed or is not installed
correctly.
At least one supply item is missing or is not
correctly seated in the MFP and another
supply item is missing, incorrectly placed,
out, or low. Insert the supply item or make
sure the installed supply item is fully seated.
The transfer unit is not installed or is not
installed correctly.
Confirm that the fuser is installed in the
MFP and is fully seated.
2.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
1.
Press Menu to access the SUPPLIES
STATUS menu.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Use the scroll bar to highlight the
specific supply that has a problem.
4.
Press
5.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
1.
Use the scroll bar to access the
SUPPLIES STATUS menu.
2.
Scroll to and select the transfer unit.
3.
Press
4.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
The device does not have enough memory to 1.
load the data, such as fonts or macros from
the location specified. Device can be one of
2.
the following:
alternates with
INTERNAL = ROM directly on the formatter
board
Device
CARD SLOT X = font card in slot X
To continue touch "OK".
DIMMS
ENWW
1.
to view help for the supply.
to view help.
To use the device without the data,
touch OK.
To solve the problem, add more
memory to the device. DDR SDRAM
Memory: 128MB, (Q2630A) or 256MB
(Q2631A).
Control panel messages
261
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
EIO X DISK = removable hard disk installed
in EIO slot X
Internal disk initializing
The internal disk device is initializing.
No action necessary.
INTERNAL DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL
The internal disk is not working correctly.
Turn the MFP off then on. If the error persists,
contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/
support/clj4730mfp.
Internal disk spinning up
The internal disk is spinning up. This
No action necessary.
message generally appears for
approximately 15 seconds when the MFP
emerges from sleep mode. Jobs can still
print, but jobs that require disk access, such
as quick copy jobs, must wait until the disk is
initialized.
JAM IN DOCUMENT FEEDER
Paper is jammed in the ADF.
Remove jammed paper from the ADF. Follow
the instructions in the onscreen dialog box.
For more information, see Clearing jams.
If the message persists after all jams have
been cleared, a sensor might be stuck or
broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. See the HP support flyer, or
go to http://www.hp.com/suppport/
clj4730mfp.
LOAD TRAY 1:
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and no other paper
trays are available for use.
<TYPE> <SIZE>
1.
Load the correct paper in Tray 1.
2.
Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
3.
If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
1.
If the correct paper is loaded, touch
OK.
2.
Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper
and load Tray 1 with the specified paper.
3.
If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
4.
Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
5.
To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1 and then touch OK.
1.
Load the correct paper in Tray 1.
2.
Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
3.
If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
4.
To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1 and then touch OK.
For help press
LOAD TRAY 1:
Tray 1 is loaded and configured for a type and
size other than the one specified in the job.
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue touch "OK".
alternates with
LOAD TRAY 1:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
LOAD TRAY 1:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
This message appears when Tray 1 is
selected but is not loaded, and other paper
trays are available for use.
To use another
tray touch OK
Alternates with
LOAD TRAY 1:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
262
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
This message appears when Tray XX is
selected but is not loaded, and no other paper
trays are available for use.
Load the correct paper in the tray and
touch OK to continue.
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a
type and size other than specified in the job,
and other tray is available.
1.
Load the paper tray with the specified
paper.
2.
Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
3.
If prompted, confirm the size and type of
paper loaded.
4.
To use another tray, touch OK.
For help press
LOAD TRAY XX
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
LOAD TRAY XX
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray touch OK
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
Loading
program X
DO NOT POWER OFF
MANUALLY FEED
Programs and fonts can be stored on the
MFP’s file system and are loaded into RAM
when the MFP is turned on. The number XX
specifies a sequence number indicating the
current program being loaded.
No action necessary. Do not turn the MFP off.
The job specifies MANUAL FEED, but Tray
1 is empty. Another tray is available.
Add paper to Tray 1 or touch OK to select
another tray.
A job was sent specifying MANUAL FEED
and Tray 1 is empty.
1.
Load the correct paper in Tray 1 and
touch OK to continue.
No other tray is available.
2.
If prompted, confirm size and type of
paper loaded.
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray touch OK
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To continue touch "OK".
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
The job specifies MANUAL FEED, but Tray 1.
1 is already loaded and configured for a type
or size other than that specified in the job.
2.
To continue touch "OK".
alternates with
Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper
and load Tray 1 with the specified paper.
3.
Confirm that the media guides are in the
correct position.
4.
To use another tray, remove paper from
Tray 1 and then touch OK.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
If the correct paper is loaded in Tray 1,
touch OK to print.
For help press
ENWW
Control panel messages
263
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
MANUALLY FEED
A job was sent that specified MANUAL
FEED and Tray 1 is empty. Another tray is
available.
1.
Load Tray 1 with the specified paper.
2.
If prompted, confirm size and type of
paper loaded.
3.
Otherwise, touch OK to select another
tray.
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another
tray touch OK
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
MANUALLY FEED
The even-numbered pages of a manual twosided document have been printed and the
MFP is waiting for the output stack to be
inserted for the odd-numbered pages to be
printed.
Follow the instructions on the Print on Both
Sides instruction dialog box at the computer.
Mechanical Error
The ADF has experienced a mechanical
error.
Turn the MFP off then on. To temporarily
clear this message, touch IGNORE. If the
message persists, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the HP
support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/
suppport/clj4730mfp.
MIXED PAPER SIZES IN
The job contains different paper sizes and
cannot be stapled. The status light is solid
green.
Use a uniform paper size when sending jobs
to the stapler.
The MFP is executing a component test and
the component selected is a solenoid.
No action necessary.
The MFP is executing a component test and
the components selected are the solenoid
and the motor.
No action necessary.
No job to cancel
There are no stored jobs that can be
cancelled.
No action necessary.
NO STORED JOBS
No jobs stored on the EIO disk. This message
is displayed when the user enters the
RETRIEVE JOB menu and there are no jobs
to retrieve.
No action necessary.
NON HP SUPPLY
The MFP has detected that a non-HP print
cartridge is currently installed.
If you believe you purchased an HP cartridge,
please call the HP fraud hotline
(1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) .
OUTPUT STACK
alternates with
Then touch OK to
OR
Press
for help at the MFP.
print second sides
JOB TO STAPLE
Moving solenoid
To exit press Stop
Moving solenoid and motor
To exit press Stop
IN USE
alternates with
Ready
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges, but the
level of any refilled cartridge will not be
shown.
264
Chapter 12
Solving problems
CAUTION Any MFP repair
required as a result of using non-HP
cartridges is not covered under HP
warranty.
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
ORDER [COLOR]
The identified print cartridge is nearing the
1.
end of its useful life. The MFP is ready and
2.
will continue for the estimated number of
pages indicated. Estimated pages remaining
is based upon the historical page coverage of
3.
this MFP.
CARTRIDGE
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
alternates with
Ready
Recommended action
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
LESS THAN X PAGES
For help press
alternates with
The fuser is near the end of its life. The MFP 1.
is ready and will continue for the estimated
2.
number of pages indicated.
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
to view help for the message.
Obtain the part number for the print
cartridge indicated.
Order a print cartridge.
NOTE Supplies ordering
information is also available from the
embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server for more
information.
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
ORDER FUSER KIT
Press
3.
Press
to view help for the message.
Obtain the part number for the fuser kit.
Order the fuser kit.
NOTE Supplies ordering
information is also available from the
embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server for more
information.
Ready
ORDER SUPPLIES
More than one supply item is low.
1.
Press Menu to access the menus.
alternates with
Printing will continue until a supply needs to
be replaced.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
Ready
3.
Touch SUPPLIES STATUS.
For help press
4.
Touch the supply name that needs to be
ordered.
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
5.
Press
6.
Obtain a part number for the supply.
7.
Order the supply.
8.
Repeat the previous steps as necessary
for each supply that needs to be
ordered.
9.
Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
to access help for the supply.
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
The transfer unit is near end of life.
1.
Press
LESS THAN X PAGES
Printing can continue.
2.
Obtain the transfer kit part number from
help.
3.
Order the transfer kit.
to view help for the message.
For help press
alternates with
Ready
ENWW
NOTE Supplies ordering
information is also available from the
embedded Web server. See Using
the embedded Web server for more
information.
Control panel messages
265
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Output Bin X Full
The specified output bin is full and printing
cannot continue.
Empty the bin to continue printing.
OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN
The path between the MFP and the output
device is open and must be closed before
printing can continue.
1.
If you have a 3–bin mailbox installed,
make sure the jam-access door is
closed.
2.
If you have a stapler/stacker installed,
make sure the staple cartridge is
snapped into position and that the
staple-cartridge door is closed.
.
Paused
The MFP is paused, and there are no error
messages pending at the display. The I/O
continues receiving data until memory is full.
Press the Stop key.
The MFP is performing a print/stop test.
No action necessary.
A firmware upgrade is in process.
Do not turn the MFP off until the MFP returns
to Ready.
The MFP is performing a paper path test.
No action necessary.
Please wait
The MFP is in the process of clearing data.
No action necessary.
PRINTING STOPPED
This message is displayed when a Print/Stop
Test is run and time expires.
Touch OK to continue printing.
This message displays while the MFP CMYK
samples page is being generated.
No action necessary.
The MFP is generating the configuration
page. The MFP will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
The MFP is generating the demo page. The
MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
The MFP is generating the diagnostics page.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
To return to Ready
press RESUME key
Performing
PRINT/STOP TEST
Performing
upgrade
Performing...
PAPER PATH TEST
To continue touch "OK".
Printing...
CMYK SAMPLES
Printing...
CONFIGURATION
Printing...
DEMO PAGE
Printing...
DIAGNOSTICS PAGE
Printing...
ENGINE TEST
Printing...
Event Log
Printing...
FILE DIRECTORY
266
Chapter 12
The MFP is generating the engine test page. No action necessary.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
The MFP is generating the event log page.
The MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
The MFP is generating the mass storage
directory page. The MFP will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
Printing...
The MFP is generating either the PCL or PS
personality typeface list. The MFP will return
to the Ready state when the page is
completed.
No action necessary.
FONT LIST
Printing...
MENU MAP
Printing...
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
Printing...
REGISTRATION PAGE
Printing...
The MFP is generating the MFP menu map. No action necessary.
The MFP will return to the Ready state when
the page is completed.
The MFP is generating the print quality
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
troubleshooting pages. The MFP will return to
the Ready state when the pages are printed.
The MFP is generating the registration page.
The MFP will return to the SET
REGISTRATION menu when the page is
completed.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
This message displays while the MFP RGB
samples page is being generated.
No action necessary.
The MFP is generating the supplies status
page. The MFP will return to the online
Ready state when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
The MFP is generating the usage page. The
MFP will return to the online Ready state
when the page is completed.
No action necessary.
RGB Samples
Printing...
SUPPLIES STATUS
Printing...
Usage Page
Processing duplex
job
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes
while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to into the output bin. The message will
remove the pages until the job is complete.
disappear when the job is finished.
Do not grab paper
until job completes
Processing...
The MFP is currently processing a job but is
not yet picking pages. When paper motion
begins, this message will be replaced by a
message that indicates which tray the job is
being printed from.
No action necessary.
Processing...
The MFP is currently processing or printing
collated copies. The message indicates that
copy X of Y total copies is currently being
processed.
No action necessary.
copy <X> of <Y>
Processing...
The MFP is actively processing a job from the No action necessary.
designated tray.
from tray xx
Processing...
INTERMITTENT MODE
For help press
RAM DISK
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear touch "OK".
ENWW
This message might be displayed during
periods of heavy usage if the MFP becomes
overheated. If this occurs, the MFP enters a
mode in which it prints for one minute and
pauses for one minute. This cycle continues
until the operating temperature stabilizes.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
The MFP received a PJL file system
command that attempted to store something
on the file system but was unsuccessful
because the file system is full.
●
To clear the message, touch OK.
●
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
Control panel messages
267
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
alternates with
NOTE This will also delete any files
saved in RAM.
Ready
RAM DISK DEVICE
A device failure has occurred on the specified
drive.
1.
To clear the message, touch OK.
2.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
3.
If the message still persists, contact HP
Support at http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp.
1.
To clear the message, touch OK.
2.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
Printing may continue.
3.
If the message reappears, there may be
a problem with the software application.
The file system device is protected and no
new files can be written to it.
1.
To enable writing to the RAM disk, turn
off write protection, using HP Web
Jetadmin software.
To clear touch "OK".
2.
To clear the message, touch OK.
alternates with
3.
If the message persists, turn the MFP off
then on.
FAILURE
To clear touch "OK".
alternates with
Ready
RAM DISK FILE
The MFP received a PJL file system
command that attempted to perform an
illogical operation (for example, to download
a file to a non-existent directory).
OPERATION FAILED
To clear touch "OK".
alternates with
Ready
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
Ready
Ready
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
Ready
The MFP is online and ready for data. No
status or device attendance messages are
pending at the display.
No action necessary.
The MFP is in a special diagnostics mode.
Press the Stop key to exit the special
diagnostics mode.
Diagnostics mode
OR
To exit press Stop
No action is necessary.
Ready
The MFP is online and ready.
No action necessary.
REATTACH OUTPUT BIN
The standard output bin was detached when
the MFP was turned on, or the cable on the
stapler/stacker or the 3–bin mailbox is not
connected to the MFP.
Turn the MFP off. If you are using the stapler/
stacker or the 3–bin mailbox, make sure that
the cable is connected to the MFP. Reattach
the output bin, and then turn the MFP on.
Observe the LED on the output device. If it is
flashing or amber, Understanding accessory
lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/
stacker.
Receiving
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
Do not turn the MFP off until the MFP returns
to Ready.
IP ADDRESS
upgrade
REINSTALL OUTPUT DEVICE
268
Chapter 12
The output device has been removed or is not Make sure the output bin, 3–bin mailbox, or
attached.
stapler/stacker is correctly installed on the
MFP.
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
REMOVE ALL
The MFP is executing a component test and
the component selected is Belt Only.
Remove all print cartridges.
The MFP is executing a disable cartridge
check or component test where the
component selected is the cartridge motor.
Remove one print cartridge.
PRINT CARTRIDGES
To exit press Stop
Remove at least one
print cartridge.
To exit press Stop
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
The identified print cartridge has reached the 1.
end of life and the COLOR SUPPLY OUT
setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to 2.
STOP AT LOW. Printing can continue.
3.
alternates with
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
For help press
ENWW
To continue, touch OK.
Open the top and side covers and then
open the image transfer unit.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
To continue touch "OK".
REPLACE FUSER KIT
Order the appropriate print cartridge.
The fuser kit has reached the end of its life.
Replace the fuser kit. Printing can continue
but print quality might be reduced.
4.
Remove the identified print cartridge.
5.
Install a new print cartridge.
6.
Close the image transfer unit and then
close the top and front covers.
7.
Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
1.
Open the top cover.
2.
Grasp the purple handles on the fuser
unit.
3.
Remove the old fuser unit from the MFP.
4.
Install a new fuser unit and secure with
thumb screws.
5.
Close the top cover.
6.
Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
Control panel messages
269
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
REPLACE FUSER KIT
The fuser is nearing the end of its useful life
and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in
the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP
AT LOW. Printing can continue.
1.
Order the fuser kit.
2.
To continue printing, touch OK.
3.
To replace the fuser kit, perform the
following steps:
For help press
alternates with
REPLACE FUSER KIT
●
Open the top cover.
●
Grasp the purple handles on the
fuser unit.
●
Remove the old fuser unit from the
MFP.
●
Install the new fuser unit.
●
Close the top cover.
●
Supplies ordering information is
also available from the embedded
Web server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
To continue touch "OK".
REPLACE STAPLER
●
The stapler cartridge contains fewer
than 30 staples and should not be used.
The stapler cartridge needs to be
replaced.
●
There is no stapler cartridge installed.
CARTRIDGE
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status touch "OK".
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
●
Replace the stapler cartridge. For more
information, see Supplies and
accessories.
●
Install a stapler cartridge.
Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful 1.
life. If the supplies affected are cartridges
2.
only, printing has stopped because the
REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the
SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT
3.
OUT. If the affected supplies are cartridges
only, printing cannot continue.
4.
5.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
OVERRIDE AT OUT is set in the REPLACE
SUPPLIES menu and at least one cartridge
is Out. Printing can continue.
Override in use
Press Status
alternates with
<Current status message>
270
Chapter 12
Solving problems
Touch SUPPLIES STATUS menu.
Scroll to the specific supply that has a
problem.
Touch
to view help for the supply.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
Replace the indicated print cartridge.
CAUTION Using the Override
mode may result in unsatisfactory
print quality. HP recommends
replacing the supply when the
REPLACE SUPPLIES message
displays. HP Premium Protection
Warranty coverage ends when a
supply is used in Override mode.
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful
life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in 1.
the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP
2.
AT LOW.
To continue touch "OK".
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Using black only
Press Status
Recommended action
Touch SUPPLIES STATUS menu.
Scroll to the specific supply that has a
problem.
3.
Touch
4.
Use the scroll bar to step through the
instructions.
5.
Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
to view help for the supply.
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK is set in the
Replace the indicated print cartridge.
COLOR SUPPLY OUT menu and a color
print cartridge is Out. Printing can continue in
black only.
alternates with
<Current status message>
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
alternates with
The transfer unit is at end of life. Printing can 1.
continue but print quality might be reduced.
2.
Open the top and side covers.
Lower the transfer unit by pulling the
green handle at the top of the unit
downward.
3.
Depress the small blue latches located
on either side of the bottom of the
transfer unit and lift the unit out of the
MFP.
4.
Install the new transfer unit.
5.
Close the front and top covers.
6.
Supplies ordering information is also
available from the embedded Web
server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
1.
The transfer unit is nearing the end of its
useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES
setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to 2.
STOP AT LOW.
3.
Order the transfer kit.
To continue printing, touch OK.
To replace the transfer kit, perform the
following steps:
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
●
Open the top and side covers.
●
Lower the transfer unit by pulling
the green handle at the top of the
unit downward.
●
Depress the small blue latches
located on either side of the bottom
of the transfer unit and lift the unit
out of the MFP.
To continue touch "OK".
ENWW
Control panel messages
271
Control panel message
Description
Request accepted
Recommended action
●
Install the new transfer unit.
●
Close the front and top covers.
●
Supplies ordering information is
also available from the embedded
Web server. See Using the
embedded Web server for more
information.
The MFP has accepted a request to print an
internal page, but the current job must finish
printing before the internal page will print.
No action necessary.
The firmware upgrade was not completed
successfully.
Attempt upgrade again.
The MFP is restoring external accessory
settings in response to a user request.
No action necessary.
Restoring...
The MFP is restoring settings. This message
is displayed during the execution of a restore
action, such as RESTORE COLOR
VALUES.
No action necessary.
Restoring...
The MFP is restoring factory settings.
No action necessary.
A component test is in progress; the
component selected is the <color> cartridge
motor.
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
The MFP is executing a component test and
the component selected is a motor.
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
No action necessary.
DO NOT POWER OFF
A storage device is being sanitized. Do not
turn the MFP off. When the process is
complete, the MFP will automatically restart.
SCAN CARRIAGE LOCKED Check lock
switch, cycle power.
The flatbed scanner carriage is locked for
shipping.
Turn off the MFP, unlock the scanner
carriage, and turn on the MFP.
Scan Failure Press "START" to rescan
The scan was unsuccessful and the
document needs to be rescanned.
If necessary, reposition the document to
rescan it, and then press Start.
Setting saved
A menu selection has been saved.
No action necessary.
SIZE MISMATCH
The tray is loaded with paper that is longer or
shorter in the feed direction than the size
configured for the tray.
1.
Adjust the side and rear media guides
against the paper.
2.
If necessary, touch OKafter the tray is
closed to change the paper size or type
configuration to match the size or type
of paper loaded in the tray.
please wait
Resend
upgrade
Restoring...
[accessory #]
factory settings
Rotating <COLOR>
motor
To exit press Stop
Rotating motor
To exit press Stop
SANITIZING DISK X% COMPLETE
TRAY X=paperShort
For help press
alternates with
Ready
Sleep mode on
272
Chapter 12
The MFP is in sleep mode. A button press,
receipt of printable data, or an error condition
will clear this message.
Solving problems
No action necessary.
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
STACKER COVER OPEN
The top cover of the stacker unit is open. The Close the top cover and resend the job.
unit cannot function.
STAPLER DOOR OPEN
The stapler module door is open. The stapler/ Close the stapler module door.
stacker cannot operate in this condition. The
amber light on the stapler/stacker is blinking.
STAPLER DOOR OPEN
The top cover of the stapler unit is open. The Close the top cover and resend the job.
unit cannot function.
STAPLER LOW
Fewer than 20 usable staples remain in the
stapler cartridge. The status light is solid
green.
Order and install a new stapler cartridge. For
information about replacing the stapler
cartridge, see Supplies and accessories.
The stapler in the stapler/stacker is out of
staples. The MFP behavior depends on
how STAPLES OUT is configured in the
Output Setup submenu.
●
If STAPLES OUT=STOP, the MFP
stops printing until you refill the stapler
or touch OK. This is the default setting.
●
If STAPLES OUT=CONTINUE, the
MFP continues, but the job is not
stapled.
ON STAPLES
STAPLES OUT
Recommended action
Replace the stapler cartridge. For more
information, see Supplies and accessories.
The Digital Sending Service at <IP
Address> does not service this MFP.
Contact administrator.
The MFP cannot communicate with the
specified IP address.
The Digital Sending Service must be
upgraded to support this version of the
MFP firmware. Contact administrator.
The Digital Sending Service is not supported Check the firmware version. Contact the
by the version of the firmware that is currently network administrator.
installed for the MFP.
TOO MANY PAGES
The maximum number of sheets that the
stapler can staple is 30, regardless of paper
type or weight. The print job finishes printing
but is not stapled.
Manually staple print jobs that contain more
than 30 sheets.
TOP BIN
The output bin is full. The amber light on the
stapler/stacker is blinking.
Remove paper from the output bin.
TOP DOOR OPEN
The jam access door is open. The stapler/
Close the jam access door.
stacker cannot operate in this condition. The
amber light on the stapler/stacker is blinking.
Transfer unit can
The cartridge is either not installed or not
correctly installed in the MFP.
IN JOB TO STAPLE
Verify the IP address. Contact the network
administrator.
1.
Open the top and side covers and then
open the image transfer unit.
be easily damaged.
CAUTION The image
transfer unit can be easily
damaged.
alternates with
FOR HELP TOUCH ?
The supplies gauge will display the
consumption levels of print cartridges.
TRAY X EMPTY
ENWW
The specified tray is empty and the current
job does not need this tray to print.
2.
Insert the print cartridge and make sure
that it is fully seated.
3.
Close the image transfer unit and then
close the top and side covers.
4.
If the error persists, contact HP support
at http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
Control panel messages
273
Control panel message
Description
Recommended action
The specified tray is open or not closed
completely.
Close the tray.
The size selected from the menu has been
saved.
No action is necessary.
The paper type loaded in the tray does not
match the paper type configured for the tray.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against
the paper.
2.
If necessary, touch OK after the tray is
closed to change the paper size or type
configuration to match the paper loaded
in the tray.
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
Ready
TRAY X OPEN
For help press
alternates with
Ready
TRAY XX SIZE= <SIZE>
Setting saved
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY X=[TYPE]
For help press
alternates with
Ready
Unable to mopy job
The print job cannot be mopied because of a
memory, disk, or configuration problem. Only
one copy will be produced.
alternates with
Install additional memory in the MFP or install
a disk drive in the MFP.
Processing...
UNABLE TO SEND
To temporarily hide this message in order to
fax or send to e-mail, touch IGNORE. If the
message persists, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the HP
support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/
suppport/clj4730mfp.
Unable to send Fax. Please check fax
configuration.
The MFP was unable to send the fax.
UNABLE TO SEND JOB
Unable to Store Job
Contact the network administrator.
To temporarily hide this message in order to
fax or send to e-mail, touch IGNORE. If the
message persists, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. See the HP
support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/
suppport/clj4730mfp.
A job cannot be stored because of a memory, Install additional memory in the MFP, or
disk, or configuration problem.
install a disk drive into the MFP. If a disk drive
is installed, delete previously stored print
jobs.
JOB NAME
alternates with
Processing...
The MFP is offering a selection of alternate
paper to use for the print job.
USE TRAY X
1.
View tray configurations (type and size)
using the scroll bar.
2.
Touch OK to select a tray.
3.
To return to the previous message,
touch Back.
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To change touch
or
To use touch OK
274
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Control panel message
Description
Wait for printer
RAM disk settings have been changed before No action necessary.
the MFP automatically restarts, or external
device modes have changed or the MFP is
coming out of the diagnostics mode and will
automatically restart.
to reinitialize
Waiting for
Recommended action
The MFP is waiting for Tray 2 or an optional
tray to lift.
No action necessary.
The MFP is coming out of sleep mode.
Printing will continue as soon as warmup is
completed.
No action necessary.
tray X to lift
Warming up
ENWW
Control panel messages
275
Paper jams
Use this illustration to troubleshoot paper jams in the printer. For instructions on clearing paper jams,
see Clearing jams.
NOTE All areas of the MFP that might need to be opened to clear jams are equipped with green
handles for rapid identification.
Figure 12-1 Paper jam locations
276
1
ADF access cover
2
ADF input tray
3
ADF output tray
4
Duplexer cover
5
Upper right door
6
Fuser cover
7
Transfer unit
8
Duplex paper path
9
Middle right door
10
Paper Tray 1 (Multipurpose tray)
11
Drawer below Tray 1
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
12
Lower right door
13
Paper Trays 2, 3 and 4
14
Paper path
15
Output area
Paper jam recovery
This MFP automatically provides paper jam recovery, a feature that allows you to set whether the MFP
should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages. The options are:
●
AUTO — MFP will attempt to reprint jammed pages.
●
OFF — MFP will not attempt to reprint jammed pages.
NOTE During the recovery process, the MFP might reprint several good pages that were printed
before the paper jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.
To disable paper jam recovery
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch SYSTEM SETUP.
4.
Touch JAM RECOVERY.
5.
Touch OFF.
6.
Touch EXIT.
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you might want to disable paper jam recovery.
If paper jam recovery is disabled, the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted.
ENWW
Paper jams
277
Clearing jams
This section contains the following procedures for clearing jams:
●
Clearing jams in the right covers
●
Jam in Tray 1
●
Jam in Tray 2, 3, or 4
●
Jam in the stapler/stacker
●
Staple jams
●
Jam in the 3-bin mailbox
●
Other jams in the output accessory bridge
●
Jam in the ADF
Clearing jams in the right covers
278
1.
Using the handles, open the covers on the right side of the printer.
2.
If media is present in the upper area, grasp the media by both corners and pull down.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
3.
If media is present in the lower area, grasp the media by both corners and pull up.
NOTE If no media is present at these locations, continue to the next step.
ENWW
4.
Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down to open it.
5.
If media is present in the upper area, grasp the media by both corners and pull down.
Clearing jams
279
280
6.
If media is present in the lower area, grasp the media by both corners and pull up.
7.
Lift the green handle on the fuser cover to open the cover.
8.
Pull the fuser upward to remove any paper.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
9.
Lift the green handle on the duplexer cover to open it.
10. Remove any jammed paper.
11. Close the transfer unit.
ENWW
Clearing jams
281
12. Close the covers on the right side of the printer.
13. If the jam has not cleared, open the drawer below Tray 1 and remove any jammed paper.
14. Close the drawer.
15. If the jam still has not cleared, open the lower access door and remove any jammed paper.
16. Close the lower access door. If the jam has cleared, the print job will continue.
17. If the jam is still not cleared and you are printing from Tray 1, see Jam in Tray 2, 3, or 4.
282
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Jam in Tray 1
NOTE If the protective insert does not eject properly when the printer is first installed, follow
this procedure to clear the jam.
1.
Perform the steps in Clearing jams in the right covers.
2.
Remove loaded media.
3.
Remove any jammed paper from the tray.
4.
Reload the media.
5.
Verify that the media is located correctly and is not above the fill tabs.
6.
Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
Jam in Tray 2, 3, or 4
ENWW
1.
Perform the steps in Clearing jams in the right covers.
2.
Slide the indicated tray out and remove any jammed paper.
3.
Close the tray. If the jam is cleared, the print job will continue.
Clearing jams
283
284
4.
If the paper jam still does not clear, lift the tray and remove it from the MFP. The following diagram
shows an example of removing Tray 2.
5.
Remove any paper jam behind the tray. The following diagram shows a possible paper jam behind
Tray 2. Remove jams in Trays 3 and 4 following the same procedure.
6.
Insert the paper tray.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Jam in the stapler/stacker
1.
Push the release lever on the top of the stapler/stacker.
2.
Slide the stapler/stacker out.
3.
Remove any media between the stapler/stacker and the MFP.
4.
If the jam does not clear, see Other jams in the output accessory bridge.
To clear staple jams, see Staple jams.
ENWW
Clearing jams
285
Staple jams
Occasionally, staples become jammed in the stapler/stacker. If jobs are not being stapled correctly or
are not being stapled at all, use this procedure to clear staple jams.
286
1.
Turn off the MFP.
2.
Press and hold the release button on the top of the stapler/stacker. Pull the stapler/stacker away
from the MFP.
3.
Open the staple cartridge cover.
4.
To remove the staple cartridge, pull up on the green handle and pull out the staple cartridge.
5.
Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
6.
Remove the staples that protrude from the staple cartridge.
7.
Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.
8.
Reinsert the staple cartridge into the staple-cartridge holder, and push down on the green handle
until it snaps into place.
9.
Close the staple-cartridge cover, and slide the stapler/stacker into the MFP.
Jam in the 3-bin mailbox
1.
ENWW
Push the release button on the top of the 3-bin mailbox.
Clearing jams
287
288
2.
Slide the 3-bin mailbox out from the MFP.
3.
Open the cover on the top of the 3-bin mailbox.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
ENWW
4.
Remove any media inside the cover.
5.
Close the door and remove any media between the MFP and the 3-bin mailbox.
Clearing jams
289
Other jams in the output accessory bridge
If a 3-bin mailbox or a stapler/stacker is installed on the MFP, complete the following procedure to clear
a jam in the output accessory bridge.
290
1.
Open the cover to the output accessory bridge.
2.
Push down on the green lever, remove any media inside the output accessory bridge, and push
the green lever up.
3.
Close the cover to the output accessory bridge.
4.
If the jam still does not clear, grasp the handle on the output accessory bridge and slide the output
accessory bridge away from the MFP.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
5.
Look for paper on top of the output accessory bridge.
6.
Slide the output accessory bridge back into the MFP.
7.
Slide the 3-bin mailbox or stapler/stacker back into the MFP.
Jam in the ADF
1.
ENWW
Open the ADF cover.
Clearing jams
291
292
2.
Remove any jammed media.
3.
Close the ADF cover.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Media-handling problems
Use only media that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide. For ordering information, see Supplies and accessories.
For paper specifications for this MFP, see Supported media weights and sizes.
Printer feeds multiple sheets
Printer feeds multiple sheets
Cause
Solution
The input tray is overfilled.
Remove excess media from the input tray.
Print media is sticking together.
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and
then reload it into the tray.
NOTE Do not fan media. Fanning can cause static
electricity, which can cause media to stick together.
Media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.
Use only media that meets HP media specifications for this
MFP. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Trays are not properly adjusted.
Make sure that the rear media-length guide indicates the
length of media being used.
Printer feeds incorrect page size
Printer feeds incorrect page size
ENWW
Cause
Solution
The correct size media is not loaded in the input tray.
Load the correct size media in the input tray.
The correct size media is not selected in the software
application or printer driver.
Confirm that the settings in the application and printer driver
are appropriate, since the application settings override the
printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver
settings override the control panel settings. For more
information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
The correct size media for Tray 1 is not selected in the MFP
control panel.
From the control panel, select the correct size media for Tray
1.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the
paper.
Media-handling problems
293
Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Cause
Solution
You are using a driver for a different printer. For more
information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
Use a driver for this printer.
The specified tray is empty.
Load media in the specified tray.
Tray behavior for the requested tray is set to FIRST in the
SYSTEM SETUP submenu of the CONFIGURE DEVICE
menu.
Change the setting to EXCLUSIVELY.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Media does not feed automatically
Media does not feed automatically
Cause
Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software application.
Load Tray 1 with media, or, if the media is loaded, touch OK.
The correct size media is not loaded.
Load the correct size media.
The input tray is empty.
Load media into the input tray.
Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed.
Open the MFP and remove any media in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams. See Paper jams.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the rear and width media guides are touching the
paper.
Media does not feed from Tray 2, 3, or 4
Media does not feed from Tray 2, 3, or 4
294
Cause
Solution
The correct size media is not loaded.
Load the correct size media.
The input tray is empty.
Load media in the input tray.
The correct media type for the input tray is not selected in the
MFP control panel.
From the MFP control panel, select the correct media type for
the input tray.
Media from a previous jam has not been completely removed.
Open the MFP and remove any media in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams. See Paper jams.
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.
The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Media does not feed from Tray 2, 3, or 4
Cause
Solution
trays. For more information, see Printer drivers or Printer
drivers for Macintosh computers.
An optional tray is incorrectly installed.
Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
MFP.
The media size is not configured correctly for the input tray.
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine
the media size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed
Cause
Solution
The correct media type is not specified in the software or printer
driver.
Verify that the correct media type is selected in the software or
printer driver.
The input tray is overfilled.
Remove excess media from the input tray. Do not load more
than 200 sheets of glossy paper or glossy film, or more than
100 transparencies in Tray 2, 3, or 4. Do not exceed the
maximum stack height for Tray 1.
Media in another input tray is the same size as the
transparencies, and the MFP is defaulting to the other tray.
Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
glossy paper is selected in the software application or printer
driver. Use the MFP control panel to configure the tray to the
media type loaded. For more information, see Printer drivers
or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers.
The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not
configured correctly for type.
Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or
glossy paper is selected in the software application or printer
driver. Use the MFP control panel to configure the tray to the
media type loaded. See Configuring input trays.
Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported
media specifications.
Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this
MFP. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP
ENWW
Cause
Solution
Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can
feed envelopes.
Load envelopes into Tray 1.
Envelopes are curled or damaged.
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.
Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too
high.
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled
environment.
Media-handling problems
295
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the MFP
Cause
Solution
Envelope orientation is incorrect.
Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly. See Configuring
input trays.
This MFP does not support the envelopes being used.
See Supported media weights and sizes or the HP LaserJet
Printer Family Print Media Guide.
Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.
Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.
Output is curled or wrinkled
Output is curled or wrinkled
Cause
Solution
Media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.
Use only media that meets the HP media specifications for this
MFP. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Media is damaged or in poor condition.
Remove media from the input tray and load media that is in
good condition.
Printer is operating in an excessively humid environment.
Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications. See Environmental specifications.
You are printing large, solid-filled areas.
Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.
Media used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed
moisture.
Remove media and replace it with media from a fresh,
unopened package.
Media has poorly cut edges.
Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan media. If the
problem persists, replace the media.
The specific media type was not configured for the tray or
selected in the software.
Configure the software for the media (see the software
documentation). Configure the tray for the media, see
Configuring input trays.
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly
296
Cause
Solution
You are trying to duplex on unsupported media.
Verify that the media is supported for duplex printing. See
Supported media weights and sizes.
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.
Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or
letterhead.
Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead or printed side up and the bottom of the page
feeding into the MFP. For Tray 2, 3, and 4, load these media
printed side down with the top of the page toward the back of
the MFP.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Understanding MFP messages
Messages appear on the control-panel display to relay the normal status of the MFP (such as
Processing...), or an error condition that needs attention. Control panel messages lists messages that
require attention, or that might raise questions. Messages are listed in alphabetical order, with numeric
messages at the beginning of the list. Not all messages are listed because some (such as Ready) are
self-explanatory.
NOTE Some messages are affected by the AUTO CONTINUE and CLEARABLE
WARNINGS settings in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, SYSTEM SETUP submenu, on the
control panel. See System setup submenu for more information.
Using the MFP help system
This MFP features a help system on the control panel that provides instructions for resolving most MFP
errors. Certain control-panel messages alternate with instructions about using the help system.
Whenever a ? appears in an error message or a message alternates with FOR HELP TOUCH ?, touch
the (Help) button to view the help.
To exit the help system, touch the
(Help) button.
If a message persists
ENWW
●
Some messages (for example, requests to load a tray or a message that a previous print job
remains in the MFP memory) allow you to touch CONTINUE to print, or to press Stop to clear the
job and eliminate the message.
●
If a message persists after performing all of the recommended actions, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. (See the HP support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/
clj4730mfp.)
Understanding MFP messages
297
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and
stapler/stacker
The following table lists errors that can occur in the 3-bin mailbox or stapler/stacker and that are reported
by the accessory lights and on the control-panel display.
Accessory lights
Light
Explanation and solution
Solid green
●
The accessory is receiving power and is ready.
●
The stapler is low on staples. STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES appears on the
control-panel display. Fewer than 20 staples remain in the staple cartridge.
Replace the staple cartridge. See Loading staples.
●
The number of pages in the job exceeds the 30-page limit for stapling. TOO
MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE appears on the MFP control-panel display.
For jobs that have more than 30 pages, staple the pages manually.
Solid amber
●
The accessory is experiencing a hardware malfunction. 66.XX.X OUTPUT
DEVICE FAILURE appears on the control-panel display. (See the section for
this message in Control panel message types.)
Blinking amber
●
The accessory has a staple jam. STAPLER JAM appears on the control-panel
display. (See the section for this message in Control panel message types.)
●
The accessory has a paper jam, or a sheet needs to be removed from the unit,
even if the sheet is not jammed. 13.XX.YY JAM IN TOP OUTPUT BIN appears
on the control-panel display. (See the section for this message in Control panel
message types.)
●
The bin is full. STACKER BIN FULL appears on the control-panel display. (See
the section for Output Bin X Full in Control panel message types.)
●
The stapler is out of staples. REPLACE STAPLER CARTRIDGE appears on
the control-panel display. (See the section for this message in Control panel
message types.)
●
The jam-access cover is open. OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN appears on the
control-panel display. (See the section for this message in Control panel
message types.)
●
The stapler unit is open. OUTPUT PAPER PATH OPEN appears on the
control-panel display. Make sure the staple-cartridge cover is completely
closed. (See the section for this message in Control panel message types.)
●
The firmware is corrupt. CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN EXTERNAL
ACCESSORY appears on the control-panel display. (See the section for this
message in Control panel message types.)
●
The MFP might be in sleep mode. Press any button on the control panel.
●
The accessory is not receiving power. Turn the MFP power off. Check that the
accessory is properly seated on and connected to the MFP, without any gaps
between the MFP and the accessory. Turn the MFP power on.
Off
298
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Light
Explanation and solution
●
The accessory might have been disconnected and reconnected while the MFP
power was on. REINSTALL OUTPUT DEVICE appears on the control-panel
display. Reconnect the cable on the accessory.
●
The job might have stalled between the MFP and the accessory.
Processing... appears on the control-panel display. Turn the MFP power off
and then on.
Replacing accessories or accessory components
If you are unable to resolve problems that are indicated by the 3-bin mailbox or stapler/stacker accessory
lights, contact the HP Customer Care Center. (See HP customer care.) If an HP Customer Care Center
representative recommends replacement of the 3-bin mailbox, the stapler/stacker, or the staple
cartridge, see Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies and Part numbers for information about
ordering a replacement.
ENWW
●
For the steps to replace the entire 3-bin mailbox or the entire stapler/stacker, see the install guide
that came with the accessory.
●
For the steps to replace the staple cartridge, see Loading staples.
Understanding accessory lights for the 3-bin mailbox and stapler/stacker
299
Understanding lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the MFP is functioning correctly.
1
Heartbeat LED
2
HP Jetdirect LEDs (This LED exists only if HP Jetdirect is installed.)
3
Fax LED
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED
is off, a link has failed.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure
the link settings on the embedded print server by using the MFP control-panel menus.
1.
Touch Menu.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch I/O.
4.
Touch EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU
5.
Touch LINK SPEED. Select the appropriate link speed.
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the MFP is initializing after
you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the MFP has finished the initialization
sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. Contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. See the HP support flyer, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
300
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Fax LED
The LED on the Analog Fax Accessory indicates that it is functioning correctly. If the LED is off, see the
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for information about solving the problem.
ENWW
Understanding lights on the formatter
301
Color printing problems
Printout color error
Table 12-1 Printing black instead of color
cause and solution
Cause
Solution
Color mode is not selected in the software application or
printer driver.
Select Color mode instead of Grayscale or Monochrome
mode in the software application or printer driver. For more
information, see Printer drivers or Printer drivers for Macintosh
computers.
The correct printer driver is not selected in your software
application.
Select the correct printer driver.
No color appears on the configuration page.
Consult your service representative.
Incorrect shade
Table 12-2 Incorrect shade
cause and solution
Cause
Solution
The media does not meet the specifications for this MFP.
For information on media specifications, see Supported media
weights and sizes
You are operating the MFP in excessively humid conditions.
Verify that the MFP’s environment is within humidity
specifications. See Environmental specifications.
NOTE For more information about color quality
problems, see Calibrating the MFP.
Missing color
Table 12-3 Missing color
cause and solution
302
Cause
Solution
Defective HP print cartridge.
Replace the cartridge.
A non-HP cartridge might be installed.
Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print cartridge.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Cartridge error
Table 12-4 Inconsistent colors after installing a print cartridge
cause and solution
Cause
Solution
Another print cartridge might be low.
Check the supplies gauge on the control panel or print a
supplies status page. See Checking the MFP configuration.
Print cartridges might be improperly installed.
Verify that each print cartridge is installed properly.
A non-HP cartridge might be installed.
Ensure that you are using a genuine HP print cartridge.
Color match error
Table 12-5 Printed colors do not match screen colors
cause and solution
Cause
Solution
Extremely light screen colors are not being printed.
The software application might interpret extremely light colors
as white. If so, avoid using extremely light colors.
Extremely dark screen colors are being printed in black.
The software application might interpret extremely dark colors
as black. If so, avoid using extremely dark colors.
The colors on the computer screen differ from the MFP output.
On the printer driver’s Color Control tab, select Screen
Match.
NOTE Several factors can influence your ability to
match printed colors to those on your screen. These
factors include print media, overhead lighting,
software applications, operating system palettes,
monitors, and video cards and drivers.
ENWW
Color printing problems
303
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
This section helps you define print quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often print quality
problems can be handled easily by making sure that the MFP is properly maintained, using print media
that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.
Print quality problems associated with media
Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media.
●
Use paper that meets HP paper specifications. See Supported media weights and sizes.
●
The surface of the media is too smooth. Use media that meets HP paper specifications. See
Supported media weights and sizes.
●
The printer driver setting might be incorrect. Be sure that you have selected the correct driver setting
for the paper that you are using.
●
The print mode might be set incorrectly, or the paper might not meet recommended specifications.
For more information, see Supported media weights and sizes.
●
The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only
transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.
●
The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source
or from an unopened ream of paper.
●
Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream
of paper.
●
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this
solves your problem, consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets
the specifications for this MFP. See Supported media weights and sizes.
Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies might display any of the image quality problems that any other type of media
could display, as well as defects specific to transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are
pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked by the media-handling components.
NOTE Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them.
●
On the printer driver’s Paper tab, select Transparency as the media type. Also, make sure that
the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
●
Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this MFP. See Supported media weights
and sizes.
For ordering information, see Supplies and accessories.
304
●
Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots
and smudges.
●
Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies
sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
●
The selected colors are undesirable when printed. Select different colors in the software application
or printer driver.
●
If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector instead.
Print quality problems associated with the environment
The MFP is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions. Verify that the printing environment is
within specifications. See Environmental specifications.
Print quality problems associated with jams
●
Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path. See Paper jam recovery.
●
The MFP recently jammed. Print two to three pages to clean the MFP.
●
The media does not pass through the fuser causing image defects to appear on subsequent
documents. Print two to three pages to clean the MFP. However, if the problem persists see the
next section.
Print quality troubleshooting pages
The print quality troubleshooting pages provide information on aspects of the MFP that affect print
quality.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch DIAGNOSTICS.
3.
Touch PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
The message Printing... PQ troubleshooting appears on the display until the MFP finishes printing
the print quality troubleshooting information. The MFP returns to the Ready state after printing the print
quality troubleshooting information.
The print quality troubleshooting information includes one page for each color (black, magenta, cyan,
and yellow), MFP statistics related to print quality, instructions on interpreting the information, and
procedures to solve print quality problems.
If following the procedures recommended by the print quality troubleshooting pages do not improve print
quality, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Print quality troubleshooting tool
The print quality troubleshooting tool helps you identify and troubleshoot print quality issues for the
HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP. The tool includes solutions for many print quality issues, using standard
images to provide a common diagnostic environment. It is designed to provide intuitive, step-by-step
directions for printing troubleshooting pages that are used to isolate print quality problems and provide
possible solutions.
To find the print quality troubleshooting tool, go to the following quick URL: http://www.hp.com/go/
printquality/clj4730
Image defect examples
This section contains two tables: one table shows examples of common print-quality problems, and the
other table shows examples of common copy-quality problems that can occur when using the automatic
ENWW
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
305
document feeder (ADF). These tables also contain remedies for correcting the problem. If you still have
problems after trying the suggested remedies, contact HP Customer Support. (See HP customer
care.)
Table 12-6 Defects that can occur during printing
306
Chapter 12
Horizontal lines or streaks
Misaligned colors
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
●
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
Calibrate the MFP. See
Calibrating the MFP and
follow the instructions.
Vertical lines
Repetitive defects
●
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
Color fade in all colors
Color fade in one color
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Calibrate the MFP.
●
Calibrate the MFP.
●
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
Solving problems
ENWW
Table 12-6 Defects that can occur during printing (continued)
Fingerprints and media
dents
●
Make sure to use
supported media.
●
Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
●
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
Smeared toner
●
ENWW
Make sure to use
supported media.
Loose toner
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Make sure to use
supported media.
●
Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●
Make sure that the
media is loaded correctly
and that the size guides
are touching the edges
of the stack of media.
Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
White areas (dropouts) on
page
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Make sure to use
supported media.
●
Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
●
Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
307
Table 12-6 Defects that can occur during printing (continued)
308
Chapter 12
Solving problems
●
Calibrate the MFP.
●
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
ENWW
Table 12-6 Defects that can occur during printing (continued)
Media damage (wrinkles,
curl, creases, tears)
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Make sure to use
supported media.
●
Make sure that the
media is loaded
correctly.
●
Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●
Make sure that the
media you are using
does not have any
wrinkles or dents from
handling, and that the
media is not
contaminated with
visible fingerprints or
other foreign
substances.
●
Make sure that the
following supplies are
seated correctly:
●
●
fuser
●
transfer belt
Specks or stray toner
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Make sure to use
supported media.
●
Make sure that the
media type and size for
the tray are set correctly
in the control panel for
the media that you are
using.
●
Calibrate the MFP.
●
Print the Print Quality
Troubleshooting Pages
(see Calibrating the
MFP) and follow the
diagnostic procedure
listed on the first page to
help isolate the defect to
a particular component.
Inspect the jam areas
and remove any
undetected jammed or
torn media.
Skewed, stretched, or offcenter page
ENWW
●
Make sure that the
operation and location
requirements of the MFP
are met.
●
Make sure to use
supported media.
●
Make sure that the
media is loaded
correctly.
●
For problems with page
skew, turn over the stack
of media and rotate the
stack 180 degrees.
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
309
Table 12-6 Defects that can occur during printing (continued)
●
Make sure that the fuser
and transfer belt are
seated correctly.
●
Inspect the jam areas
and remove any
undetected jammed or
torn media.
●
If printing from the
multipurpose tray, make
sure that the side guides
are set correctly.
Table 12-7 Defects that can occur when using the ADF
Blank page
Horizontal lines
1.
Remove and then
reinsert the original page
into the ADF, making
sure it is placed face-up.
1.
Clean the ADF. See
Cleaning the ADF
delivery system.
2.
2.
If several pages are
feeding at the same time,
check the ADF
separation pad and
rollers for damage. If the
rollers are dirty, clean
them. See Cleaning the
ADF delivery system. If
the ADF separation pad
or rollers are worn,
replace them.
Verify that no paper is on
top of the scanner glass
or stuck to the bottom of
the scanner lid.
3.
If the mylar strip is dirty
or worn, replace it.
Replacement mylar
strips are stored in an
envelope that is
underneath the white,
vinly ADF backing.
Follow the instructions
that are in the envelope.
Page skew
Vertical lines
The MFP has the following
skew specifications:
1.
Clean the ADF. See
Cleaning the ADF
delivery system.
2.
Verify that no paper is on
top of the scanner glass
or stuck to the bottom of
the scanner lid.
3.
If the mylar strip is dirty
or worn, replace it.
Replacement mylar
strips are stored in an
envelope that is
underneath the white,
vinyl ADF backing.
Follow the instructions
that are in the envelope.
●
●
310
Chapter 12
Cut-sheet paper;
simplex and duplex: less
than 1.5 mm
(0.06 inches) over a
260 mm (10.24 inches)
length
Envelopes: less than
3.3 mm (0.13 inches)
Solving problems
ENWW
Table 12-7 Defects that can occur when using the ADF (continued)
over a 220 mm
(9.66 inches) length
1.
Make sure the ADF input
tray guides are adjusted
so that they are lightly
touching the sides of the
paper stack.
2.
If the mylar strip is
dislodged, folded, or
misinstalled, verify it is
correctly installed. If the
mylar strip is worn,
replace it. Replacement
mylar strips are stored in
an envelope that is
underneath the white,
vinly ADF backing.
Follow the instructions
that are in the envelope.
3.
Clean the ADF rollers.
See Cleaning the ADF
delivery system.
4.
If the problem persists,
calibrate the scanner.
See Calibrating the
scanner.
Image shifted
Unexpected image
An image that is shifted on the
page horizontally, vertically,
or both ways indicates that the
scanner is incorrectly
calibrated. See Calibrating
the scanner.
If the copy does not look at all
like the original document,
make sure that no media is on
the flatbed glass from a
previous copy job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality, such
as streaking.
ENWW
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
311
Clean the scanner by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based
surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner glass. Spray or pour the
cleaner onto the cleaning cloth. Do not spray or pour the cleaner onto the scanner glass.
Calibrating the MFP
The MFP automatically calibrates and cleans at various times to maintain the highest level of print
quality. The user might also request the MFP to calibrate via the MFP’s control panel, using QUICK
CALIBRATE NOW or FULL CALIBRATE NOW located in the CALIBRATION and PRINT QUALITY
menu. QUICK CALIBRATE NOW is used for D-Half color tone calibration. If color density or tone seems
wrong, Quick Calibration can be run. Full Calibration includes the Quick Calibrate routines and adds
Drum Phase Calibration, Color Plane Registration (CPR), and copy parameter calibration routines. If
color layers (black, magenta, cyan, and yellow) on the printed page seem to be shifted from one another,
FULL CALIBRATE NOW should be run.
The HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP incorporates a new feature to skip calibration when appropriate,
thereby making the MFP available more quickly. For example, if the MFP is powered off and on quickly
(within 20 seconds), calibration is not needed and will be skipped. In this case, the MFP will reach
the Ready state approximately one minute sooner.
While the MFP is calibrating and cleaning, the MFP will pause printing for the amount of time it takes to
complete the calibration or cleaning. For most calibrations and cleaning, the MFP will not interrupt a
print job, but will wait for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning.
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3.
Touch PRINT QUALITY.
4.
Touch QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.
OR
To perform a full calibration, use FULL CALIBRATE NOW instead of QUICK CALIBRATE NOW in
steps 3 and 4.
312
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Repetitive defect ruler
If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place
the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect
indicates which component needs to be replaced.
1
First occurrence of the defect (the distance from the top of the page to the defect) might vary.
2
Print cartridge 34.3 mm (1.35 inches)
3
Print cartridge or transfer roller (if the defect occurs in only one color, the defective part is the print cartridge; if the defect
occurs in all colors, the defective part is the ETB) 37.7 mm (1.48 inches)
4
Print cartridge 42.7 mm (1.68 inches)
5
ETB 75 mm (2.95 inches)
6
Fuser 76.0 mm (2.99 inches)
7
Fuser 81.0 mm (3.19 inches)
8
Print cartridge 94.2 mm (3.71 inches)
To identify if the print cartridge is the problem, insert a print cartridge from another HP Color LaserJet
4730mfp series, if one is available, before ordering a new print cartridge.
If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the print cartridge before replacing
the fuser.
ENWW
Correcting print quality and copy quality problems
313
Solving e-mail problems
If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the
SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration page to find the current
SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Configuration page. Use the following procedures to check
if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.
To validate the SMTP gateway address
NOTE This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
1.
Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
2.
Type telnet followed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port
over which the MFP is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123 25 where
"123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address.
3.
Press Enter. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the message Could
not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed.
4.
If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
To validate the LDAP gateway address
NOTE This procedure is for Windows operating systems.
314
1.
Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type LDAP:// immediately followed by the LDAP
gateway address. For example, type LDAP://12.12.12.12 where "12.12.12.12" represents the
LDAP gateway address.
2.
Press Enter. If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens.
3.
If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Solving network connectivity problems
If the MFP is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to
resolve the problem.
Troubleshooting network printing problems
NOTE HP recommends that you use the MFP CD-ROM to install and set up the MFP on a
network.
●
Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the MFP's RJ45 connector.
●
Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit. See Understanding lights on the formatter.
●
Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Configuration page). If an
HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints a second page that
shows the network settings and status.
NOTE The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/
SPX, Novell Netware, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and
network parameters are set correctly.
On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:
●
Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready".
●
Protocol status is "Ready".
●
An IP address is listed.
●
The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you
are not sure which method is correct.
●
Try printing the job from another computer.
●
To verify that a MFP works with a computer, use a parallel cable to connect it directly to a computer.
You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed
correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.
●
Contact your network administrator for assistance.
Verifying communication over the network
If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the MFP, use this procedure to verify
that the MFP is communicating with other devices on the network.
ENWW
Solving network connectivity problems
315
To verify communication over the network
1.
Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. An MS-DOS command prompt opens.
-orMac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The terminal
window opens.
316
2.
Type ping followed by the IP address. For example, type ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. If the
MFP is communicating over the network, the response is a list of replies from the MFP.
3.
Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution
protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type arp -a. Find the IP address in the list and compare
its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page
in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the addresses match, all network
communications are valid.
4.
If you cannot verify that the MFP is communicating over the network, contact the network
administrator.
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS v9.x or Mac OS X.
Solving problems with Mac OS v9.x
NOTE Setup for USB and IP printing is performed through the Desktop Printer Utility. The printer
will not appear in the Chooser.
Table 12-8 Problems with Mac OS v9.x
The printer name or IP address does not appear in the Desktop Printer Utility.
Cause
Solution
The printer might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The wrong connection type might be selected.
Make sure that Printer (USB) or Printer (LPR) is selected in the
Desktop Printer Utility, depending on the type of connection that
exists between the printer and the computer.
The wrong printer name or IP address is being used.
In order to check the printer name or IP address, print a configuration
page. Verify that the printer name or IP address on the configuration
page matches the printer name or IP address in the Desktop Printer
Utility.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for the printer does not appear as a selection in the Desktop Printer Utility.
Cause
Solution
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the LaserJet 4700 PPD is in the following hard-drive
folder: System Folder/Extensions/Printer
Descriptions. If necessary, reinstall the software. See the getting
started guide for instructions.
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard drive folder: System
Folder/Extensions/Printer Descriptions. Reinstall the
software. See the getting started guide for instructions.
A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.
Cause
Solution
The print queue might be stopped.
Restart the print queue. Select the desktop printer icon, open the
Printing menu in the top menu bar, and then click Start Print Queue.
The wrong printer name or IP address is being used. Another printer
that has the same or a similar name or IP address might have
received your print job.
Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name or IP
address. Verify that the printer name or IP address on the
configuration page matches the printer name or IP address in the
Desktop Printer Utility.
The printer might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the Ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
ENWW
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
317
Table 12-8 Problems with Mac OS v9.x (continued)
A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.
Solution
Cause
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
You cannot use the computer while the printer is printing.
Cause
Solution
Background Printing has not been selected.
For LaserWriter 8.6 and later: Turn on background printing by
selecting Print Desktop on the File menu and then clicking
Background Printing in the pop-up menu.
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.
Cause
Solution
This problem occurs with some programs.
●
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.
●
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to
the printer before printing.
Your document is not printing with New York, Geneva, or Monaco fonts.
Cause
Solution
The printer might be substituting fonts.
Click Options in the Page Setup dialog box to clear substituted fonts.
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.
Solution
Cause
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not installed. When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this
software is available from the Apple Web site.
318
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Table 12-8 Problems with Mac OS v9.x (continued)
When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Desktop Printer Utility or the Apple System Profiler after the
driver is selected.
Solution
Cause
This problem is caused by either a software or hardware component. Software troubleshooting
●
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.
●
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS v9.1 or
later.
●
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software
from Apple.
NOTE The iMac and Blue G3 desktop Macintosh systems
meet all of the requirements to connect to a USB device.
Hardware troubleshooting
●
Check that the printer is turned on.
●
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.
●
Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.
●
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the
chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host
computer.
●
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on
the host computer.
NOTE The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.
Solving problems with Mac OS X
Table 12-9 Problems with Mac OS X
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.
See the getting started guide for instructions.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide
for instructions.
ENWW
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
319
Table 12-9 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)
The printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name does not appear in the printer list in the Print Center or Printer Setup
Utility.
Cause
Solution
The printer might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The wrong connection type might be selected.
Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous is selected,
depending on the type of connection that exists between the printer
and the computer.
The wrong printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name is
being used.
Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP
address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the
printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print
Center or Printer Setup Utility.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
Cause
Solution
The printer might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The printer software might not have been installed or was installed
incorrectly.
Make sure that the printer PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.
See the getting started guide for instructions.
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide
for instructions.
The printer might not be ready.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the printer is on,
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different
port.
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.
A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.
Cause
Solution
The print queue might be stopped.
Restart the print queue. Open print monitor and select Start Jobs.
The wrong printer name or IP address is being used. Another printer
with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name
might have received your print job.
Print a configuration page in order to check the printer name, IP
address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the
320
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
Table 12-9 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)
A print job was not sent to the printer that you wanted.
Cause
Solution
printer name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print
Center or Printer Setup Utility.
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.
Cause
Solution
This problem occurs with some programs.
●
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to
the printer before printing.
●
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.
Cause
Solution
This error occurs when the software for USB printers is not installed. When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this
software is available from the Apple Web site.
When connected with a USB cable, the printer does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.
Cause
Solution
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware
component.
Software troubleshooting
●
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.
●
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10.1
or later.
●
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software
from Apple.
Hardware troubleshooting
●
Check that the printer is turned on.
●
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.
●
Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.
●
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host
computer.
●
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on
the host computer.
NOTE The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.
ENWW
Troubleshooting common Macintosh problems
321
322
Chapter 12
Solving problems
ENWW
A
ENWW
Working with memory and print server
cards
323
Printer memory and fonts
The MFP has two 200-pin DDR SDRAM slots. One slot is available for adding memory to the MFP. DDR
SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules.
NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series use 200-pin small outline dual
inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.
The MFP also has three flash memory card slots for MFP firmware, fonts, and other solutions.
●
The first flash memory card is reserved for MFP firmware.
NOTE Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked "Firmware
Slot".
●
The two additional flash memory card slots enable the user to add fonts and third-party solutions,
such as signatures and personalities. The slots are marked "Slot 2" and "Slot 3."
NOTE Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size.
CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into
the MFP. The MFP does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you
install a camera-type flash memory card, the control panel displays a message asking if you want
to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be
lost.
You might want to add more memory to the MFP if you often print complex graphics or PS documents,
or use many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the MFP to print multiple, collated copies
at the maximum speed.
NOTE Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) / dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) used
on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the MFP.
NOTE To order DDR SDRAM, see Supplies and accessories.
Before ordering additional memory, see how much memory is currently installed by printing a
configuration page.
Printing a configuration page
324
1.
Press Menu to enter the MENUS.
2.
Touch INFORMATION.
3.
Touch PRINT CONFIGURATION.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
Installing memory and fonts
You can install more memory for the MFP, and you can also install a font card to allow the MFP to print
characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.
CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an
antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then
touch bare metal on the MFP.
To install DDR memory DIMMs
ENWW
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
Installing memory and fonts
325
326
3.
Locate the gray formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
4.
Gently squeeze the tabs and pull them out of the formatter.
5.
Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the MFP. Place the formatter board
on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
ENWW
6.
To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the
DIMM slot, lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
7.
Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom
edge of the DIMM.
8.
Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an
angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the
metal contacts are not visible.
Installing memory and fonts
327
9.
Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.
NOTE If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the
DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are
using the correct type of DIMM.
10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into
the MFP.
NOTE To prevent damage to the formatter board, ensure the formatter board is aligned in
the tracks.
328
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
11. Reinsert the formatter pressure release tabs by squeezing them together and pushing them into
place.
12. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the MFP on.
13. If you installed a memory DIMM, go to Enabling memory.
To install a flash memory card
ENWW
Installing memory and fonts
329
CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into
the MFP. The MFP does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you
install a camera-type flash memory card, the control panel displays a message asking if you want
to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be
lost.
330
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
ENWW
3.
Locate the gray formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the MFP.
4.
Gently squeeze the tabs and pull them out of the formatter.
5.
Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the MFP. Place the formatter board
on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
Installing memory and fonts
331
6.
Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and push
it in the slot until it is fully seated.
CAUTION
Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.
NOTE The first flash memory slot marked "Firmware Slot" is reserved for firmware only.
Slots 2 and 3 should be used for all other solutions.
7.
Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board
back into the MFP.
NOTE To prevent damage to the formatter board, ensure the formatter board is aligned in
the tracks.
332
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
8.
Reinsert the formatter pressure release tabs by squeezing them together and pushing them into
place.
9.
Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the MFP on.
Enabling memory
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the MFP driver to recognize the newly added memory.
To enable memory for Windows 98 and Me
ENWW
1.
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers.
2.
Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3.
On the Configure tab, click More.
4.
In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5.
Click OK.
Installing memory and fonts
333
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP
334
1.
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2.
Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3.
On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).
4.
Select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5.
Click OK.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card
The HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp is equipped with an HP Jetdirect print server port. If desired, you can
install an additional I/O card in the available EIO slot.
To install an HP Jetdirect print server card
ENWW
1.
Turn the MFP off.
2.
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card
335
336
3.
Locate an open EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the
EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They
can be discarded.
4.
Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot.
5.
Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
6.
Connect the network cable.
7.
Reconnect the power cable, and turn the MFP on.
8.
Print a configuration page (see Supplies and accessories). In addition to an MFP configuration
page and a Supplies Status page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network
configuration and status information should also print.
If it does not print, uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated
in the slot.
9.
ENWW
Perform one of these steps:
●
Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for
instructions.
●
Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card
337
Installing EIO cards
Follow this procedure to install an EIO card.
To install EIO cards
1.
338
Turn off the MFP, and disconnect all of the cables.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
2.
Remove the two screws and cover plate from the EIO slot on the left side of the MFP.
NOTE Do not discard the screws or the cover plate. Save them for future use if you remove
the EIO card.
3.
ENWW
Install the EIO card in the EIO slot and tighten the screws.
Installing EIO cards
339
340
4.
Reconnect all the cables, and turn on the MFP.
5.
Print a configuration page to verify that the EIO card was successfully installed. See Configuration
page.
Appendix A
Working with memory and print server cards
ENWW
B
Supplies and accessories
This section provides information about ordering parts, supplies, and accessories. Use only parts and
accessories that are specifically designed for this MFP.
ENWW
●
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies
●
Part numbers
341
Ordering parts, accessories, and supplies
Several methods are available for ordering parts, supplies, and accessories:
●
Ordering directly from HP
●
Ordering through service or support providers
●
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers that are connected to a network)
Ordering directly from HP
You can obtain the following directly from HP:
●
Replacement parts. To order replacement parts in the U.S. see http://www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.
●
Supplies and accessories. To order supplies in the U.S., see http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
To order supplies worldwide, see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories,
see http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp.
Ordering through service or support providers
To order a part or accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. (See HP customer
care.)
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers
that are connected to a network)
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server. (See Using
the embedded Web server for an explanation of this feature.)
To order directly through the embedded Web server
342
1.
In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the MFP. The MFP status window
appears.
2.
In the Other links area, double-click Order Supplies. This provides a URL from which to purchase
consumables. Supplies information with part numbers and MFP information is provided.
3.
Select the part numbers that you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
Appendix B
Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Part numbers
The following list of accessories was current at the time of printing. Ordering information and availability
of the accessories might change during the life of the MFP.
Accessories
Item
Description
Part number
3-bin mailbox
Provides three output bins that hold a
total of 700 sheets.
Q7520A
NOTE The 3–bin mailbox
comes with an output accessory
bridge.
500-sheet stapler/stacker
Allows for high-volume output with
automatic job finishing. Staples up to
30 sheets of paper.
Q7519A
NOTE The stapler/stacker
comes with an output accessory
bridge.
5,000-staple cartridge
Provides one staple cartridge.
C8091A
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300
Provides fax capability for the MFP. This
is included with the HP Color LaserJet
4730xmfp, 4730xs mfp, and 4730xm mfp
models.
Q3701A
Item
Description
Part number
HP LaserJet black print cartridge
12,000-page black cartridge
Q6460A
HP LaserJet cyan print cartridge
2,000-page cyan cartridge
Q6461A
HP LaserJet yellow print cartridge
2,000-page yellow cartridge
Q6462A
HP LaserJet magenta print cartridge
2,000-page magenta cartridge
Q6463A
Description
Part number
3–bin mailbox and stapler/stacker
Intermediate paper transfer unit
Print cartridges
Maintenance kits
Item
Image transfer (ETB) kit
ENWW
Q7504A
Image fuser kit
110 volt
Q7502A
Image fuser kit
220 volt
Q7503A
Part numbers
343
Item
Description
Part number
ADF mylar preventive maintenance kit
Q4696–67901
ADF preventive maintenance kit
Q5997A
Customer replaceable units
Item
Description
Part number
Cassette pick-up roller replacement kit
Q7517–67905
Control panel replacement kit
Q7517–60601
Formatter replacement kit
Q7517–69001
MP pick-up roller kit
Q7517–67904
MP pick-up unit replacement kit
RM1–2199–000CN
Memory
Item
Description
Part number
100-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline
memory module)
128 MB
Q7721AA
256 MB
Q7722A
512 MB
Q7723A
Item
Description
Part number
Enhanced I/O (EIO) card
HP Jetdirect 625n Gigabit Ethernet
(10/100/1000Base-T) print server
J7960A
Parallel cable
2 meter IEEE 1284-C cable
C2950A
3 meter IEEE 1284-C cable
C2951A
Boosts the ability of the MFP to handle
large or complex print jobs.
Cables and interfaces
USB cable
Print media
For more information about media supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
Item
Description
Part number
HP LaserJet paper
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPJ1124/North America
For use with HP LaserJet printers. Good for
letterhead, high-value memos, legal
documents, direct mail, and correspondence.
344
Appendix B
Supplies and accessories
ENWW
Item
Description
Part number
Specifications: 96 bright, 90 g/m2 (24 lb)
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPJ1424/North America
A Letter (220 x 280 mm), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
Q2398A/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, Q2400A/Asia-Pacific countries/
5-ream carton
regions
HP Printing paper
For use with HP LaserJet and inkjet printers.
Created especially for small and home
offices. Heavier and brighter than copier
paper.
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream
CHP310/Europe
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPP1122/North America and Mexico
Letter 216 x 279 mm
HPP113R/North America
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream, 3ream carton
Specifications: 92 bright, 22 lb.
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, CHP210/Europe
5-ream carton
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 300 sheets/ream, CHP213/Europe
5-ream carton
HP Multipurpose paper
For use with all office equipment-laser and
inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines.
Created for businesses that want one paper
for all their office needs. Brighter and
smoother than other office papers.
Specifications: 90 bright, 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPM1120/North America
HPM115R/North America
HP25011/North America
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream, 5HPM113H/North America
ream carton
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 250 sheets/ream,
12-ream carton
HPM1420/North America
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole, 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HP Office paper
For use with all office equipment-laser and
inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines.
Good for high-volume printing.
Specifications: 84 bright, 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
ENWW
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPC8511/North America and Mexico
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole, 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
HPC3HP/North America
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPC8514/North America
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), Quick Pack; 2,500sheet carton
HP2500S/North America and Mexico
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), Quick Pack 3-hole;
2,500-sheet carton
HP2500P/North America
Part numbers
345
Item
Description
Part number
A Letter (220 x 280 mm), 500 sheets/
ream, 5-ream carton
Q2408A/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, Q2407A/Asia-Pacific countries/
5-ream carton
regions
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 500 sheets/ream, CHP110/Europe
5-ream carton
HP Office recycled paper
For use with all office equipment-laser and
inkjet printers, copiers, and fax machines.
Good for high-volume printing.
Satisfies U.S. Executive Order 13101 for
environmentally preferable products.
Specifications: 84 bright, 20 lb, 30% postconsumer content.
HP LaserJet transparencies
For use only with HP LaserJet monochrome
printers. For crisp, sharp text and graphics,
rely on the only transparencies specifically
designed and tested to work with
monochrome HP LaserJet printers.
A4 (210 x 297 mm), Quick Pack;
2500 sheets/ream, 5-ream carton
CHP113/Europe
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPE1120/North America
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 3-hole, 500 sheets/
ream, 10-ream carton
HPE113H/North America
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches), 500 sheets/ream,
10-ream carton
HPE1420/North America
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches), 50 sheets to a
carton
92296T/North America, Asia-Pacific
countries/regions, and Europe
A4 (210 x 297 mm), 50 sheets to a
carton
922296U/Asia-Pacific countries/
regions and Europe
Specifications: 4.3-mil thickness.
346
Appendix B
Supplies and accessories
ENWW
C
ENWW
Service and support
347
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
HP LaserJet 4370mfp, HP LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xs 1 year, On-site
mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xm mfp
HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period
specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair
or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above,
due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions
due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund
of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to
incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b)
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation
outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER
WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE
REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA
OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND; THE WARRANTY TERMS
CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE,
RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE
TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP. If customer
schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery.
348
Appendix C
Service and support
ENWW
Print cartridge limited warranty statement
This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured
or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or
operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear
from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace
products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
ENWW
Print cartridge limited warranty statement
349
Fuser and transfer unit limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer
provides a low-life indicator on the control panel.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered
with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside
of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary
use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove
to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO
THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
350
Appendix C
Service and support
ENWW
Availability of support and service
Around the world, HP provides a variety of service and support options for purchase. Availability of these
programs will vary depending upon your location.
ENWW
Availability of support and service
351
HP maintenance agreements
HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs.
Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary by area.
Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you.
On-site service agreements
To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP has on-site service agreements
with three response times:
Priority onsite service
This agreement provides 4-hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP business
hours.
Next-day onsite service
This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended
coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most onsite agreements (for additional charges).
Weekly (volume) on-site service
This agreement provides scheduled weekly on-site visits for organizations with many HP products. This
agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products, including printers, plotters,
computers, and disk drives.
352
Appendix C
Service and support
ENWW
D
MFP specifications
This section provides the following specifications:
●
Physical specifications
●
Electrical specifications
●
Acoustic specifications
●
Environmental specifications
Specifications for the Analog Fax Accessory are available see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory
300 User Guide. A printed copy of this guide is provided with the HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP Color
LaserJet 4730xs mfp, and HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp.
ENWW
353
Physical specifications
Table D-1 Product dimensions
1
Product
Height
Depth
Width
Weight1
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
788 mm (31 inches)
124 kg (273 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
788 mm (31 inches)
124 kg (298 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
1106 mm
(43.5 inches)
136 kg (298 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
1153 mm
(45.4 inches)
639 mm
(25.2 inches)
1106 mm
(43.5 inches)
136 kg (298 lb)
Without print cartridge
Table D-2 Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened
354
Product
Height
Depth
Width
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series
1580 mm (62.2 inches)
980 mm (38.6 inches)
1160 mm (45.7 inches)
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
1580 mm (62.2 inches)
980 mm (38.6 inches)
1160 mm (45.7 inches)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
1580 mm (62.2 inches)
980 mm (38.6 inches)
1588 mm (62.5 inches)
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
1580 mm (62.2 inches)
980 mm (38.6 inches)
1588 mm (62.5 inches)
Appendix D
MFP specifications
ENWW
Electrical specifications
WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the MFP is sold. Do
not convert operating voltages. This can damage the MFP and void the product warranty.
Table D-3 Power requirements (HP LaserJet 4370mfp series)
Specification
110-volt models
230-volt models
Power requirements
100 to 127 volts (± 10%)
220 to 240 volts (± 10%)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
9.0 Amps
4.5 Amps
Rated current
Table D-4 Power consumption HP LaserJet 4370mfp series (average, in watts)1, 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
ENWW
Product model
Copying3
Printing3
Ready4
Sleep5, 6
Off
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp
series
615
604
83
24
0.5
HP Color LaserJet 4730x mfp
615
604
83
24
0.5
HP Color LaserJet 4730xs mfp
615
604
83
24
0.5
HP Color LaserJet 4730xm mfp
640
626
86
25
0.5
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp for current information.
Power numbers are the highest values measured using all standard voltages.
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series printing and copying speeds are 31 ppm Letter size and 30 ppm A4 size.
Heat dissipation in Ready mode = 288 BTU/hour.
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode = 45 minutes.
Recovery time from Sleep mode = less than 20 seconds
Electrical specifications
355
Acoustic specifications
Table D-5 Sound power and pressure level1 (HP LaserJet 4370mfp series)
1
2
3
356
Sound power level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LWAd= 6.7 Bels (A) [67 dB(A)]
Copying3
LWAd= 6.8 Bels (A) [68 dB(A)]
Ready
LWAd= 5.8 Bels (A) [58 dB(A)]
Sound pressure level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing2
LpAm=50 dB (A)
Copying3
LpAm=52 dB (A)
Ready
LpAm=37 dB (A)
Values subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj4730mfp for current information.
HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp series speed is 30 ppm A4 size. Configuration tested (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp): Base model,
simplex printing with A4 paper size.
Configuration tested (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp) Base model, simplex copying from ADF with A4 paper size.)
Appendix D
MFP specifications
ENWW
Environmental specifications
ENWW
Environmental condition
Recommended
Allowed
Storage/standby
Temperature (MFP and print
cartridge)
17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)
15° to 30°C (50° to 86°F)
-20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Relative humidity
30% to 70% relative humidity
(RH)
10% to 80% RH
10% to 90%
Altitude
N/A
0 meters (0 feet) to 2600
meters (8530 feet)
N/A
Environmental specifications
357
358
Appendix D
MFP specifications
ENWW
E
ENWW
Media specifications
359
Print media specifications
This section provides specifications for media that can be used in this MFP. For more information, see
Printing on special media.
Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Caliper
0.094 to 0.18 mm (3.0 to 7.0 mils)
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 inch)
Cut edge conditions
Cut with sharp blades that create no visible fray.
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions
when heated to 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second.
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
3% to 9% by weight
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
Printing and paper storage environment
Ideally, the printing and paper storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and not too
dry or too humid. Remember paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate, while cold
causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove most of the humidity
from a room. As paper is opened and used, it loses moisture, causing streaks and smudging. Humid
weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is opened and used
it absorbs any excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains moisture
it can distort. This can cause jams.
As a result, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself. Paper
storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time (about
3 months). Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes, which can
cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper.
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened packages
of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not wrapped with a
moisture-proof barrier.
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum MFP performance.
The required condition is 20° to 24°C (68° to 75°F), with a relative humidity of 45% to 55%. The following
guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper's storage environment:
360
●
Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
●
The air should not be too dry or too humid (due to the hygroscopic properties of paper).
●
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof wrapping.
If the MFP environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of paper to be used during
the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.
Appendix E
Media specifications
ENWW
Envelopes
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes
depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following
components:
●
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb) or jamming might
occur.
●
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch) curl, and
should not contain air.
●
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the
MFP.
●
Size: You should use only envelopes within the following size ranges.
●
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
●
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
NOTE Use only tray 1 to print envelopes. You might experience some jams when using any
media with a length less than 178 mm (7 inches). This might be caused by paper that has been
affected by environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure you are storing and
handling the paper correctly (see Printing and paper storage environment). Choose envelopes
in the printer driver.
Envelopes with double side seams
Double side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal
seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the seam extends all the way to the corner
of the envelope as illustrated below.
ENWW
1
Acceptable envelope construction
2
Unacceptable envelope construction
Print media specifications
361
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use
adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the MFP. The extra flaps and strips might cause
wrinkling, creasing, or even jams and might even damage the fuser.
Envelope margins
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.
Type of address
Top margin
Left margin
Return address
15 mm (0.6 inch)
15 mm (0.6 inch)
Delivery address
51 mm (2.0 inches)
89 mm (3.5 inches)
NOTE For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the
edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope's seams meet.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is
trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during printing.
For more information, see Envelopes.
Labels
CAUTION To avoid damaging the MFP, use only labels recommended for laser printers. Never
print on the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial sheet of labels.
Label construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the MFP's fusing
temperature.
●
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets
with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
●
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any direction.
●
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
For more information, see Labels.
NOTE Choose labels in the printer driver.
Transparencies
Transparencies used in the MFP must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the MFP's fusing
temperature.
362
Appendix E
Media specifications
ENWW
CAUTION To avoid damaging the MFP, use only transparencies recommended for use in
HP LaserJet printers, such as HP-brand transparencies. (For ordering information, see Part
numbers.)
For more information, see Transparencies.
NOTE
ENWW
Choose transparencies in the printer driver.
Print media specifications
363
Print media weights and sizes
For optimum results, use conventional 75 g/m2 (20 lb) photocopy paper. Verify that the paper is of good
quality and is free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.
●
To order supplies in the U.S., go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies.
●
To order supplies worldwide, go to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html.
NOTE Test any media, particularly custom media, before purchasing large quantities to ensure
that it will perform satisfactorily.
Supported media weights and sizes
Table E-1 Tray 1 media sizes
Tray 1
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Capacity
Paper and cardstock,
standard sizes (letter/A4,
legal, executive, JIS B5, A5);
custom sizes
Range:
Range:
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inch)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond
Glossy paper (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5)
Range:
Range:
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
Minimum 0.13 mm
(0.005 inch) thick
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inch)
0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inch)
220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inch)
Range:
20 envelopes
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Transparencies (letter/A4),
suitable for use in laser
printers
Equivalent to 100 sheets
of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inch)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
HP Tough paper (letter/A4)
NOTE HP Tough
paper cannot be
stapled.
HP Color Laser Glossy Photo
Paper (letter/A4)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Envelopes (Com 10, Monarch,
C5, DL, B5)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/
m2 (24 lb) bond
Labels (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5),
suitable for use in laser
printers
364
Appendix E
Range:
Maximum 0.23 mm
(0.009 inch) thick
Maximum stack height:
10 mm (0.6 inch)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Media specifications
ENWW
Table E-2 Tray 2, 3, and 4 media sizes1
Trays 2, 3, and 4
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Capacity
Paper, standard sizes (letter/
A4, legal, executive, JIS B5,
A5); custom sizes
Range:
Range:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/
Equivalent to 530 sheets of
m2 (32 lb) bond
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond
Glossy paper (letter/A4, legal,
executive, JIS B5, A5)
Range:
Range:
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
Minimum:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
HP Color Laser Glossy Photo
& Imaging Paper (letter/A4)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
Transparencies (letter/A4),
suitable for use in laser
printers
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
HP Tough Paper (letter/A4)
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
Maximum:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 inches)
Labels (letter/A4 and custom
sizes), suitable for use in laser
printers
1
Range:
Maximum:
Maximum stack height:
56 mm (2.2 inches)
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 inches) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick
Trays 2, 3, and 4 use custom sizes specifically for B5 ISO. These trays do not support the range of custom sizes that can be
used in Tray 1.
Table E-3 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Automatic duplex printing
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Paper
Standard sizes:
Range:
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
A4: 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in)
8.5 x 13: 216 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in)
ENWW
Print media weights and sizes
365
Table E-3 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing) (continued)
Automatic duplex printing
Dimensions
Weight or thickness
Legal: 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
Executive: 184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in)
JIS B5: 182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.12 in)
Glossy paper (A4/letter,
13 x 8.5 in, legal, executive,
JIS B5)
See above for standard sizes
supported
Range:
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 120 g/
m2 (32 lb) bond
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
MFP.
HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Standard sizes:
& Imaging Paper (A4/letter)
Letter: 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
NOTE Do not use
inkjet papers in this
A4: 210 x 297 mm
MFP.
(8.27 x 11.7 in)
120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond
Table E-4 Optional 3–bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes
Size
Dimensions1
Weight
Capacity2
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
For plain media: 60 g/m2
(16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
For the stacker on the stapler/
stacker or the lower bin on the
3–bin mailbox: 500 sheets of
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.
For thick media: 128 g/m2
(34 lb) to 199 g/m2 (53 lb)
For the top two bins on the 3–
bin mailbox: each can hold
100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper.
366
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in)
Executive
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.12 in)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
Executive(JIS)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
DPostcard(JIS)
148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 in)
Appendix E
Media specifications
ENWW
Table E-4 Optional 3–bin mailbox or stacker part of the stapler/stacker supported sizes (continued)
Size
Dimensions1
16K
197 x 273 mm
(7.75 x 10.75 in)
Envelope #103
105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in)
Envelope Monarch #7–3/43
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)
Envelope C5 ISO3
162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9.0 in)
Envelope DL ISO3
110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in)
Envelope B5 ISO3
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 in)
Custom
Minimum: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in)
Weight
Capacity2
Maximum: 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in)
Cardstock, transparencies,
and labels are supported only
in the third bin of the 3–bin
mailbox.
1
2
3
The MFP supports a wide range of sizes. Check the MFP software for supported sizes.
Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental conditions.
Face-up delivery only.
Table E-5 Stapler part of the optional stapler/stacker supported sizes
ENWW
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 inches)
For plain media: 60 g/m2
(16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb)
For plain media: 30 sheets of
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.
For thick media: 128 g/m2
(34 lb) to 199 g/m2 (53 lb)
For glossy media: 20 sheets
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)
8.5x13
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
Executive(JIS)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
For thick media: the stack
height must not exceed 7 mm
(0.27 inches)
Print media weights and sizes
367
368
Appendix E
Media specifications
ENWW
F
ENWW
Regulatory information
369
Introduction
This section contains the following regulatory information:
370
●
FCC regulations
●
Environmental Product Stewardship program
●
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)
●
Laser safety statement
●
Canadian DOC statement
●
Korean EMI statement
●
Finnish laser statement
Appendix F
Regulatory information
ENWW
FCC regulations
Compliance with FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense. The end user of this product should be aware
that any changes or modifications made to this equipment without the approval of Hewlett-Packard could
result in the product not meeting the Class A limits, in which case the FCC could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
NOTE Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
ENWW
FCC regulations
371
Telecom
Fax communications
This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks
(PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU R Directive
1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking. For more details see the
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp) issued by the manufacturer.
However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility
depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the
PSTN. Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual. If you experience network
compatibility issues, please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-Packard help desk in the
country/region of operation.
Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the
local PSTN operator.
372
Appendix F
Regulatory information
ENWW
Environmental Product Stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money
without affecting the high performance of this printer. This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR®
(Version 3.0), which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy-efficient office
products.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR mark are U.S. registered service marks. As an ENERGY
STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see http://www.energystar.gov.
Paper use
This product's automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and n-up printing (multiple pages printed
on one page) capabilities can reduce media usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product's life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet
Partners. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are
environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, operation and recycling
processes. We ensure your returned HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing
them to recover valuable plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste
from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to
you. Your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled responsibly when you participate in the HP
Planet Partners program. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (print cartridges, fuser, and transfer unit) can
be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy-to-use
and free takeback program is available in over 35 countries/regions. Multilingual program information
and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.
ENWW
Environmental Product Stewardship program
373
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information
Since 1992, HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge. In 2004, HP Planet
Partners for LaserJet Supplies was available in 85% of the world market where HP LaserJet supplies
are sold. Postage-paid and pre-addressed labels are included within the instruction guide in most HP
LaserJet print cartridge boxes. Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Web site
http://www.hp.com/recycle.
Use the label to return empty, original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label
for, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. Printing supplies or
other objects inadvertently sent to the HP Planet Partners program cannot be returned.
More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2004 through the HP Planet
Partners supplies recycling program. This record number represents 26 million pounds of print cartridge
materials diverted from landfills. Worldwide, in 2004, HP recycled an average of 59% of the print
cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals. Plastics and metals are used to make new
products such as HP products, plastic trays and spools. The remaining materials are disposed of in an
environmentally responsible manner.
●
U.S. returns. For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies, HP
encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the
single, pre-paid, and pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information
in the U.S., call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
●
Non-U.S. returns. Non-U.S. customers should visit the http://www.hp.com/recycle Web site for
further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Recycled paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers according to EN 12281:2002. HP recommends the use
of recycled papers that contain not more than 5% ground wood, such as HP Office Recycled paper.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains a battery that may require special handling at end-of-life.
The battery contained in this product includes:
374
Type
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery
Weight
0.8 grams
Location
Formatter board
User removable
No
Appendix F
Regulatory information
ENWW
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control panel liquid crystal display that
might require special handling at end-of-life.
For recycling information, you can contact http://www.hp.com/go/recycle or contact your local authorities
or the Electronics Industry Alliance: http://www.eiae.org.
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where
you purchased the product.
ENWW
Environmental Product Stewardship program
375
Material safety data sheet
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site
at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.htm.
For more information
To obtain information about the following environmental topics, visit http://www.hp.com/go/
environment or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety.
376
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products.
●
HP's commitment to the environment
●
HP's environmental management system
●
HP's end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Appendix F
Regulatory information
ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
HP Color LaserJet 4730 MFP, 4730x MFP, 4730xs MFP, 4730xm MFP
Product Numbers:
Q7517A, Q7518A, Q7519A, Q7520A
Regulatory Model Number:
Product Options:
Including accessories: Q7521A, Q7522A, Q7523A, BOISB-0308-00
BOISB-0503-004)
ALL
Toner Cartridge: Q6460A, Q6461A, Q6462A, Q6463A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A11 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC:
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 - Class A1)
EN 61000-3-2:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
EN 55024:1998+A1:2001
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A / ICES-003, Issue 42)
GB9254-1998
TELECOM:
TBR-21:1998; EG 201 121:1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the R&TTE
Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. Compliance testing of product to
standard with exception of Clause 9.5, which is not yet in effect.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number (BOISB-0503-00). This number should not be confused with
the product name or the product number(s).
4) All worldwide modular approvals for analog fax accessory obtained by Hewlett-Packard under the regulatory model number BOISB-0308–
00 incorporate the Multi-Tech Systems MT5634SMI Socket Modem Module.
Boise, Idaho , USA
21 December, 2004
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015,
USA, (Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW
Declaration of conformity (HP Color LaserJet 4730mfp)
377
Country-/region-specific safety statements
Laser safety statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a "Class 1" laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external
covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those
specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC statement
Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.
« Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques (CEM). »
Japanese VCCI statement
Japanese cordset statement
378
Appendix F
Regulatory information
ENWW
Korean EMI statement
Taiwan safety statement
ENWW
Country-/region-specific safety statements
379
Finnish laser statement
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 4370mfp, HP LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xs mfp, HP LaserJet
4730xm mfp -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren
utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 4370mfp, HP LaserJet 4730x mfp, HP LaserJet 4730xs mfp, HP LaserJet
4730xm mfp -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa
avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai
muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka
voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen
ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för
osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-800 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
Australia
This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements.
380
Appendix F
Regulatory information
ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2-sided printing 104
3-bin mailbox
capacity 7
configuring 173
light status 298
models including 4
modes 173
part number 10, 343
selecting 112
specifications, physical
500-sheet input tray
models including 2
500-sheet trays
adding 10
part numbers 10
selection settings 52
settings 41
specifications, physical
usage page 215
353
353
A
accessories
lights 298
ordering 342
part numbers 10, 343
troubleshooting 299
accounting hardware 183
acoustic specifications 356
address books, e-mail
auto-complete function 147
importing 194
LDAP support 141
recipient lists, creating 148
address, printer
Macintosh, troubleshooting
317, 320
ADF
blank pages 310
capacity 7
ENWW
cleaning delivery system 231
coying from 135
image shift, troubleshooting
311
lines on copies 310
maintenance kit 229
skewed pages 310
ADF input tray
locating 9
ADF output bin
capacity 7
selecting 112
adhesive labels. See labels
agreements, maintenance 352
Apple Macintosh. See Macintosh
Australian EMC statement 380
auto continue 54
auto sense mode 50
autoscaling copies 136
AUX connection 7
auxiliary connection configuration
75
B
background printing,
troubleshooting 318
background removal, copying
136
battery specifications 374
bins
capacities 7
locating 9
selecting 112
usage page 215
blank pages, troubleshooting 310
Bluetooth 77
booklet printing 106
both sides, printing on 121, 127
browser requirements
embedded Web server 192
HP Web Jetadmin 198
buttons, control panel 32, 33
C
cabinet/stand
models including 3
part number 10
specifications, physical 353
cable, parallel
part number 344
cable, USB
part number 344
calibrating scanner 237
Canadian DOC statement 378
capacity
3-bin mailbox 7
ADF 7
output bins 7
stapler/stacker 7
cartridges
status, viewing with embedded
Web server 193
cartridges, print
ordering iii
part numbers 343
recycling 373
supplies status page, printing
214
warranty 349
cartridges, staple
empty, stop or continue settings
178
loading 107
part numbers 10, 343
checking toner level
HP Easy Printer Care software
222
cleaning
about 230, 232
ADF delivery system 231
Index
381
ADF rollers 232
glass 230
mylar strip 235
outside of MFP 230
touchscreen 230
clearable warnings 54
clock
setting 208
color
adjusting 165
CMYK ink set emulation 162
color lockout 160
edge control 166, 170
four-color printing 162
halftone options 166, 169
HP ImageREt 3600 160
managing options 165, 169
matching 163
neutral grays 167, 169
options 161
Pantone® matching 163
printed vs. monitor 163
printing color samples 164
printing in grayscale 165, 169
sample book matching 163
sRGB 161
using 160
Color tab settings 123, 128
colored paper, copying 136
configuration page
printing 243
configurations, models 2
Configure device menu 43
configuring trays
custom paper size 87
connectivity features 7
contracts, maintenance 352
contrast, copy 136
control panel
buttons 32, 33
cleaning touchscreen 230
Configure device menu 43
copy-screen 132
copy/send settings 55
Copying submenu 44
Diagnostics menu 63
e-mail screen 144
Embedded Jetdirect submenu
58
Enhancement submenu 45
382
Index
Fax menu 39
help 35
I/O submenu 57
Information menu 38
lights 32
locating 9
locking menus 188
menu map 36
messages, settings 54
messages, troubleshooting
297
navigation 34
Originals submenu 43
Paper handling menu 40
PCL submenu 49
Print quality submenu 50
Printing submenu 46
Resets submenu 61
Retrieve job menu 37
Sending submenu 45
Service menu 67
System setup submenu 51
troubleshooting 242
control panel messages 246
controlling print jobs 80
Copitrak devices 183
copy/send settings 55
copying
background removal 136
contrast settings 136
control-panel navigation 132
features 6, 131
job mode 135
multiple originals 135
Originals settings 43
quality, troubleshooting 304
reducing or enlarging 136
sharpness 136
speed specifications 5
storing jobs 138
usage page 215
using ADF 135
using custom settings 133
using default settings 133
using scanner glass 135
Copying submenu 44
cover pages 120, 126
covers 126
covers, locating 9
crooked pages 310
custom paper sizes
driver settings 120
customer support
embedded Web server links
195
HP Instant Support Professional
Edition (ISPE) iii
Macintosh iv
maintenance agreements 352
online iii
service dealers iv
telephone iii
D
date, setting 208
Declaration of Conformity 377
default settings, restoring 61
defects, repeating 313
delay, sleep 210
Describe Original settings 133
Desktop Printer Utility,
troubleshooting 317
DHCP servers 205
Diagnostics menu 63
dial-up connections 8
digital faxing 158
digital sending
about 139, 146
address books 148
configuring e-mail 142
control-panel settings 144
embedded Web server settings
194
folders 150
LDAP support 141
loading documents 146
Originals settings 43
Secondary e-mail option 150
sending documents 146
settings 45
SMTP servers 140
troubleshooting 242
validating gateway addresses
314
workflow 150
Digital Sending tab, embedded
Web server 194
DIMMs (dual inline memory
modules)
installing 325
ENWW
DIMMs (dual inline memory)
part numbers 344
Disk Erase feature 185
DLC/LLC settings 58
document feeder kit, replacing
229
double-sided printing 104, 121,
122, 127, 128
downloading software iii
driver autoconfiguration 14
drivers
accessing 25, 27
downloading iii
Help 25
Macintosh iv
Macintosh, troubleshooting
319
presets 126
quick sets 118
selecting 25
DSL connections 8
duplex printing
binding options 106
control panel settings 105
manual 106
duplex printing accessory
locating 9
part number 10
specifications, physical 353
supported media weights and
sizes 365
usage page 215
duplex-printing accessory
loading 121, 127
duplexing 121, 127
duty cycle 5
E
e-mail
about 139, 146
address books 148
auto-complete function 147
configuring 142
control-panel settings 144
embedded Web server settings
194
LDAP support 141
loading documents 146
Originals settings 43
ENWW
Secondary option, security
150
sending documents 146
settings 45
SMTP servers 140
system requirements 8
troubleshooting 242
validating gateway addresses
314
EIO card
part number 344
EIO cards
installing 338
electrical specifications 355
Embedded Jetdirect submenu 58
embedded Web server
assigning a password 182
checking toner level 222
description 19
Digital Sending tab 194
features 192
Information tab 193
IP address, changing 206
Networking tab 194
opening 192
Other Links tab 195
Settings tab 193
energy consumption 373
energy specifications 355
ENERGY STAR compliance 373
Enhanced I/O card
part number 344
Enhancement submenu 45
enlarging documents
copying 136
envelope feeder
part number 10
settings 40
specifications, physical 353
envelopes
jams 295
loading in Tray 1 90
margins 362
specifications 361
storing 362
environment, specifications 222,
357
environmental stewardship 373
EPS files, troubleshooting 318,
321
Equitrac devices 183
erasing hard disk 185
error messages
printing event log 63
settings 54
troubleshooting 297
Ethernet cards 7
event log 63
Explorer, versions supported
embedded Web server 192
HP Web Jetadmin 198
Extended Service iv
extended warranty 352
F
factory default settings, restoring
61
fans, troubleshooting 242
fax accessory
configuration page 212
connecting phone line 156
installing 152
light status 301
models including 3
part number 10, 343
user guide 151
Fax menu 39
faxing, digital 158
FCC statements 371
features 2, 5
Finnish laser statement 380
firmware, upgrading 217
first page
blank 120
use different paper 120
first page, use different paper
126
flash memory card
installing 329
folders
sending to 150
fonts
EPS files, troubleshooting
318, 321
included 6
lists, printing 216
Macintosh, troubleshooting
318
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
7, 11, 183
Index
383
formatter cage, locking 189
formatter cover, locating 9
formatter lights 300
FTP, sending to 150
function-separator mode, 3-bin
mailbox 173
G
gateways
configuring 142
finding 143
settings 45
validating addresses 314
glass
cleaning 230
copying from 135
graphical display, control panel
32, 34
grayscale printing 165, 169
H
hard disk
erasing 185
font lists 216
heartbeat LED 300
help
control panel 35
Help, printer-driver 25
HP Digital Sending Software
(HP DSS) 150
HP DSS (Digital Sending Software)
150
HP Easy Printer Care Software
using 18, 196
HP Easy Printer Care software
using 196, 222
HP fraud hotline 221
HP Instant Support Professional
Edition (ISPE) iii
HP Jetdirect print server
configuration page 213
firmware updates 220
installing 338
IP address 205
lights 300
models including 2
settings 58
HP Jetdirect print servers
installing 335
HP media, ordering 344
384
Index
HP OpenVMS drivers 24
HP Printing Supplies Returns and
Recycling Program 373
HP Web Jetadmin
browsers supported 198
checking toner level 222
downloading 198
firmware updates 219
IP address, changing 205
HP-Authorized Dealers iv
humidity requirements 222, 357
I
I/O configuration
network configuration 70
I/O submenu 57
IBM OS/2 drivers 24
IEEE 802.11 standard 77
image fuser kit, 110 volt
part number 343
image fuser kit, 220 volt
part number 343
image transfer (ETB) kit
part numbers 343
Information menu 38
information pages 212
Information tab, embedded Web
server 193
input trays
capacities 364
configuring 86
installing
EIO cards 338
fax accessory 152
interface ports
included 7
locating 11
Internet Explorer, versions
supported
embedded Web server 192
HP Web Jetadmin 198
Internet fax 158
IP address
Macintosh, troubleshooting
317, 320
IP addresses, configuring 205
IPX/SPX settings 58
ISPE (HP Instant Support
Professional Edition) iii
J
jam-access lever, locating 9
jams
envelopes 295
locations 276
recovery 277
recovery settings 54
Japanese cordset statement 378
Japanese VCCI statement 378
Jetadmin
browsers supported 198
downloading 198
firmware updates 219
IP address, changing 205
Jetdirect print server
configuration page 213
firmware updates 220
installing 338
IP address 205
lights 300
models including 2
settings 58
job mode, copying 135
job storage
copies 138
Retrieve job menu 37
settings 51
K
Kensington locks 189
kits, maintenance
supplies status page, printing
214
Korean EMI statement 379
L
labels
specifications 362
LAN fax 158
LAN-connector 7
landscape orientation
orignals settings 43
language, control panel 242
languages, printer 6, 53
laser safety statements 378
LDAP servers
connecting to 141
embedded Web server settings
194
settings 45
ENWW
validating gateway addresses
314
lights
accessories 298
control panel 32
fax accessory 301
formatter 300
lines, troublehsooting 310
link speed, network 58
links
embedded Web server 195
Linux drivers 24
loading
staples 107
locking
control panel menus 188
formatter cage 189
log, event 63
M
Macintosh
background printing 318
drivers, accessing 26, 27
drivers, troubleshooting 319
fonts, troubleshooting 318
operating systems supported
13
problems, troubleshooting
317
support Web sites iv
USB card, troubleshooting
318, 321
mailbox mode 173
mailbox, 3-bin
capacity 7
configuring 173
light status 298
models including 4
modes 173
part number 343
part numbers 10
selecting 112
specifications, physical 353
maintenance agreements iv, 352
maintenance kit
supplies status page, printing
214
map, menu 36
margins, envelopes 362
ENWW
Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) 376
media
custom sizes, setting 120
document size, selecting 119
firs page 126
first page 120
HP, ordering 344
loading Tray 2 97
loading Tray 2, 3, and 4 94
loading Tray 2, 3, or 4 92
pages per sheet 120, 127
settings 46
specifications 360
stapling 176
storing 360
supported weights and sizes
364
tray settings 40
usage page 215
media sensing 50
memory
adding 117, 323
enabling 333
features 5
included 2
managing 117
part numbers 344
Menu button 32
menu map, control panel 36
menus, control panel
Configure device 43
copy/send settings 55
Copying 44
Diagnostics 63
Embedded Jetdirect 58
Enhancement 45
Fax 39
I/O 57
Information 38
locking 188
Originals 43
Paper handling 40
PCL 49
Print quality 50
Printing 46
Resets 61
Retrieve job 37
Sending 45
Service 67
System setup 51
mercury specifications 374
messages
error 245
settings 54
status 245
troubleshooting 297
warning 245
messages, control panel
printing event log 63
MFP information pages
troubleshooting 243
Microsoft Windows. See Windows
models, features 2
monthly duty cycle 5
mopier mode 116
multiple pages per sheet 120,
127
mylar strip
cleaning 235
N
n-up printing 120, 127
Netscape Navigator, versions
supported
embedded Web server 192
HP Web Jetadmin 198
Networking tab, embedded Web
server 194
networks
administrative tools 20
AppleTalk 76
configuring 70
connectivity features 7
default gateway 71
disabling DLC/LLC 72
disabling protocols 72
e-mail system requirements 8
HP Jetdirect configuration page
213
installing EIO cards 338
IP address 70
IP addresses 205
Novell NetWare 76
print servers included 2
settings 58
SMTP servers 141
software 17
subnet mask 71
TCP/IP parameters 70
Index
385
troubleshooting printing 315
UNIX/Linux 76
validating gateway addresses
314
Windows 76
noise specifications 356
number of copies 46
O
on/off switch, locating 9
online customer support iii
online help
control panel 35
operating environment
specifications 222, 357
operating systems supported 13
ordering
media, HP 344
part numbers for 343
supplies and accessories 342
ordering supplies iii
orientation, page
orignals settings 43
Originals submenu 43
OS/2 drivers 24
other links
embedded Web server 195
output bins
capacities 7
locating 9
selecting 112
usage page 215
output quality
troubleshooting 304
ozone specifications 373
P
page orientation
orignals settings 43
pages per minute 5
pages per sheet 120, 127
paper
custom sizes, setting 120
document size, selecting 119
first page 120, 126
HP, ordering 344
pages per sheet 120, 127
settings 46
specifications 360
stapling 176
386
Index
storing 360
supported weights and sizes
364
tray settings 40
usage page 215
Paper handling menu 40
paper jams
3–bin mailbox 287
ADF 291
output accessory bridge 290
right covers 278
staple jams 286
stapler/stacker 285
tray 1 283
trays 3, 3, 4 283
paper path
testing 63
paper path test page
printing 243
paper specifications 364
parallel configuration 73
parallel port
features 7
locating 11
part numbers
media, HP 344
memory 344
print cartridges 343
PCL drivers
selecting 25
PCL font list 216
PCL submenu 49
personality settings 53
phone line, connecting fax
accessory 156
phone numbers
ordering supplies iii
service agreements iv
support iii
physical specifications 353
PIN (personal identification
number)
private jobs 115
platforms supported 13
portrait orientation
orignals settings 43
ports
included 7
locating 11
troubleshooting Macintosh
318, 321
PostScript Printer Description
(PPD) files
troubleshooting 317
power
consumption 373
specifications 355
troubleshooting 240
power switch, locating 9
PPDs
troubleshooting 317
preconfiguration 14
presets 126
print cartridge
authentication 221
checking toner levels 222
genuine HP 221
life expectancy 222
managing 221
non-HP 221
replacing 223
storing 222
print cartridges
ordering iii
part numbers 343
recycling 373
status, viewing with embedded
Web server 193
supplies status page, printing
214
warranty 349
Print Document On 119
print media
colored paper 101
envelopes 101
for color printing 161
glossy paper 100
heavy paper 102
labels 101
letterhead 103
loading in Tray 1 89
media to avoid 82
preprinted forms 103
recycled paper 103
selecting 82
specifications 364
supported sizes 364
supported types 364
supported weights 364
ENWW
Tough paper 102
transparencies 100
print quality
troubleshooting 304
Print quality submenu 50
print server card
installing 335
printer
drivers 24, 27
printer driver
Services tab 124
printer languages 6, 53
printer maintenance kit
supplies status page, printing
214
printing
booklets 106
canceling 111
output bin, selecting 112
special media 100
special situations 110
speed specifications 5
usage page 215
printing envelopes 90
printing from Tray 2, 3, or 4 92
Printing submenu 46
printing tasks 79
priority onsite service 352
private jobs
deleting 116
printing 115
processor speed 5
protocol settings 58
PS drivers
selecting 25
PS font list 216
Q
quality
troubleshooting
quick sets 118
304
R
recycling
plastics 373
print cartridges 373
reducing documents
copying 136
registration page
printing 243
ENWW
regulatory statements
Australian EMC 380
Canadian DOC statement 378
Declaration of Conformity 377
FCC 371
Finnish laser statement 380
Japanese cordset statement
378
Japanese VCCI statement
378
Korean EMI statement 379
laser safety 378
Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) 376
Taiwan safety statement 379
Telecom 372
remote firmware update (RFU)
217
repeating defects, troubleshooting
313
replacing
staple cartridges 107
reset button 32, 33
Resets submenu 61
resizing documents
copying 136
resolution
specifications 5
troubleshooting quality 304
restoring default settings 61
retention, job
copies 138
Retrieve job menu 37
Retrieve job menu 37
rollers
cleaning ADF 232
ruler, repetitive defect 313
S
scaling documents
copying 136
scanner calibration 237
scanner glass
cleaning 230
copying from 135
scanner tests 63
scanning
speed specifications 5
scanning e-mail
validating gateway addresses
314
scanning to e-mail
about 139, 146
address books 148
configuring 142
control-panel settings 144
embedded Web server settings
194
LDAP support 141
loading documents 146
Originals settings 43
Secondary option, security
150
sending documents 146
settings 45
SMTP servers 140
troubleshooting 242
Secure Disk Erase 185
security
disk erase 185
e-mail 150
Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
183
locking control panel menus
188
locking formatter cage 189
security features 8
Send to Folder 150
Send to Workflow 150
Sending submenu 45
sending to e-mail
about 139, 142, 146
address books 148
embedded Web server settings
194
LDAP support 141
loading documents 146
Originals settings 43
Secondary option, security
150
sending documents 146
settings 45, 144
SMTP servers 140
troubleshooting 242
validating gateway addresses
314
sensor test 63
service
agreements iv, 352
Index
387
HP-authorized dealers iv
Service menu 67
Services tab 124
settings
configuration page 212
driver presets 126
quick sets 118
restoring defaults 61
Settings tab, embedded Web server
193
sharpness, copy settings 136
Show me how Help 35
size, media
default settings 47
tray settings 40
skewed pages 310
Sleep button 32
sleep settings
delay 210
power specifications 355
wake time 209
SMTP servers
connecting to 140
validating gateway addresses
314
software
applications 20
digital sending (HP DSS) 150
downloading iii
HP Easy Printer Care 18
installing 14
Macintosh iv
macintosh 21
networks 17
operating systems supported
13
uninstalling 17
utilities 18
space requirements 353
special media
printing 100
special situations
blank back cover 110
custom-sized media 110
different first page 110
printing 110
specifications
acoustic 356
electrical 355
envelopes 361
388
Index
features 5
labels 362
operating environment 222,
357
paper 360
physical 353
skew 310
transparencies 362
speed specifications 5
stacker mode, 3-bin mailbox 173
standard output bin
capacity 7
locating 9
selecting 112
staple cartridges
empty, stop or continue settings
178
loading 107
part numbers 10, 343
staple jams 286
stapler/stacker
capacity 7
empty, stop or continue settings
178
light status 298
loading staples 107
models including 3
part number 10, 343
printing to 176
selecting 112
specifications, physical 353
stapling 107
stapling 107
stapling documents 176
stapling options 123
Start button 32, 33
status
Information tab, embedded Web
server 193
lights 298
Status button 32
Stop button 32, 33
stopping a print request 111
storage cabinet
models including 3
part number 10
specifications, physical 353
storage, job
copies 138
Retrieve job menu 37
settings 51
storing
envelopes 362
paper 360
storing jobs
deleting 114
printing 114
private jobs 115
proof and hold jobs 114
quick-copying 115
storing 116
subnet mask 71
supplies
locating 227
ordering iii, 342
part numbers 10, 343
recycling 373
replacement intervals 228
replacing 227
status, viewing with embedded
Web server 193
support
embedded Web server links
195
HP Instant Support Professional
Edition (ISPE) iii
Macintosh iv
maintenance agreements 352
online iii
service dealers iv
telephone iii
supported media weights and sizes
364
system requirements
embedded Web server 192
HP Web Jetadmin 198
printing software 13
system requirements, e-mail 8
System setup submenu 51
T
Taiwan safety statement 379
TCP/IP settings 58, 205
technical support
embedded Web server links
195
HP Instant Support Professional
Edition (ISPE) iii
Macintosh iv
maintenance agreements 352
ENWW
online iii
service dealers iv
telephone iii
Telecom statement 372
telephone numbers
ordering supplies iii
service agreements iv
support iii
temperature
requirements 222
temperature requirements 357
tests 63
time, setting 208
toner
usage page 215
top cover
locating 9
touchscreen, cleaning 230
transparencies
HP, ordering 346
specifications 362
tray 1
locating 9
selection settings 52
settings 40
usage page 215
trays
double-sided printing 122,
128
included 2
selection settings 52
settings 40, 41
specifications, physical 353
usage page 215
troubleshooting
accessories 298, 299
ADF output quality 310
blank pages 310
checklist 240
color printing problems 302
control panel 242
control-panel messages 297
digital sending 242
duplexing 296
EPS files 318, 321
gateway addresses 314
jams 276
lines 310
Macintosh problems 317
media handling problems 293
ENWW
network printing 315
overhead transparencies 304
quality 304
repeating defects 313
skewed pages 310
transparencies 295
TrueType fonts included 6
two-sided printing
control panel settings 105
typefaces
font lists 216
included 6
U
UNIX drivers 24
Update Now 14
upgrading firmware 217
usage page 215
USB configuration 74
USB port
troubleshooting Macintosh
318, 321
Use Different Paper/Covers 120
HP Web Jetadmin, downloading
198
Macintosh support iv
Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) 376
ordering supplies iii, 342
paper specifications 360
service agreements iv
What is this? Help 35
Windows
drivers, accessing 25
versions supported 13
Windows 2000 fax 158
wireless printing
802.11 standard 77
Bluetooth 77
workflow, send to 150
wrong printer, sending to 317
V
validating gateway addresses
314
voltage specifications 355
voltage, troubleshooting 242
W
wake time, setting 209
warranty
extended iv, 352
MFP 348
print cartridge 349
watermarks
cover page 126
Web browser requirements
embedded Web server 192
Web Jetadmin
browsers supported 198
downloading 198
firmware updates 219
IP address, changing 205
Web sites
customer support iii
downloading software iii
environmental information
376
Index
389
390
Index
ENWW
© 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*Q7517-90981*
*Q7517-90981*
Q7517-90981
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising